JP2020089514A - System for game hall - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a system for a game hall, which is to assist a player's symbol-aiming stop, without necessity for the player to select a game machine.SOLUTION: A system for a game hall is provided, including: a game machine including game operation means for starting a game by an operation of a player, symbol variation means provided with a plurality of symbols and starting a variation corresponding to an operation of the game operation means, and symbol stop means for stopping the variation of the symbol variation means corresponding to the operations of the player; image capturing means 69U for capturing images of the variation of the symbol variation means; and stop notification means 1072 (L, C, and R) for determining, from among the symbols, stop symbols to be stopped by the operation of the symbol stop means and making notifications of the timings when the player is to press down the symbol stop means, by making an analysis from the images of the image capturing means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 333

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine system including a support system for a player to stop a symbol, particularly in a gaming machine in a gaming machine such as a slot machine in which the player stops the symbol.

There is a slot machine that informs the player of the state in which the jackpot is confirmed, and the player arranges the jackpot symbols by pushing. Slot machines, the number of pieces that can control the stop of the design by pressing the stop button is set, if the stop design is within the range of 4 to 5 pieces, even if it is a jackpot design, think of the design It is difficult to stop. Therefore, even if the jackpot is confirmed, if the player does not stop it well, the player consumes the medals until the symbols are aligned. Therefore, after the jackpot notification, it is necessary to align the jackpot symbols with the smallest number of games.
Also, there are gaming machines in which the number of coins to be acquired changes depending on the jackpot state of the symbols to be stopped during the big hit or the normal game. Therefore, a game machine has been proposed that can support a player who is not good at pushing the game machine.

For example, in the slot machine of Patent Document 1, stop control means for controlling the rotation reels is stopped, and when a specific winning combination is won, the output of a stop signal triggers the corresponding rotating reels to win the winning combination. A pre-judgment means for deciding whether or not the symbols capable of aligning the combination of the symbols are in the pull-in range, and a stop not canceling the stop signal to stop the rotation reel when it is decided that the symbol is not in the pull-in range. A signal cancellation unit and cancellation cancellation unit that prevents cancellation of the stop signal in the game when triggered by cancellation of the stop signal a predetermined number of times in one game are provided. When the stop signal is output, when it is determined that the stop signal is within the pull-in range, or when the cancellation preventing unit prevents cancellation of the stop signal, stop control of the rotating reel is performed.

For example, the slot machine of Patent Document 2 has a plurality of reels that variably display symbols along a predetermined order, a stop button that captures a player's operation to stop the variation of the symbols, and a predetermined number of reels that have stopped. And a symbol display window for displaying symbols belonging to some sections in the order of No. on the player side. The slot machine includes a moving image presenting means for presenting a moving image by cyclically switching and displaying frame images in synchronization with variable display of symbols.

JP, 2010-136923, A JP, 2008-6212, A

However, the devices that support these push-buttons are equipped on the gaming machine side, and unless the gaming machine has this function, there is no merit to the player, and in a system that can support all gaming machines. Absent.
In addition, the player who is not good at pushing the push button often presses the stop button after the stop symbol has passed and the stop symbol has passed, and if the hit symbol is provided at the same position as the hit symbol, stop it. Timing is a problem, not a device that suggests when to stop.
Further, since it is not a system for supporting the player to stop the design desired by the player, there is no system capable of setting the design which the player can freely stop.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION In order to solve such a problem, the present invention aims to provide a system for a game arcade which supports a player's push without having to select a game machine.

A game operating means for starting a game when a player operates, a lottery means for randomly selecting a winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations in accordance with the operation of the game operating means, and a plurality of symbols, and the game operating means A game machine provided with a symbol variation means for starting variation in accordance with an operation, and a symbol stopping means for stopping variation in the symbol variation means in response to an operation by the player, and an image of variation in the symbol variation means The image capturing means and the stop symbol to be stopped by the operation of the symbol stopping means among the symbols is determined, analyzed from the image of the image capturing means, and the stop notification for notifying the timing when the player presses the symbol stop means Means and are provided.

The effect of the present invention is that the device that assists the timing for stopping the symbol desired by the player enables the player to press depending on the notification of the stop notification means and easily stop the symbol desired by the player. It is possible.

FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a part of a game arcade. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a game arcade. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the flow of data on the network of the game arcade. FIG. 4 is a configuration diagram of main software. FIG. 5 is a transition diagram of the interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 6 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 7 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 8 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 9 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 10 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 11 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 12 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 13 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 14 is a transition diagram of the interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 15 is an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 16 is an interface screen of the operating terminal. FIG. 17 is an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 18 is an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 19 is an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 20 is an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 21 is an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 22 is an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 23 is a transition diagram of the interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 24 is an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 25 is an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 26 is an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 27 is an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 28 is an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 29 is an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 30 is an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 31 is an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 32 is an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 33 is a sequence diagram of individual call processing. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the individual call processing. FIG. 35 is a sequence diagram of group call processing. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of group call processing. FIG. 37 is a sequence diagram of the call processing. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the convocation call processing. FIG. 39 is a sequence diagram of alarm information distribution processing. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the alarm information distribution process. FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram of a database of alarm information. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram of a database of alarm information. FIG. 43 is a sequence diagram of the alarm information voice distribution process. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the alarm information voice distribution process. FIG. 45 is a sequence diagram when opening and closing the gaming machine. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the opening/closing process of the gaming machine. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of door open signal processing. FIG. 48 is a sequence diagram of a caution person notification process. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the attention-required person notification process. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the face authentication matching process. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data transmitted to the face authentication server. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of data indicating a matching result from the face authentication server. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 54 is an overall configuration diagram of a game arcade system connected to the Internet network. FIG. 55 is a sequence diagram of a group code creating process of the system for identifying a goto group. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of a group code creating process of the system for identifying a goto group. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram of a captured image of a system for identifying a goto group. FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram of a captured image of a system for identifying a goto group. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram of each server of the system for identifying a goto group. FIG. 60 is a conceptual diagram of a system for identifying a goto group. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of group code data. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data of a face authentication number and pseudo data. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the extraction processing of the system for identifying the goto group. FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram of a ball lending machine used in the game hall system. FIG. 68 is a configuration diagram of a device connected to the main CPU of the ball lending machine. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing a liquid crystal operation unit of the ball lending machine. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing a liquid crystal operation unit of the ball lending machine. FIG. 71 is a block diagram of a membership card. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing a network of face authentication devices in the game hall system. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing the data structure of the face authentication server and the individual face authentication server. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the main process. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of member processing. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of non-member processing. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of non-member processing. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of common processing. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the recorded data capture process. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the face authentication matching process. FIG. 81 is a time chart of a recorded data capture image. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the face authentication server matching process. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the leaving process. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the abnormality processing. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the personal identification number registration processing. FIG. 86 is a sequence diagram showing processing when a member is seated. FIG. 87 is a sequence diagram showing processing when a non-member sits down. FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram of a captured image instruction list. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of inputting a personal identification number. FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of inputting a personal identification number as seen from a plane. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing items determined by the face authentication engine installed in the individual face authentication device. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram of a form output from the hall computer. FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram of a form output from the face authentication server. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of an application end ball registration process for registering an end ball by application software installed in a personal portable terminal. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the ball lending machine registration processing for registering an end ball by the ball lending machine. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of an edge ball server registration process for registering an edge ball by the edge ball server. FIG. 97 is a sequence diagram of a process of registering an end ball. FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram when registering an end ball. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of an application edge ball payout process when paying out an edge ball by application software installed in a personal portable terminal. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of an end-piece server payout process by the end-piece server. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of an end-piece server payout process by the end-piece server. FIG. 102 is a flowchart of the ball lending machine payout processing by the ball lending machine. FIG. 103 is a sequence diagram of a process for paying out an end ball. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram when paying out an end ball. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of a special code creating process when creating a special code. FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data stored in the end ball server. FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the data stored in the end ball server. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display displayed when accessing an edge server displayed on the personal portable terminal. FIG. 109 is a payout chart showing the transition of the difference ball of the gaming machine and the possessed ball for each individual. FIG. 110 is an individual balance sheet for each individual using the individual face authentication device. FIG. 111 is a gaming machine-specific analysis form of gaming machines that are collected for each individual using the individual face authentication device. FIG. 112 is a correction value form for each income and expenditure using the individual face authentication device. FIG. 113 is a gaming machine-specific analysis form of gaming machines that are totalized for each individual who uses the individual face authentication device and analyzed based on the correction values. FIG. 114 is a schematic view of the arrangement of surveillance cameras in operation in the intruder surveillance system. FIG. 115 is a schematic view of the arrangement of monitoring cameras in which the intrusion monitoring system operates in the intruder monitoring system. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of image pickup positions indicating positions taken by the surveillance camera in the intruder surveillance system. FIG. 117 is a schematic diagram showing a state of a monitor connected to the surveillance camera system in the intruder surveillance system. FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram showing a recording area of a recording device provided in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 119 shows a system diagram of a power supply line for a game machine and facility equipment. FIG. 120 shows a transition diagram of control modes in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 121 is a flowchart of nighttime monitoring mode processing in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of the reproduction mode process in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 123 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the focus position of each camera in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 124 is a conceptual diagram showing how the intrusion monitoring system catches an intruder. FIG. 125 is a conceptual diagram showing how the intrusion monitoring system catches an intruder. FIG. 126 is a flowchart of nighttime monitoring mode 2 processing in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 127 shows a system diagram of a power supply line for a game machine and island equipment. FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a recorded image is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen of the platform information display device in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 129 shows a configuration diagram of the nighttime monitoring system in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 130 is a conceptual diagram showing how the nighttime monitoring system in the intrusion monitoring system catches an intruder. FIG. 131 is a time chart regarding recording by each camera of the nighttime monitoring system in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 132 is a flowchart of power supply abnormality processing in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 133 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged plane of a part of each camera in the immobilization detection system. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram for each item of the blackout detection method. FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram of a blackout detection method. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram of a blackout detection method. FIG. 137 is a schematic view showing an enlarged plane of a part of the island equipment in the immobilization detection system. FIG. 138 is a flowchart of blackout detection processing in the immobilization detection system. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of blindfold countermeasure processing in the immobilization detection system. FIG. 140 is a sequence diagram of the immobilization detection system. FIG. 141 is a time chart of each camera in the immobilization detection system. FIG. 142 is a time chart in the immobilization detection system. FIG. 143 is a schematic view showing the layout of each island facility installed in the game arcade in a plan view and a side view. FIG. 144 is a schematic view showing a part of the inside of the island facility in a side view. FIG. 145 is a schematic view showing each device installed in the island facility in a perspective view. FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram showing a storage state of the game media stored in the game media storage tank installed in the island facility. FIG. 147 is a perspective view of a part of the shelf board for collecting the game medium as seen from the back surface. FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the entire shelf board for collecting the game medium as viewed from the back surface. FIG. 149 is a side view schematically showing how the game media are collected by the shelf board. FIG. 150 is a perspective view in which a part of the modified example of the shelf board is viewed from the back side by cutting a part of the game medium storage tank. FIG. 151 is a perspective view showing a part of a modified example of the shelf board for collecting the game medium, as seen from the back surface. FIG. 152 is a side view showing a part of a modified example of the shelf board. FIG. 153 is a perspective view showing an upper tank installed in the island facility. FIG. 154 is a perspective view showing the inside of the shutter portion. FIG. 155 is a schematic view showing a state in which the shutter portion is opened and closed on the side surface. FIG. 156 is a block diagram showing a state in which devices that control shutter sections installed in a plurality of island facilities are connected. FIG. 157 is a block diagram showing the connection of devices that control the shutter unit. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the shutter section opening/closing processing. FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing a storage state of the game media stored in the game media storage tank installed in each island facility. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the storage tank averaging process. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the ball carrying shutter process. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the closing process mode process. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the sensor position setting process. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the sensor position setting process. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the sensor position setting process. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the initialization process. FIG. 167 is a schematic view of the movement of the sensor installed on the shelf board as seen from the bottom surface. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the ball jam detection processing. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing a ball jam abnormality process. FIG. 170 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a foreign matter is mixed in the shelf board. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram showing a state when the shelf board is activated. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram showing a state when the shelf board is operated. FIG. 173 is a perspective view showing a sensor and a vibration device of a modified example installed on the shelf board. FIG. 174 is a perspective view showing the inside of a vibration device of a modified example installed on a shelf board. FIG. 175 is a schematic view showing a part of the inside of the island facility of another modification in a side view. FIG. 176 is a schematic view showing a part of the inside of the island facility of another modification in a side view. FIG. 177 is a schematic diagram showing an end face of the platform information display device and the pachinko machine of Modification 1 as seen from the side by cutting the island equipment. FIG. 178 is a perspective view of the platform information display device of the first modification as viewed from the front side. FIG. 179 is a perspective view of the platform information display device of the first modification as viewed from the back side. FIG. 180 is a schematic diagram of a state in which the platform information display device of the first modification displays information as viewed from the front. FIG. 181 is a schematic view showing a state in which the platform information display device of the modified example 1 attached to the island facility is closed from the side surface side. FIG. 182 is a schematic view showing a state in which the platform information display device of the modified example 1 attached to the island facility is opened from the side surface side. FIG. 183 is a perspective view showing an open state of the platform information display device of the modified example 1 attached to the island facility from above. FIG. 184 is a perspective view showing the calling lamp portion mounted on the platform information display device of the first modification from the front side. FIG. 185 is a perspective view showing the calling lamp portion mounted on the platform information display device of the first modification from the back side. FIG. 186 is an explanatory diagram showing an end surface obtained by cutting the calling lamp portion mounted on the platform information display device of the first modification. FIG. 187 is a perspective view of the platform information display device of Modification 2 as seen from the front side. FIG. 188 is a front view of a part of the platform information display device and the pachinko machine of the second modification as viewed from the front side. FIG. 189 is a front view showing a state in which a plurality of platform information display devices of the modified example 1 are arranged on the island facility and information is displayed. FIG. 190 is a front view showing a state in which a plurality of platform information display devices of the modified example 1 are arranged on the island facility and information is displayed. FIG. 191 is a front view showing a state in which a plurality of platform information display devices of Modification 1 are arranged on the island facility and information is displayed. FIG. 192 is a front view showing a state in which a plurality of platform information display devices of the modified example 1 are arranged on the island facility and information is displayed. FIG. 193 is a front view showing a state in which a plurality of platform information display devices of the modified example 1 are arranged on the island facility and information is displayed. FIG. 194 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which information is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit of the platform information display device of the first modification. FIG. 195 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which information is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit of the platform information display device of the first modification. FIG. 196 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which information is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit of the platform information display device of the first modification. FIG. 197 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the platform information display device of the first modification. FIG. 198 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of platform information display data used when controlling the platform information display device of the first modification. FIG. 199 is a sequence diagram when controlling the platform information display device of the first modification. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing a manual display process when controlling the platform information display device of the first modification. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing a manual transmission process when controlling the platform information display device of the first modification. FIG. 202 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which information is displayed on the liquid crystal display of the platform information display device of the first modification. FIG. 202 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which information is displayed on the liquid crystal display of the platform information display device of the first modification. FIG. 204 is a front view and a rear view showing Modification 3 of the calling lamp section. FIG. 205 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit of the modified example 1 is attached to the ball lending machine. FIG. 206 is a perspective view showing a counting unit of the first modification. FIG. 207 is a perspective view showing the counting unit of the first modification. FIG. 208 is a side view showing the counting unit of the first modification. FIG. 209 is a plan view showing the counting unit of the first modification. FIG. 210 is a cross-sectional view showing a counting unit of Modification 1. FIG. 211 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit of the modified example 2 is attached to the ball lending machine. FIG. 212 is a perspective view showing a counting unit of the second modification. FIG. 213 is a perspective view showing a counting unit of Modification Example 2. FIG. 214 is a side view showing the counting unit of the second modification. FIG. 215 is a plan view showing a counting unit of Modification 2. FIG. 216 is a cross-sectional view showing a counting unit of Modification 2. FIG. 217 is a perspective view showing a lock mechanism of the counting unit according to the second modification. FIG. 218 is a cross-sectional view showing a lock mechanism of the counting unit of Modification 2. FIG. 219 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit of Modification 3 is mounted on a pachinko machine. FIG. 220 is an enlarged perspective view of a counting unit of Modification 3 mounted on a pachinko machine. 221: is a perspective view which shows the counting unit of the modification 3. FIG. FIG. 222 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit of Modification 3 is disassembled. FIG. 223 is a perspective view showing a counting unit of Modification 3. FIG. 224 is a plan view showing a counting unit of Modification 3. FIG. 225 is a cross-sectional view and an end view showing the counting unit of Modification 3. FIG. 226 is a cross-sectional view showing a storage unit of a counting unit of a modified example. FIG. 227 is a cross-sectional view showing the accommodation portion of the counting unit of the modified example. FIG. 228 is a plan view showing the accommodating portion of the counting unit of the modified example. FIG. 229 is a plan view showing how a pachinko ball rolls in the accommodation unit of the counting unit of the modification. FIG. 230 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit of the modified example 4 is mounted on the ball lending machine. FIG. 231 is a plan view showing a counting unit of Modification 4. FIG. 232 is a perspective view showing a counting unit of Modification 4. FIG. 233 is a perspective view showing a partially cut counting unit of Modification 4. FIG. 234 is a perspective view showing a part of the counting unit of the modification 4 in an enlarged manner. FIG. 235 is a perspective view showing a state in which a part of the counting unit of Modification 4 is enlarged and a pachinko ball is returned. FIG. 236 is a perspective view showing a state in which a part of the counting unit of Modification 4 is enlarged and a pachinko ball is returned. FIG. 237 is a side view of the counting unit according to the modified example 4 showing how the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 238 is a side view of the counting unit according to the modified example 4 showing how the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 239 is a perspective view of a counting unit of Modification 4 in which a part of the pachinko ball is returned and is cut. FIG. 240 is a perspective view of a counting unit of Modification 4 in which a part of the pachinko ball is returned and is cut. FIG. 241 is a perspective view of a counting unit of Modification 4 in which a part of the pachinko ball is returned and is cut. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing an individual count returning process in the counting unit of the modified example 4. FIG. 243 is a schematic diagram showing a switching state of the passages in the counting unit of the modified example 4. FIG. 244 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit of the modified example 5 is mounted on the ball lending machine. FIG. 245 is a perspective view showing a counting unit of Modification 5. FIG. 246 is a plan view showing a counting unit of Modification 5. FIG. 247 is a perspective view showing a state in which a part of the counting unit of the modified example 5 is enlarged and the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 248 is a perspective view showing a state in which a part of the counting unit of Modification 5 is enlarged and a pachinko ball is returned. FIG. 249 is a perspective view showing a state in which a pachinko ball is returned by enlarging a part of the counting unit of the modified example 5. FIG. 250 is a perspective view of a counting unit of Modification 5 in which a part of the pachinko balls is returned and is cut. FIG. 251 is a perspective view of a counting unit of Modification 5 in which a part of the pachinko ball is returned and is cut. FIG. 252 is a perspective view of a counting unit of Modification 5 in which a part of the pachinko balls is returned and is cut. FIG. 253 is a perspective view of a counting unit of Modification 5 in which a part of the pachinko balls is returned and is cut. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the return dish return processing in the counting unit of the fifth modification. FIG. 255 is a schematic diagram showing the movement of a pachinko ball inside the ball lending machine. FIG. 256 is a block diagram showing transmission/reception of data between devices in a wireless game arcade. FIG. 257 is a block diagram of the first communication showing transmission/reception of data between the respective devices of the game hall system. FIG. 258 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a platform information display device of a game hall system. FIG. 259 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a receiving device of the game hall system. FIG. 260 is a block diagram showing transmission/reception of data in the island facility of the game arcade system. FIG. 261 is a block diagram of the first communication showing transmission/reception of data between the respective devices of the game hall system. FIG. 262 is a schematic diagram showing a data structure transmitted/received between the respective devices of the game hall system. FIG. 263 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data transmitted and received by the game hall system. FIG. 264 is a sequence diagram at the time of initial registration between the devices of the game hall system. FIG. 265 is a sequence diagram showing a standby state between the respective devices of the game hall system. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing game data communication main processing of the game hall system. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing emergency communication data processing of the game hall system. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing a first communication data transmission process of the game hall system. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing a second communication data transmission process of the game hall system. FIG. 270 is a sequence diagram showing a data communication process between each device of the game hall system. FIG. 271 is a sequence diagram showing a data communication process in an emergency between each device of the game hall system. FIG. 272 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data transmitted and received in a modified example of the system for a game arcade. FIG. 273 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each device for transmitting and receiving call data of the game hall system. FIG. 274 is a block diagram showing transmission/reception of call data between the respective devices of the game hall system. FIG. 275 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration between each device of the game hall system. FIG. 276 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each device that transmits and receives call data of the game hall system. FIG. 277 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each device that transmits and receives call data of the game hall system. FIG. 278 is a sequence diagram showing a call data communication process between the respective devices of the game hall system. FIG. 279 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of rewriting the input amount of money in the game hall system. FIG. 280 is a sequence diagram showing a process of rewriting the input amount of money in the game hall system. FIG. 281 is a flow chart showing the main processing for rewriting the input amount of money in the game hall system. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing the camera determination processing for each unit of the game hall system. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing an amount rewriting process of the game hall system. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing guest card balance face authentication processing of the game hall system. FIG. 285 is an explanatory diagram showing the layout and radio field intensity of the devices installed in the game arcade of the game arcade system. FIG. 286 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged part of the layout of the devices installed in the game arcade of the game arcade system. FIG. 287 is a table showing the relationship between the radio field intensity and the distance of the game hall system. FIG. 288 is a perspective view showing a ball box and a ball box mounting base having a function of charging the ball box of the game hall system. FIG. 289 is a perspective view showing a ball box of the game hall system. FIG. 290 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a pachinko ball is transferred from the ball box of the game hall system. FIG. 291 is a schematic diagram showing a state of a ball box when a pachinko ball is transferred from the ball box of the game hall system. FIG. 292 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ball box of the game hall system. FIG. 293 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ball box of the game hall system. FIG. 294 is a list of data used in the ball box management system of the game hall system. FIG. 295 is a chart showing the contents of detecting the state of the ball box of the game hall system. FIG. 296 is a sequence diagram showing control of the ball box management system of the game hall system. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing a ball box management control process of the game hall system. FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing a ball box monitoring control process of the game hall system. FIG. 299 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an information collecting system for collecting game information to be displayed on the platform information display device. FIG. 300 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode list showing an example of the relationship between the display mode displayed on the platform information display device and the type of the game machine model. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the display mode switching process. FIG. 302 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display content list showing the display modes and the display content on the platform information display device. FIG. 303 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a game machine information signal output from the information terminal board of the game machine. FIG. 304 is a time chart showing processing of a game machine information signal in the platform information display device. FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing a payout speed display control process for controlling the display of information about the payout speed on the platform information display device. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing a payout speed display process for controlling the display of information about the payout speed on the platform information display device. FIG. 307 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mode of displaying on the platform information display device. FIG. 308 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mode of displaying on the platform information display device. FIG. 309 is a schematic diagram showing an example of signals of gaming machine information output from the information terminal board of the gaming machine. FIG. 310 is a time chart showing processing of signals of gaming machine information in the platform information display device. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing a start number non-display process for controlling the display of the platform information display device. FIG. 312 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mode of displaying on the platform information display device. FIG. 313 is a list showing an example of contents displayed on the platform information display device. FIG. 314 is a schematic diagram showing an effect of a pachinko machine and a mode of a special symbol displayed on the special symbol LED display. FIG. 315 is a schematic diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reels of the slot machine. FIG. 316 is a schematic diagram showing a comparison of the number of payouts in the symbols in which the reels of the slot machine are stopped. FIG. 317 is a comparison table showing the number of bonus cards that can be acquired by the slot machine. FIG. 318 is a comparison table regarding probabilities and machine divisions in the set values of the slot machines. FIG. 319 is a table showing information about jackpots of slot machines for each person. FIG. 320 is a table showing the ratio of the number of game players for each day of the week and the age group and the correction value for each age group. FIG. 321 is a table showing the technical intervention rank and the success rate. FIG. 322 is a comparison table showing theoretical values and measured values for each table. FIG. 323 is a comparison table showing set values and correction values. FIG. 324 is a comparison table regarding the machine allocation in the setting values of the slot machines for each of the units. FIG. 325 is a schematic diagram of an operation screen showing input of setting values for each table displayed on the monitor. FIG. 326 is a schematic diagram of an operation screen showing the layout and set values displayed on the monitor. FIG. 327 is an enlarged schematic diagram of a part of the operation screen displayed on the monitor. FIG. 328 is a flowchart showing the set value control processing for controlling the display of the set value and the hole layout of the set value on the hall computer. FIG. 329 is a flowchart showing a set value control process for controlling the display of the set value and the hole layout of the set value on the hall computer. FIG. 330 is a perspective view showing a slot machine and a medal lending machine. FIG. 331 is a perspective view showing each camera unit mounted on the medal lending machine. FIG. 332 is a perspective view showing a state where the camera units mounted on the medal lending machine are opened and closed. FIG. 333 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the technical intervention support unit. FIG. 334 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the medal lending machine. FIG. 335 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the image processing unit. FIG. 336 is an explanatory diagram showing a screen display of the liquid crystal operation unit after the image of the slot machine is recognized. FIG. 337 is a schematic diagram showing a display of an operation screen of the liquid crystal operation unit. FIG. 338 is a flowchart showing the technical intervention support processing. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the symbol determination processing. FIG. 340 is an explanatory diagram showing how reel symbols of a slot machine are judged. FIG. 341 is an explanatory diagram showing another state of determination of the reel symbol of the slot machine. FIG. 342 is an explanatory diagram showing another aspect of determination of the reel symbol of the slot machine. FIG. 343 is a time chart showing an initial setting of reel symbols of the slot machine. FIG. 344 is a time chart showing a state of the technical intervention support processing of the reel symbol of the slot machine. FIG. 345 is a perspective view showing each other camera unit mounted on the smoke separation board of another embodiment. FIG. 346 is a perspective view showing each camera unit mounted on the smoke separation board of another embodiment. FIG. 347 is a perspective view showing a slot machine and a medal lending machine according to another embodiment. FIG. 348 is a perspective view showing camera units mounted on a medal lending machine according to another embodiment.

An embodiment of a game hall system according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The embodiments and drawings described below exemplify a part of the embodiments of the present invention, and are not used for the purpose of limiting these configurations, and do not depart from the scope of the present invention. Can be changed as appropriate. Corresponding constituent elements in each drawing are designated by the same or similar reference numerals.

(Amusement hall equipment configuration)
The game arcade 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a part of the game arcade 1. FIG. 2 is a configuration diagram of the game arcade 1.
The game hall 1 is divided into a management area 2 and a game area 3. The gaming area 3 is an area where the pachinko machine P and the slot machine SMA are installed in the island facility HS, and the visitor M plays a game with these gaming machines. Here, in the gaming machine, in addition to the pachinko machine P and the slot machine SMA, a so-called parrot machine in which a pachinko ball is used as a medium and a game like a slot machine SMA is performed, or an enclosed pachinko machine in which the pachinko ball is enclosed in the machine, It also includes slot machines used in casino facilities.

The pachinko machine P and the slot machine SMA are provided with an information terminal board I for providing information to the outside. The information terminal board I is a terminal for outputting a signal as an event code described later to the outside. The signal output from the information terminal board I is, for example, a signal output when the door of the pachinko machine P or the slot machine SMA is opened, and is output when the glass door of the pachinko machine P is opened. There is a glass open signal to turn on. In addition, as the signal indicating the operation of the game as the gaming machine-related information, there are signals such as the number of out balls, the number of safe balls, special prize signals (big hit, probability change, small hit, time reduction and AT), sales information, and the like. Other signals include signals from a magnetic sensor or a radio wave sensor that reacts to magnetism or radio waves used for goto.

The island facility HS is provided with a facility for transporting, supplying and cleaning a game medium for playing a game machine. In the island facility HS, a plurality of chairs C are arranged in pairs with the gaming machine so that the visitor M can sit and play. A plurality of island facilities HS are installed according to the number of gaming machines. A passage is provided between the island facilities HS so that a visitor M can move and a ball box or the like containing the acquired game media can be placed near the chair C.

In addition to the gaming machine, the island facility HS is provided with a ball lending machine PT and a lending machine CT that pair with the gaming machine and lend a gaming medium to the visitor M. In addition, above the game machine, there is provided a platform information display device K for displaying information on the game machine, such as the number of jackpots and the number of starts of the game machine, to the customer. The platform information display device K is provided with a liquid crystal display screen 891 for displaying information on the gaming machine and a 7-segment display, and informs the employee MS with an LED or the like when the gaming machine is in trouble or when the gaming medium is exchanged. A switch is provided. At the end of the island facility HS, a counter JC that counts game balls and other game media acquired by the visitor M is provided.

The game area 3 is provided with a plurality of wireless routers 5 each having a radio wave area of about 40 m, and many radio routers 5 cover the reachable area of the mobile terminal device 40. The wireless router 5 is used for data communication and phone calls between the employee MS, but may be used for information distribution to the visitor M. Further, the wireless router 5 may be installed on the ceiling of the island facility HS, on the upper part of the island facility such as the transport gutter, or on the upper tank, or at the same position as the surveillance camera 61. Further, the wireless router 5 may have a structure integrated with the surveillance camera 61. By installing the wireless router 5 and the monitoring camera 61 at the same position, or by installing the wireless router 5 and the monitoring camera 61 integrally, it is possible to measure the distance of a person by image recognition and to carry the mobile phone by the radio field intensity of the wireless router 5. It can also be used to identify the position and distance of the terminal device 40, and it becomes possible to accurately measure the distance and the like comprehensively using both measurement techniques.
Further, a plurality of surveillance cameras 61 are provided in the game area 3, and are attached to the ceiling on the extension line of the passage so as to catch the visitor M who is playing the game. Further, the surveillance camera 61 is installed near the entrance of the game hall 1, toward the prize exchange hall, the money changer, the safe and the counter JC.

The management area 2 is an area in which facilities for managing and operating the game arcade 1 are mainly installed by a responsible person. The management area 2 is often different in level and room from the game area 3, and mainly the hall computer 90 that manages the operating status of the pachinko machine P and the slot machine SMA and the surveillance camera that monitors the behavior of the visitor M. A system 60, a face authentication server 80 (face authentication system) for identifying a person's face, and a communication server 10 for making calls and communications between employees MS are installed.

The hall computer 90 has a built-in CPU, ROM, RAM and hard disk, saves the above-mentioned various information obtained from each gaming machine in the hard disk, and has a function of displaying the information as a form on a monitor separately provided and a function of printing. have. Also, the hall computer 90 stores a data by separately providing a server when the amount of information is large.
A surveillance camera system 60 including a plurality of surveillance cameras 61 has a built-in CPU, ROM, RAM, and hard disk, and records the video of each surveillance camera 61 in a recording server 64 of the surveillance camera system 60.

The face authentication server 80 has a CPU, a ROM, a RAM and a hard disk built therein, and an image or video of a face or appearance related to a visitor collected in the game hall 1 or an image or video of a face or appearance related to a goto from another store. Has the function of storing or processing.
The communication server 10 has a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and a hard disk built therein, and stores a main program for performing communication and a telephone call described later. The operation terminal 11 for operating the communication server 10 has a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and a hard disk built therein, and has a monitor attached outside. The operation terminal 11 is provided with an interface screen for performing an operation function as a master unit for calling and communicating and setting the communication server 10.
An island switchboard DT, which will be described later, is provided at the end of the island facility HS, and power is turned on and off for each gaming machine, ball lending machine (game medium lending means) PT, and lending machine (game medium lending means) CT. Is possible. Furthermore, a battery BA for nighttime monitoring, which will be described later, is provided at the end of the island facility HS and is used in a system for controlling nighttime monitoring.

(Connection configuration of each device in the game hall)
Next, connection of each device used in the game arcade 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.
In order to convert the data output as a contact signal or a pulse signal as a signal from the information terminal board I of the pachinko machine P or the slot machine SMA, and to send it to the hall computer 90, one in two or one in the game machine One platform computer 93 is provided for each platform. The platform computer 93 also collects sales data of the ball lending machine PT, the rental machine CT and the like and data of the individual face authentication device 800. The platform computer 93 converts the signal into a serial signal or the like and sends the signal to the island computer 91 at the end of the island facility HS by the island wiring 92. The platform computer 93 is also connected to the platform information display device K and transmits the data desired by the store visitor M. In the present embodiment, data is transmitted from each gaming machine to the platform information display device K via the platform computer 93, but data is transmitted from each gaming machine to the platform information display device K and data is transmitted to the island computer 91. May be connected to send.

The island computer 91 of each island facility HS is connected to the hall computer 90 in the management area 2 by island wiring 95 through the ceiling or the like. Further, in the island computer 91, the counter JC and the hall computer 90 are connected by bidirectional communication.
As the in-island wiring 92 and the island wiring 95, twisted wires, RS232C, RS422, RS485, optical cables, and the like are adopted in consideration of noise, propagation distance, and the like, and are appropriately changed and used according to the application. The island computer 91 and the base computer 93 are equipped with a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM, and perform signal conversion and communication processing for collecting data of each device and transmitting the data to the hall computer 90.

The wireless router 5 is connected to the switching hub 7 in the management area 2 with a LAN cable. The wireless router 5 and the mobile terminal device 40 are wirelessly connected by a wireless LAN.
Each surveillance camera 61 is connected to the camera hub 65 by a camera wiring 63 using a LAN cable, a coaxial cable, an optical cable, or the like.
The face authentication server 80, the communication server 10, the surveillance camera system 60, the operation terminal 11 and the hall computer 90 in the management area 2 are connected via the switching hub 7 by the connection wiring 8 using a LAN cable.
The surveillance camera system 60 is connected to the surveillance cameras 61, the face authentication server 80, the immobilization detection server, and the individual cameras 69 by the above-described communication mode, and operates in cooperation with each other.
The router 9 is connected to the switching hub 7 and is connected to another store or a chain store headquarters 500 by the Internet network E through the Internet line 588 to send and receive data.

The overall configuration of the game hall system for specifying the goto group will be described with reference to FIG. 54. The case where there are many amusement halls 1 as chain stores is shown, and the chain store headquarters 500 collects various information including business information from the amusement hall 1 and manages these data. The chain store head office 500 stores at least face image data (605 and 606 in FIG. 57 or FIG. 58) of the person MB requiring attention as one of the pieces of information in the face authentication server 580. Then, the chain store head office 500 delivers face image data 605 capturing the face necessary for face authentication of the caution person MB to each game hall 1. These data are distributed from the chain store headquarters 500 using the Internet line 588 or the like, and are stored in the face authentication server 80 of each game arcade 1 (gaming store).
In addition, the data of the end ball sent from each ball lending machine PT in each store is transmitted/received to/from the end ball server 71 of the chain store headquarters 500 via the Internet network E. Further, the end server 71 transmits/receives data to/from the personal portable terminal SM owned by the player M through the Internet network E.

(Structure of ball lending machine PT)
The ball lending machine PT will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70. FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram of a ball lending machine PT used in a game hall system. FIG. 68 is a block diagram of a device connected to the main CPU 850 of the ball lending machine PT. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the liquid crystal operation unit 801 of the ball lending machine PT. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing a liquid crystal operation unit 801 of the ball lending machine PT.

The individual face authentication device 800 is mainly composed of an individual face authentication server 820 equipped with a face authentication engine stored in a storage area of an HDD 855 mounted on the ball lending machine PT, and each camera 69, Both are built into the ball lending machine PT.
The ball lending machine PT controls programs by reading programs stored in the ROM 851, the RAM 853, and the HDD 855 connected to the main CPU 850.
Each device mainly has a liquid crystal operation unit 801, an LED display unit 812, a card processing unit 807, a bill processing unit 809, each camera 69, a speaker 831, a ball lending nozzle 803, and a counting unit 805.

The ball lending machine PT is provided with an LED display section 812 indicating the state of the ball lending machine PT at the top. The LED display unit 812 indicates whether or not the ball lending by the ball lending machine P is possible, or an error of the device or the like by the display color of the LED.
The ball lending machine PT is provided with a banknote processing unit 809 that performs processing for the player M to insert banknotes such as 10,000 yen, 5000 yen, and 1000 yen, and to lend a game ball serving as a game medium from the inserted banknotes. ing. From the ball lending machine PT, it is possible to lend game media until the balance is exhausted.
The ball lending machine PT is provided with a ball lending nozzle 803 extending to the saucer of the pachinko machine P. The ball lending nozzle 803 can drive the ball lending driving unit 813 to dispense the stored accumulated balls to the pachinko machine P in a predetermined number.

The ball lending machine PT includes a card processing unit 807 below. The card processing unit 807 includes a drive motor 814 that operates insertion and ejection of the membership card 550 and the guest card 551 inserted from the card insertion/ejection port 811, and the number of balls held by the card reader/writer 804. We are rewriting the contents such as the balance and the value of the balance. Further, a guest card card storage unit 816 is provided so that the employee MS does not have to replenish the remaining money and the balls (earned balls) recorded in the guest card 5 and moving the balls.
The ball lending machine PT is equipped with a speaker 831 so that an error state and handling can be announced, and a warning sound, an operation sound and a guidance sound are generated by a drive circuit 833.

The ball lending machine PT is provided at the bottom with a counting unit 805 capable of receiving the game balls acquired by the player M from the lower plate of the pachinko machine P and counting them by a counter 806. The number of balls counted by the counting counter 806 is counted as a possessed ball, and the number of balls currently stored is displayed by the possessed ball number display unit 802d described later. Further, the ball lending machine PT is provided with a counter shutter 832 having a movable opening/closing member for preventing the ball from flowing into the counting counter 806 in order to stop the counting operation due to an abnormality or the like. The counter shutter 832 is opened and closed by receiving an abnormal signal or the like from the ball lending machine PT. When the counter shutter 832 is activated, the counter shutter 832 is closed to prohibit the inflow of balls into the counting counter 806, and the counting unit 805 is left with balls. After the abnormality or the like is cleared, the counter shutter 832 is opened, the flow of balls into the counting counter 806 is started, and counting can be performed again. In this way, by providing the counter shutter 832, it is possible to prevent erroneous counting of balls to be counted and to safely hold the balls to be counted.

The ball lending machine PT is provided with a liquid crystal operation unit 801 capable of operating the ball lending machine PT at the center. The liquid crystal operation unit 801 is provided with an operation display unit 802 having a screen that can be operated.
The operation display unit 802 includes a menu display unit 802a serving as an interface screen, a shared display unit 802b capable of performing an operation for sharing a ball and sharing it with another person, discharging a membership card 550, and operating the ball lending machine PT. The lock display section 802c which can be selected whether or not to prohibit, the possession ball number display section 802d which can display the possession ball of the acquired game ball, and the menu display section 802 which is displayed on another operation screen. A switching display unit 802e that can be switched, an end display unit 802f that can finish by discharging a card such as the membership card 550, and a replay that can dispense the held balls from the ball lending nozzle 803. A display unit 802g and an end ball processing display unit 802h described later are provided. The operation display unit 802 is designed with a touch panel, and operates by pressing the display unit.

The operation display unit 802 can display a personal identification number input display unit 845 that is operated when the personal identification number is registered or input by the switching display unit 802e. The personal identification number input display unit 845 displays the personal identification number display unit 847 that displays the input state of the personal identification number and the number portion to be input. After inputting the number by operating the touch panel, the operation is determined by the enter button 843.
The ball lending machine PT uses the individual face authentication device 800 equipped with the face authentication engine as shown in the determination content list 825 of FIG. 91, and “age”, “sex”, “front ratio” “seated state”, “member” Each item such as “ID”, “front stand data”, “frontal rate”, “side profile” can be discriminated. Each camera 69 mounted on the individual face authentication device 800 is installed in a state invisible to the player M.

Each camera 69 is set so that the camera is most focused when the player M is seated, and an individual is discriminated by capturing a front face or a side face. Further, each camera 69 is configured to be able to monitor the movement of the player M using the pan/tilt/zoom functions. The pan/tilt/zoom functions are driven by the drive unit 835, and each camera 69 is controlled by the controller 834 of the ball lending machine PT from the operation terminal 11 connected to the face authentication server 80 and the hall computer 90.
Further, the mobile terminal device 40 of the employee MS can operate while watching the image of each camera 69 via the communication server 10, and the employee MS can monitor the game player M even from a distant place. You can Especially, it is effective for monitoring a person who needs attention.

The ball lending machine PT is connected to the pachinko machine P via an IF (interface). The pachinko machine P pays out the remaining money put into the ball lending machine PT and lends a game medium to the pachinko machine P, a ball lending button 401, and a member card 550 and a guest card 551 described later from the ball lending machine PT. A return button 402 for returning is provided.
In addition, the ball lending machine PT is connected to the platform information display device K having a liquid crystal display screen 891 for displaying useful information such as the number of big hits and the number of starts of the pachinko machine P to the player M via an IF (interface) 808. Has been done.
Further, the ball lending machine PT sends the data of the individual face authentication server 820, the sales data of the ball lending machine PT, and the data obtained by counting the game balls acquired by the counting unit 805 to the hall computer 90 to send the IF to the base computer 93 ( Interface) 808.
In the present invention, the ball lending machine PT attached to the pachinko machine P has been described, but the lending machine CT may be provided with each camera 69 to utilize this function. Also, the platform information display device K attached to the slot machine SMA may be provided with each platform camera 69 to utilize this function.

(Composition of membership card)
The membership card will be described with reference to FIG. The member card 550 is an IC card equipped with an IC chip 553, and the IC chip 553 can rewrite and store data without contact. The IC chip 553 of the member card 550 stores a member ID indicating a member code, a personal identification number, money data, face image data 555 of the member's face, and the like in order to ensure security such as theft.
It should be noted that the number of balls, the number of balls, and the remaining amount of money of the stored game media may be stored in the member management server, the storage server or the like and communicated at any time without being stored in the member card 550. Further, these cards may be magnetic cards as well as IC chips.

(Network configuration of data in the game hall)
The main flow of data obtained from each of the above-mentioned devices will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a main data flow on the network of the game arcade 1. The communication server 10 is a server that mainly transmits and receives data, processes data from each device, and performs communication and telephone calls.

The communication server 10 is provided with an IP telephone server 22 as a program for making a call such as a group call or a simultaneous call in cooperation with the IP telephone terminal program 45 of the mobile terminal device 40. The IP telephone server 22 adopts SIP or the like and uses a general-purpose session control protocol to perform operations as a so-called IP telephone that establishes sessions with a plurality of clients and performs bidirectional real-time communication.
The wireless router 5 and the mobile terminal device 40 are wirelessly connected to each other by a wireless LAN, and standards such as IEEE802.11a, 11b, 11g, 11n, 11ac are used, and a frequency band of 5 GHz band with few cross lines is used. ing. In addition to the frequency band of the 5 GHz band, wireless communication of the 2.4 GHz band may be used, and it is possible to select the wireless communication according to the situation such as crosstalk. Other wireless communication may be wireless communication such as a wireless telephone line or Bluetooth (registered trademark).
Then, the communication related to the call and the data transfer is performed through the same line, and the security related to the wiretapping and the data interception occurring during the call and the communication can be increased to the same level. Therefore, the cost for security and the cost for software production can be kept low.

Further, the communication server 10 is provided with the intercom server 21 as a program that cooperates with the alarm reception display program 46 of the mobile terminal device 40 and transmits data for displaying alarm information on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40. The intercom server 21 sets each IP telephone of the communication server 10 main body or the mobile terminal device 40 and the IP telephone server 22.
The alarm information described below is information that is mainly sent to the mobile terminal device 40 and is notified to alert the employee. The alarm information is notified by text display, image display and voice.
The communication server 10 is provided with an IP telephone master device program 23 for making a call with the mobile terminal device 40 through the IP telephone server 22 using the operation terminal 11 as a master device.

The communication server 10 is provided with the bridge server 20 as a program for bridging the data from the surveillance camera system 60, the face authentication server 80, and the hall computer 90 to the income server 21. The communication server 10 is provided with a DB server 25 that cooperates with the bridge server 20 and stores various data of the communication server 10. Further, the communication server 10 is provided with an alarm server 27 for accumulating data transmitted as an event code described later among various information obtained from the hall computer 90.

The signal obtained from the game machine or the like is input to the hall computer 90, and the hall computer 90 delivers the data to the alarm server 27. The data distributed as an event code is stored as code data. The stored data is converted into text data by the software described below as alarm information and stored in the database. 41, which will be described later, shows an example of contents stored in the database of the DB server 25.
Although the data to be stored is text data, it may be code data as long as it can be converted into text data before being transmitted to the mobile terminal device 40 or displayed.

The communication server 10 is provided with a voice synthesis program 24 as a program for converting the text display of alarm information into voice to obtain voice information.
The communication server 10 issues a command in response to a request from the surveillance camera terminal program 66 that operates the surveillance camera operating terminal 62 provided in the surveillance camera system 60, and sends a signal from the hall computer 90 to the bridge server 21. A VMC command program 28 is provided.
The communication server 10 is provided with an image server 26 which cooperates with the face authentication server 80 and stores data of the face authentication server 80 in response to a request from the surveillance camera terminal program 66.

As described above, the communication server 10 is provided with the IP telephone server 22 as a program for making a call and the income server 21 as a program for transmitting data to be displayed on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40. In this way, by separating the call and the program for transmitting data, the employee can confirm the information transmitted on the display screen 43 while making a call and can proceed with the work. You can work quickly and accurately.

(Network configuration of individual face authentication server in system for game hall)
FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing a network of a game hall system. A main flow of data obtained from each device of the individual face authentication device 800 described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The individual face authentication server 820 stored in the HDD 155 of the ball lending machine PT is connected to the island computer 91 at the end of the island by the intra-island wiring 92 via the base computer 93 connected via the IF 808 of the ball lending machine PT. It Further, the island computer 91 is connected to the switching hub (SHB) 7. Then, the face authentication server 80 and the individual face authentication server 820 connected to the switching hub 7 transmit and receive data under the control described later. Further, the face authentication server 80 and the individual face authentication server 820 are also connected to the hall computer 90 via the switching hub (SHB) 7 by the island wiring 95, and it is also possible to analyze the game data for each individual.
In addition, the face authentication server 80, which also functions as a parent server of the individual face authentication server 820, uses a large number of surveillance cameras 61 connected to the hubs 65 for each camera to check the entrance of the game hall 1 and the inside of the game hall 1. It is connected to a monitoring system 60 for monitoring and monitors a person MB requiring attention.

(Software configuration diagram)
The configuration of software for performing communication of data such as telephone calls and alarm information using the above program will be described with reference to FIG.
The communication server 10 includes a SIP server 35, a management tool 32, an alarm information backup tool 34, and an alarm information voice delivery 31 as software for calling and communicating.

The SIP server 35 controls to call and connect the mobile terminal devices 40 from the mobile terminal devices 40 to each other or from the parent device of the operation terminal 11. The management server 32 calls a convened call, manages the call status, and notifies alarm information. The management tool 33 controls the SIP server 35 and edits each setting. The alarm information backup tool 34 imports and exports alarm information. The alarm information voice delivery 31 converts the text information into voice data, and transmits the converted voice data as a voice packet.
The mobile terminal device 40 and the operation terminal 11 serving as a parent device include SIP clients 36 and 37 as software for performing communication, talking, and displaying. The SIP client 36 displays a call between the base unit or the mobile terminal device 40, a call origination/reception, and alarm information.

(Data structure of face authentication server and individual face authentication server)
The data structure of the face authentication server 80 and the individual face authentication server 820 is shown with reference to FIG.
FIG. 73A shows the data structure of the face authentication server 80. The face authentication server 80 is divided into a stem area 83 for operating the system of the face authentication server 80 and a data area 85 of the face authentication server 80. The data area 85 of the face authentication server 80 includes a member/excellent data area 86 in which face image data 555 of a member or a customer is stored, and a caution person data area 87 in which face image data 605 of a caution person is stored. And a platform analysis data area 88 in which face image data 556 used for analyzing the data of the gaming machine is stored for each individual, and a face used for analyzing the customer such as sex, age, and customer price. A customer analysis data area 89 in which image data 557 is stored and a spare area 84 as an empty area for data are provided.

FIG. 73B shows the data structure of the individual face authentication server 820. The individual face authentication server 820 is divided into a stem area 861 for operating the system of the individual face authentication server 820 and a data area 862 of the individual face authentication server 820. The data area 862 of the individual face authentication server 820 is provided with a recording data area 863 for continuously recording the image from the camera 69. The recording data is stored at every predetermined period, and the recording data area 863 is the upper limit. In this case, the oldest stored files are overwritten and saved. The data area 862 of the individual face authentication server 820 stores the face image data 555 or 559 recognized by the respective cameras 69 in the procedure described later. The captured image data area 865 is a data area for controlling the captured image in each camera 69 in a procedure described later. Further, the data area 862 of the individual face authentication server 820 is provided with a spare area 964 as a free area of data.

(Interface screen used in the game hall)
An interface screen for operating the above software will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 32.

<Management tool interface screen>
First, the interface screen displayed on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11 of the management tool 33 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 13. FIG. 5 is a transition diagram of the interface screen of the management tool 33.
When the application software 100 of the management tool 33 is activated on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11, the login screen 101 appears. Database information such as alarm information can be imported from the import screen 106 on the login screen 101.

When the password is entered on the login screen 101 and the login button is pressed, the screen shifts to the menu screen 102 shown in FIG. The menu screen 102 is provided with a SIP server control button 105, and when the SIP server control button 105 is pressed, a SIP control screen 103 is displayed. The SIP control screen 103 is provided with a screen for controlling the start, stop, and restart of the SIP server 35 (not shown) and the reloading of data. When the setting button 104 on the menu screen 102 is pressed, the setting screen 110 shown in FIG. 7 is displayed.

The setting screen 110 shown in FIG. 7 shows a state in which the terminal tab 111 is selected. At the top of the setting screen 110, tabs for transitioning to other setting screens are provided, and in addition to the terminal tab 111, a group tab 112, a summon tab 113, a filter tab 114, a blacklist tab 115, an access point tab 116. There is also a server tab 117. A start-up display 121 is provided as a window that is displayed in common on other setting screens and shows the operation of the management server 32.
Further, at the bottom of the setting screen 110, a confirm button 118 and a cancel button 119 that are commonly displayed on other setting screens are provided. Pressing the confirm button 118 updates the data in the database, and pressing the cancel button 119 returns to the menu screen 102.

Next, when the group tab 112 is selected, the group conference room edit screen 130 is displayed. On the group conference room edit screen 130 (not shown), a group number and a group name are displayed as a list of groups set in the SIP server 35 and the management server 32. The group conference room edit screen 130 is a screen for adding and editing a group.

Next, when the convocation tab 113 is selected, the convocation call edit screen 140 is displayed. On the not-shown convocation call edit screen 140, a convocation number and a convocation name are displayed as a list of the convocation calls set in the SIP server 35 and the management server 32. Further, the convocation call edit screen 140 is a screen for adding and editing a convocation call.

Next, when the filter tab 114 is selected, the alarm information filter screen 150 shown in FIG. 8 is displayed. The alarm information filter screen 150 is a screen for setting distribution of alarm information. In the alarm information filter list 153, event codes, group numbers and device numbers are displayed. The event code is a code transmitted from the hall computer 90 and the surveillance camera system 60.

Here, the event code is output from the hall computer 90 as an event code, which is a signal mainly treated as an abnormality of a gaming machine or other equipment among signals aggregated in the hall computer or the like.
The types of signals include a door open signal transmitted when the frame of the pachinko machine P and the slot machine SMA is released, a glass open signal transmitted when the glass frame of the pachinko machine P is released, and the suspicion of Goto. In some cases, a signal when a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, or the like is activated, a signal regarding a call when a visitor M makes a call on the platform information display device K, a ball lending machine PT, a rental machine CT, a counter JC, and an island. Examples include an abnormal signal of a device for carrying and replenishing a game medium housed in the facility HS, an abnormal signal of a money changer, and the like.
Further, the event code transmitted from the surveillance camera system 60 is triggered by the information from the face authentication server 80, and a code for notifying that the attention-requiring person MB is in the store or the occurrence of a spot found in the surveillance camera system 60 is left. There are codes etc.
These data are stored in the database of the DB server 25, and in addition, data having the contents shown in FIGS. 41 and 42 described later are stored.
Incidentally, the event code can take in not only the device connected to the hall computer 90 but also the information of each device installed in the game area 3 as an event code.

The group number is the number of the group when making the above-mentioned group call. The device number is a number assigned to each pachinko machine P represented by a game machine or a slot machine SMA, a counter JC, a ball lending machine PT, a lending machine CT, a currency exchange machine or an island at the island edge. It is a number assigned to a replenishing device, an out-ball counter, etc. in the HS in the facility. The device number may be the number of each surveillance camera 61 corresponding to the position where the surveillance camera 61 is installed.

At the top of the alarm information filter screen 150, there is a check box 154 for selecting whether or not to perform voice distribution. This is a column for selecting whether or not to perform voice distribution for each event code. If selected, the text data is voice-synthesized and the voice data is delivered. If not selected, only text data is delivered as alarm information.
At the same time as it is a simple setting to check, it can be set for each individual event code, so that employees can easily make extremely detailed settings.

The alarm information filter screen 150 has an add button 155 and an edit button 157. By pressing the add button 155, the screen moves to the add screen 156 in FIG. 9A, and the event code, device number, and group number can be additionally set. By selecting an event code from the alarm information filter list 153 and pressing the edit button 157, the screen moves to the edit screen 158 of FIG. 9B, and the device number and group number can be edited and set.
Since the alarm information can be set for each group, for example, the information about the pachinko machine P is not provided to the group in charge of the slot machine SMA. In this way, it is possible to select and send the required information to the required group.

Next, when the blacklist tab 115 is selected, a blacklist edit screen 160 (not shown) is displayed. The blacklist edit screen 160 is a screen for displaying a list of intruders who enter the network for the purpose of eavesdropping or tampering with the system and for adding or editing to the list.

Next, when the access point tab 116 is selected, the access point edit screen 170 shown in FIG. 10 is displayed. This is a screen for adding and editing access points. The access point edit screen 170 uses the wireless router 5 installed in the game area 3 as an access point, and displays a list 171 of access points in the center of the screen.
The access point edit screen 170 is provided with an add button 172 and an edit button 173, and by pressing the add button 172 or the edit button 173, the screen moves to the add/edit screen 175 of FIG. 11. The additional edit screen 175 is a screen for adding and editing an access point name, a network name (SSID) of 5 GHz and 2.4 GHz, and an encryption key.
The communication and call networks of this system have security measures to prevent eavesdropping and intrusion from the outside by including the encryption key. The encryption key may be a fixed encryption key, but the security can be further increased by using a randomly generated encryption key. Further, the additional edit screen 17 of FIG. 11 has a function of displaying the encryption key, and by displaying it on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11, the work of setting the mobile terminal device 40 described later can be performed quickly. You can do it.
Further, the access point edit screen 170 is provided with an XML file output button 174 for outputting a file set in the operation terminal 11 or the mobile terminal device 40 in the XML format.

Next, when the server tab 117 is selected, a server information setting screen 180 (not shown) is displayed, and the connection status to the SIP server 35 and the DB server 25 can be confirmed. On the server information setting screen 180, the store name, the IP address of the SIP server 35, the user ID and the password are displayed and can be edited. In addition, the IP address, the user ID, the database name, and the password of the DB server 25, which is a database, are displayed for editing.

Next, when the terminal tab 111 is selected, the setting screen 110 shown in FIG. 7 is displayed. The setting screen 110 is a screen for setting the information of the mobile terminal device 40, and the terminal number and the terminal name of the mobile terminal device 40 that are set are displayed as a terminal information list 127 in the center of the screen. At the bottom of the list of the setting screen 110, an add button 122 and an edit button 123 are provided. When the add button 122 or the edit button 123 is pressed, the terminal information edit screen 120 (not shown) is displayed. The terminal information edit screen 120 is a screen for adding and editing a telephone number and a terminal name to the mobile terminal device 40 selected when adding/editing the mobile terminal device 40.
At the bottom of the terminal information list 127 of the setting screen 110, a delete button 124 for deleting the setting of the mobile terminal device 40 and a file for setting the operation terminal 11 or the mobile terminal device 40 from the selected terminal are XML. An XML file output button 126 for outputting in a format is provided.

Further, an identification number output button 125 is provided below the terminal information list 127 of the setting screen 110. When the identification number output button 125 is pressed, the screen shifts to the identification number output access point selection screen 190 shown in FIG. ..
On the identification number output access point selection screen 190, the store name, the telephone number, and the IP addresses of the SIP server 35 and the management server 32 are displayed as the information of the mobile terminal device 40. On the identification number output access point selection screen 190, a list 191 of access points is displayed with the wireless router 5 installed in the game area 3 as an access point in the center of the screen. When the access point displayed in the list 191 is selected and the identification number display button 19 is pressed, the screen shifts to the identification number display screen 195 shown in FIG.

The identification number display screen 195 includes, as information of the access point of the mobile terminal device 40, a store name, a telephone number, an IP address of the SIP server 35 or the management server 32, an access point name, a network of 5 GHz band and 2.4 GHz band (SSID). ) Your name is displayed. Although not shown, information on access points in the 5 GHz band and the 2.4 GHz band is displayed as identification numbers 197a and 197b in a rectangular frame.
The identification numbers 197a and 197b are displayed in a form that is difficult to recognize, such as a QR code (registered trademark), a bar code, or a color code. The identification numbers 197a and 197b include an encryption key, so that security measures are provided to prevent wiretapping and intrusion from the outside. The encryption key may be a fixed encryption key, but the security can be further increased by using a randomly generated encryption key.

Further, by displaying the identification numbers 197a and 197b on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11, the mobile terminal device 40 has the identification numbers 197a and 197b displayed on the monitor screen 13 built in the mobile terminal device 40. It can be captured by the camera 41. In the identification numbers 197a and 197b captured by the camera 41, the store name, the telephone number, the IP address of the SIP server 35 or the management server 32, the access point name, and the 5 GHz band in which the mobile terminal device 40 can access the network. And 2.4 GHz band network (SSID) name and encryption key are included. Therefore, the SIP client 37 of the mobile terminal device 40 can automatically set the mobile terminal device 40, the setting of the mobile terminal device 40 becomes easy, and the setting of the encryption key and the like is known to the employee. Since the setting of the mobile terminal device 40 and the setting of the management tool 33 can be performed without any need, it is possible to enhance security.
Further, since the same information as the information displayed on the monitor screen 13 is printed on the paper using the print button, it is easy to set the access to the network by capturing it with the camera 41 such as the mobile terminal device 40.
Next, in the identification number output access point selection screen 190 and the identification number display screen 195, the currently open screen is closed by pressing the close button of the screen.

<SIP client interface screen of operation terminal>
The interface screen of the SIP client 37 of the parent device displayed on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 22.
FIG. 14 is a transition diagram of the interface screen of the SIP client 37. When the application software 200 of the SIP client 37 is activated on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11, a call screen 210 shown in FIG. 15 is displayed. On the call screen 210, the number of its own station is displayed at the top of the screen, and a status display field 211 indicating the call status is provided below the number. Further, below the status display field 211, an alarm information display field 212 for displaying alarm information in text is provided. A message send button 213 is provided below the alarm information display field 212. When the message send button 213 is pressed, the message send screen 220 shown in FIG. 16 is displayed.

The message transmission screen 220 shown in FIG. 16 has a function of manually transmitting a message and an image, and when the transmission destination type 221 is pressed, three types of transmission destinations of whole/group/terminal designation are selected. can do. The destination list 222 displays the destinations of the group selected by the destination type 221.
The message transmission screen 220 is provided with a message field 223 on the right side of the screen in which text can be entered. In addition, the surveillance camera system 60, the face, so that an image of a person who needs attention such as a goto master who has been obtained at another store or his/her own store, and a manual or the like in case of trouble of a device including a game machine in the game area 3 can be transmitted. An image to be transmitted can be selected by referring to the image data from the image file of the authentication server 80, the SIP server 35 or the operation terminal 11.
In this way, since the message can be delivered as text together with the image, it is possible to accurately and promptly send the information to the employee who is in the game area 3 even if he/she is not in the management area 2 in the case of troubles including goto. Then, there is an advantage that the employee who has the information can deal with it accurately and promptly.
Then, the message transmission screen 220 is closed by pressing the close button located below.

Further, the call screen 210 shown in FIG. 15 has a utterance button 213 that enables utterance to the designated portable terminal device 40 while the button is pressed during a call, and utterance that is always continued until released. Buttons 215 and are provided. On the call screen 210, it is possible to make a call to the mobile terminal device 40 by inputting a ten-key pad or selecting the speed dial column 217 on the right.

Next, by pressing the option button 218 below the call screen 210, the screen shifts to the option screen 230 shown in FIG. The option screen 230 is a screen for selecting each function.
The option screen 230 shown in FIG. 17 is provided with a group call list button 232, an individual call list button 233, a summoned call list button 234, an alarm information list button 235, a setting button 236, and an import button 237.
When the import button 237 is pressed, an import screen 290 (not shown) is displayed. The import screen 290 is a screen for importing a file output by the management tool 33 in the XML format.

Next, when the group call list button 232 shown in FIG. 17 is pressed, the group call list screen 240 shown in FIG. 18 is displayed. The group call list screen 240 is a screen for selecting a group call destination. By selecting one from the list screens 241 of all groups and pressing the call button 242, the group call is started and the call screen 210 is displayed. Return automatically.

Next, when the individual call list button 233 shown in FIG. 17 is pressed, the individual call list screen 250 shown in FIG. 19 is displayed. The individual call list screen 250 is a screen for selecting an individual call destination. By selecting one from the individual call list screen 251, and pressing the call button 252, the call destination is called and called. When the callee answers, the call is started and the call screen 210 is automatically returned.

Next, when the call list button 234 shown in FIG. 17 is pressed, the call list screen 260 shown in FIG. 20 is displayed. The convened call list screen 260 is a screen for selecting a convened call destination. By selecting one from the list screens 261 of all convened groups and pressing the call button 262, the call destination is called and a call is started. Then, the screen automatically returns to the call screen 210.

Next, when the alarm information list button 235 shown in FIG. 17 is pressed, the screen shifts to the alarm information list screen 280 shown in FIG. The alarm information list screen 280 is a screen for displaying a list of alarm information. The alarm information list screen 280 is provided with an alarm information list 281 that displays the alarm information acquired from the database on the left side of the screen, and the content of the alarm information is displayed in text. In the upper right part of the alarm information list screen 280, an alarm information image column 282 that can display an image attached to the alarm information is provided. Below the alarm information message column 283, a message attached to the alarm information and detailed information can be displayed.

Next, when the setting button 236 shown in FIG. 17 is pressed, the screen shifts to the setting screen 270 shown in FIG. The screen shown in FIG. 22 sets the IP addresses and port numbers of the SIP server 35 and the management server 32 that are the connection destinations of the operation terminal 11 and the mobile terminal device 40, and the telephone numbers of the operation terminal 11 and the mobile terminal device 40, It is a screen for setting a password and a display name.
The screen displayed in the speed dial tab is a screen for selecting a speed dial number from individual calls, group calls, and convened calls. The selected speed dial number is the speed dial column 217 of the call screen 210 shown in FIG. Displayed in.

<SIP client interface screen of mobile terminal device>
The interface screen of the SIP client 36 displayed on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32.
FIG. 23 is a transition diagram of the interface screen of the SIP client 36. When the application software 300 of the SIP client 36 is activated on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40, the lock screen 310 shown in FIG. 24 is displayed. The lock screen 310 is a screen that is displayed at the time of startup and that prevents malfunction. For example, when the mobile terminal device 40 is put in a pocket of clothes or inserted into a holder or the like worn on the waist or arm, even if the display screen 43 is touched by some measure, a call or other A function that prevents touch operation on the display screen 43 is provided so as not to shift to the screen. In addition, the screen shifts to the lock screen 310 even when no operation is performed for a certain period. Then, when an operation such as a call is performed, the lock release button 311 is long-pressed to shift to the call screen 320.
Further, below the lock release button 311, there is provided an information display field 312 capable of displaying one unread latest alarm information.

Next, a call screen 320 shown in FIG. 25 is a call screen that functions as an income. While the call button 321 on the screen is pressed, it is possible to speak with the selected terminal, but by pressing the speech button 44 (FIG. 63) provided on the mobile terminal device 40 or provided on the microphone. The utterance switch that is turned on enables utterance while these buttons are pressed.
By pressing the camera button 323 provided on the call screen 320, it is possible to take an image with the camera 41 of the mobile terminal device 40. The taken image is registered in the management server 32, and each mobile terminal device 40 and This is a function of delivering to the operation terminal 11. The camera 41 can shoot not only images but also moving images, and the taken images and moving images can be used as evidence when trouble occurs with a goto or a visitor. Further, in the case of a device trouble, it is possible to send an image or a moving image to the management area 2 to investigate the cause of the failure and to remotely deal with the failure.

Below each button is provided an information display field 324 capable of displaying the latest alarm information as one unread message. Further, below the information display field 324, a message confirmation field 325 for displaying the number of unread messages is provided. The message confirmation column 325 displaying read/unread allows the employee to know that there is information that has not been confirmed, and can be used to confirm whether or not the work is still in progress.
By pressing the message confirmation field 325, a message can be displayed in the information display field 324. On the call screen 320, the screen automatically shifts to the lock screen 310 when there is no operation for a certain period of time.
Next, when the option button 322 shown in FIG. 25 is pressed, the screen shifts to the option screen 330 shown in FIG. The option screen 330 is a screen for selecting each function, and includes a group call list button 331, an individual call list button 332, an alarm information list button 333, a connection destination list button 334, an access point list button 335, and an identification number read button 336. Also, a terminal name setting button 337 is provided.

Next, when the group call list button 331 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the group call list screen 340 shown in FIG. 27 is displayed. The group call list screen 340 is a screen for selecting a call destination of a group, and one call is selected from all groups as a call destination and the group call display 341 is pressed to start a call. When there is no callee in the group, the alarm information is displayed in text.
Next, when the individual call list button 332 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the individual call list screen 340 shown in FIG. 28 is displayed. The individual call list screen 350 is a screen for selecting an individual call destination. One of the displayed individual call destinations is selected as a call destination, and the individual call display 351 is pressed to start the call. When there is no individual call destination, the alarm information is displayed in text.

Next, when the access point list button 335 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the screen shifts to the access point list screen 360 shown in FIG. The access point list screen 360 is a screen for measuring the radio field intensity of each access point and switching the access points. The access point list screen 360 displays the radio wave intensity that can be detected by the mobile terminal device 40, and the radio wave intensity is displayed from the top in the order of strong radio waves. The displayed access point can be switched by pressing it, but it may be switched automatically to an access point with a strong radio wave. Further, the status of this radio wave is also sent to the management server 32, and is also used for monitoring a person to be noted, which will be described later.

Next, when the identification number reading button 336 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the screen moves to the identification number reading screen 370 shown in FIG. The identification number read screen 370 is automatically displayed on the network by reading the identification numbers 197a and 197b displayed on the identification number display screen 195 shown in FIG. 13 with the camera 41 built in the portable terminal device 40. Can be set. Store name, telephone number, IP address of the SIP server 35 and the management server 32, the access point name, the network (SSID) name of the 5 GHz band and the 2.4 GHz band, and the encryption key that the mobile terminal device 40 can access the network. , The SIP client 37 of the mobile terminal device 40 can automatically set the mobile terminal device 40, which facilitates the setting of the mobile terminal device 40 and also enables the employee to set the encryption key and the like. Since the setting of the mobile terminal device 40 and the setting of the management tool 33 can be performed without being known, it is possible to enhance security. When the reading and setting of the mobile terminal device 40 are completed, the screen moves to the option screen 330.

Next, when the alarm information list button 333 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the screen shifts to the alarm information list screen 380 shown in FIG. The alarm information list screen 380 displays a list of transmitted alarm information. By pressing the displayed alarm information, the alarm information detail screen 390 shown in FIG. 32 is displayed.
The alarm information detail screen 390 displays the details of text messages and images. The alarm information detail screen 390 also displays information such as the date and time when the alarm information occurred and the photographer of the image.
Further, the alarm information detail screen 390 is provided with a lock release request button 393 for requesting the hall computer 90 to release the closed state of the door when opening and closing the door of the gaming machine. In addition, a machine number input frame 395 for inputting the machine number of the gaming machine for releasing the closed state of the door is also provided.

Next, when the connection destination list button 334 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the screen shifts to the SIP server list screen 317 shown in FIG. It is a screen which switches the SIP server 35 of the connection destination. If the mobile terminal device 40 is set in advance for another store, it can be used in another store simply by switching the SIP server 35.
As for the setting of the mobile terminal device 40, as described above, the setting only needs to read the identification number with the camera 41, which is convenient, and if there is one mobile terminal device 40, it can be quickly used in other stores. Therefore, even if the mobile terminal devices 40 are not prepared for each store for each person, the number of mobile terminal devices 40 can be small because the mobile terminal devices 40 can be carried around in a group store.

Next, when the terminal name setting button 337 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the screen moves to the name setting screen 315 shown in FIG. The name setting screen 315 is a screen for setting the terminal name of the mobile terminal device 40 of its own.

(Control of system for game hall)
Each control in the game hall system will be described with reference to sequence diagrams and flowcharts shown in FIGS. 33 to 66. These controls are realized by using the software and programs described above, but are not particularly limited to the software and programs described above, and any modification can be made as long as the configuration of the software or programs can realize the contents of this control. You can do whatever you want.

<Individual call, group call, convened call control>
The control relating to the call will be described with reference to the sequence diagrams and flowcharts shown in FIGS. 33 to 38.
The control when making individual calls will be described. FIG. 33 is a sequence diagram when making an individual call, and FIG. 34 is a flowchart regarding processing when making an individual call. The individual call is a function that allows a one-to-one call between the master unit and the mobile terminal device 40 displayed on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11 and the mobile terminal device 40.

First, the caller selects a call destination from the monitor screen 13 (FIG. 19) of the operation terminal 11 or the display screen 43 (FIG. 28) of the mobile terminal device 40 (S101). The originating SIP clients 36 and 37 terminate the current telephone call (S102) and make a call to the selected call destination (S103). The SIP server 35 having received the call makes a call to the called party (S104). The SIP clients 36 and 37 on the callee side display an incoming call dialog. When the called side is the SIP client 36 of the mobile terminal device 40 (YES in S106), notification is given by the ring tone and vibration (S107), and when the called side is the SIP client 37 of the operation terminal 11 (S106). YES), the notification is given only by the ring tone (S108).

When the called party selects a response (YES in S109), the SIP clients 36 and 37 on the receiving side end the current call (S110) and send a response to the SIP server 35 (S111). The SIP server 35 sends a response to the SIP clients 36/37 on the sender side, and the SIP clients 36/37 on the sender side receive the response (S112). The SIP clients 36 and 37 on the sender side notify the management server 32 of the destination (S113). The SIP clients 36 and 37 on the called party side notify the management server 32 of the call destination (S113). Then, it becomes possible to start a call with each other.
When the called party rejects the response (NO in S109), the SIP client 36/37 on the receiving side transmits the rejection to the SIP server 35 (S115), and the SIP server 35 confirms the rejection. To receive. The SIP server 35 sends a refusal to the SIP clients 36/37 on the caller side, and the SIP clients 36/37 on the caller side receive the refusal (S116). The SIP clients 36 and 37 on the caller side make a call to the last call group toward the SIP server 35 (S117). Further, the SIP clients 36 and 37 on the caller side notify the management server 32 of the call destination (S118).

Next, control when making a call in a group will be described. FIG. 35 is a sequence diagram when making a group call, and FIG. 36 is a flowchart regarding processing when making a group call.
The group call is a call within the telephone number registered in advance in the group conference room in the call between the master unit and the mobile terminal device 40 displayed on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11 and the call between the mobile terminal devices 40. It is a function that allows you to make multiple to multiple calls.

When switching to the group call, if the group call is selected from the monitor screen 13 (FIG. 18) of the operation terminal 11 or the display screen 43 (FIG. 27) of the mobile terminal device 40 (S210), the SIP clients 36 and 37 first. The current call is ended (S202) and a call is made to the selected group conference room (S203). When the SIP clients 36 and 37 are registered in the selected group (YES in S204), the management server 32 is notified of the destination (S207), and the call is ready to start.

When the SIP clients 36 and 37 are not registered in the selected group (NO in S204), the SIP server 35 notifies the SIP clients 36 and 37 of the end of call (S205), and the SIP clients 36 and 37 The call to the last call group is made to the SIP server 35 (S206). Further, the SIP clients 36 and 37 notify the management server 32 of the call destination (S207), and return to the state before switching to the group call.
In the group call, only the desired information can be transmitted/received for each group by dividing the group according to the hierarchies in which they are engaged, the installation locations of the pachinko machines P and slot machines SMA in charge, and the group of island facilities HS in charge.

Next, the control at the time of the calling call will be described. FIG. 37 is a sequence diagram at the time of making a calling call, and FIG. 38 is a flowchart regarding processing at the time of making a calling call.
In the call-to-call, a call is mainly performed between the master device displayed on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11 and the mobile terminal device 40. The call-to-call is a function in which the base unit calls a specific SIP client 36, and the SIP client 36 called in the call-conference room and the base unit call each other, and one-to-many calls can be made. When a call to call is selected from the monitor screen 13 (FIG. 20) of the operation terminal 11 (S301), the SIP client 37 terminates the current call (S302) and makes a call to the selected call meeting room (S302). S303).
The SIP client 37 notifies the management server 32 of the call destination (S304), and transmits the convened call (S305). The management server 32 notifies the SIP client 36 of the convened call (S306). The SIP client 36 displays an incoming call dialog on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40 (S307). When the terminal to be summoned is a mobile phone (YES in S308), the notification is notified by a ring tone and vibration (S310), and when the called side is the SIP client 36 having no vibration function (NO in S308), Notification is given only by the ring tone (S309).

When the SIP client 36 having received the notification of the call is to make a call (YES in S311), the SIP client 36 terminates the current call (S312) and makes a call to the called meeting room. (S313), the response is notified to the management server 32 (S314). Then, the convocation call is started.
When the SIP client 36 receiving the notification of the convocation rejects (NO in S311), the SIP client 36 notifies the management server 32 of the rejection (S315).
Then, the SIP client 37, which is the parent device, receives the response or rejection result of the summoned SIP client 36 (S316).
The call-to-call is used by the person in charge of the amusement hall 1 to call a specific person in an emergency situation such as goto, and can inform the employee quickly and accurately. Further, since there is a reply such as a response or a refusal (S316), the responsible person can grasp the state of the client and therefore can promptly issue a command, and the employee who receives it can promptly deal with the trouble. .

<Alarm information distribution control>
The control relating to the alarm information will be described with reference to the sequence diagrams, flowcharts and explanatory diagrams of the contents of the database shown in FIGS. 39 to 44.

The control related to the distribution of alarm information will be described. FIG. 39 is a sequence diagram when the alarm information is distributed, and FIG. 40 is a flowchart regarding the process when the alarm information is distributed.
The trigger of the distribution of the alarm information is triggered by the signal transmitted from the bridge server 20. The signal to the bridge server 20 is transmitted via the bridge server 20 when the hall computer 90 is the source and the alarm information is distributed via the bridge server 20, and when the surveillance camera system 60 is the source. There are two cases, that is, the case where the alarm information is distributed.

First, when the event code from the surveillance camera system 60 is transmitted to the management server 32 (YES in S401), the management server 32 delivers it to the designated one or logs in all the SIP clients 36 and 37. Decide whether to deliver to.
When delivering the information to the designated one (YES in S404), the management server 32 acquires the information of the target SIP clients 36 and 37 (S405). When delivering to all the logged-in SIP clients 36/37 (NO of S404), the information of all the logged-in SIP clients 36/37 is acquired.
When the event code from the hall computer 90 is transmitted to the management server 32 (NO in S401), the management server 32 acquires information of the distribution target group (S402), and the SIP clients 36 and 37 who are talking to the target group. Information is acquired (S403).
Then, the management server 32 converts the content of the alarm information corresponding to the event code and transmits it to the target SIP clients 36 and 37 (S407).

FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the data 2501 held in the database (DB server 25). As the data that the management server 32 and the mobile terminal device 40 commonly hold, the ID of the alarm information, the content of the alarm information, the message of the monitoring camera system 60, the store name of the game hall 1, the name of the SIP client 36/37 that has occurred. The event code, the code of the device targeted by the alarm information, the device number such as the machine number of the gaming device targeted by the alarm information, and the date and time when the alarm information occurred. In addition to the above, the management server 32 holds the type of alarm information, the name of the terminal of the surveillance camera system 60, and the name of the image file.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the alarm information data 2502 held in the database (DB server 25). For displaying the alarm information in text, for example, when the call button of the platform information display device K is pressed, the event code (“005”) is output from the hall computer 90. As the alarm information at this time, texts such as "please go to 3 courses", "please go to XX series", "call", etc. are displayed on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40. In addition, if the event code (“010”) when the gaming machine is opened/closed is output, “123 series door open” or the like is displayed. When a suspicious person appears, the event code (“105”) is output from the surveillance camera system 60 or the face authentication server 80, and “suspicious person information” or the like is displayed. When the rental machine CT attached to the slot machine SMA is not replenished, the hall computer 90 outputs an event code (“798”) and displays “suspicious person information” and the like. The text display may include characters, figures, symbols, etc., as long as it can be recognized by an employee or the like.

Further, the mobile terminal device 40 does not directly hold the image file, but holds the path information to the file so that the data capacity is small. Further, the mobile terminal device 40 also holds information that can be read or unread so that the contents of the alarm information can be confirmed later even if the confirmation cannot be made immediately during work.
The path to the image or the image file attached to the alarm information may be a moving image. Further, the moving image may be a live broadcast moving image directly delivered from the surveillance camera system 60.

Next, control relating to voice distribution of alarm information will be described. FIG. 43 is a sequence diagram at the time of voice distribution of the alarm information, and FIG. 44 is a flowchart regarding processing at the time of delivering the alarm information.
The voice distribution of the alarm information is a process of converting the text information into the voice information when the alarm information is generated and transmitting the voice to the conference room of the corresponding group. The operation is triggered by the transmission of data from the bridge server 20, and the processing is performed when voice distribution is selected for each event code on the alarm information filter screen 150 (FIG. 8) of the management tool 33.

First, when the alarm code occurs, when the event code from the surveillance camera system 60 is transmitted to the management server 32 (YES in S501), the management server 32 delivers the event to one designated group or all the groups. It is determined whether to deliver to the SIP clients 36 and 37. When the management server 32 delivers the information to the designated one group (YES in S502), the management server 32 obtains the information of the groups in the call of all the SIP clients 36 and 37 (S504). When delivering to all the logged-in SIP clients 36 and 37 (NO in S502), the group information of the simultaneous call is acquired (S505).
When the event code from the hall computer 90 is transmitted to the management server 32 (NO in S501), the management server 32 acquires information on the distribution target group (S503).
The management server 32 makes a request to the alarm information voice delivery 31 in order to deliver the voice data to the delivery target group (S506). The alarm information voice delivery 31 tries voice synthesis of the text data (S507). When the voice synthesis is successful (YES in S508), the voice data is transmitted to the SIP server 35 (S509), and the voice data is SIP. It is delivered to the clients 36 and 37 (S510). If the voice synthesis fails (NO in S508), the alarm information voice delivery 31 outputs a log and ends without transmitting the voice data to the SIP server (S511).

<<Control when opening and closing the game machine>>
Although the distribution control of the alarm information has been described, the mode in which the control of the processing for distributing the alarm information with respect to the event occurring in the game hall 1 is performed will be described in more detail.
Control relating to alarm information will be described with reference to the sequence diagrams and flowcharts shown in FIGS. 45 to 47. FIG. 45 is a sequence diagram when a trouble occurs in the game machine and the game machine is opened and closed, and FIG. 46 is a flowchart regarding processing when the game machine is opened and closed. FIG. 47 is a flowchart for delivering alarm information and the like after the gaming machine is opened and closed.

First, when the pachinko machine P is jammed or the slot machine SMA cannot play due to an error in the hopper due to an outage or the like, the visitor M playing the game can call the platform information display device K. Press to call employee MS. The hall computer 90 transmits "call" of the event code ("005") to the management server 32 via the bridge server 20 as information indicating that the call button is pressed (S601). In the alarm information filter screen 150 (FIG. 8) of the management tool 33, the management server 32 performs the above-described alarm information voice distribution process when the “call” event code is selected for voice distribution (YES in S602). (S500), if the event code of "call" ("005") is not selected for voice distribution (NO in S602), the alarm information distribution process described above is performed (S400). The alarm information distributed as text data is displayed on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40 as characters such as “call” and “please go to 3 courses”. Since the text data is distributed, it is not necessary to have a database for converting the event code in the mobile terminal device 40, and the capacity of the program can be reduced. Further, by displaying the characters on the display screen 43, it becomes easy to confirm the content of the alarm information.

The employee MS, who owns the mobile terminal device 40 that has been notified, rushes to the gaming machine to unlock the locking mechanism of the gaming machine in order to unlock the gaming machine so that the trouble can be dealt with. By inputting the number and pressing the lock release request button 393, the SIP client 36 requests the management server 32 to release the lock mechanism of the gaming machine (S603). The management server 32 holds the unlock data (S604) and requests the hall computer 90 to unlock the gaming machine (S605). The hall computer 90 releases the lock mechanism for the target gaming machine (S606).

In this control, the employee MS may rush by the display lamp provided in the island facility HS to request the unlocking of the lock mechanism even if the alarm information is not delivered.
The lock mechanism is a lock mechanism that is provided on the island facility HS side and that closes the game machine with a contracting wire attached to the frame of the game machine, or a lock mechanism that fixes the key cylinder when opening and closing the game machine. However, it is not particularly limited. Further, although the explanation is given with the release of the lock mechanism for each one of the gaming machines, when releasing, the lock mechanism may be released in unit of a plurality of one unit.
Although the unlocking of the lock mechanism of the gaming machine has been described via the hall computer 90, infrared communication or wireless communication from the mobile terminal device 40 is performed via the platform information display device K, or directly to the gaming machine or to the lock mechanism. You may release a lock mechanism of a game machine by transmitting a signal directly. There is no particular limitation as long as the information indicating which SIP client 36 or 37 requested the release of the lock mechanism is stored and the collation can be performed in the process described later.

Next, in order to deal with the trouble of the gaming machine whose lock mechanism has been released, the employee MS opens and closes the gaming machine with a key. When the game machine is opened and closed, a door open signal is issued from the game machine to the hall computer 90, and the hall computer 90 that receives the door open signal changes the door code of the event code ("010") to the bridge server. It transmits to the management server 32 via 20 (S701).
The management server 32 checks whether it is the gaming machine that requested the unlock (S702), and if there is the SIP client 36 or 37 that requested the unlock (YES in S702), distributes the SIP client 36 or 37. Exclude from the target (S703). In this way, by excluding the SIP clients 36 and 37 that requested the unlocking, it is not necessary to notify the employee MS who requested the unlocking again, so that useless distribution can be avoided. In addition, it may be misunderstood for the employee MS who requested the unlocking, and if there is no extra information, he/she can concentrate on the work and process it quickly.

When there is no gaming machine that has requested unlocking and the gaming machine is opened and closed (NO in S702), the management server 32 is illicitly opening the door of the gaming machine or the lock mechanism of the gaming machine is abnormal. Then, the event code (for example, “099”) is rewritten as “illegal door open” (S704).
The management server 32 performs the above-described alarm information voice delivery process (S500) when the event code is selected to deliver voice in the alarm information filter screen 150 (FIG. 8) of the management tool 33 (YES in S705). When the event code does not select voice delivery (NO in S705), the above-described alarm information delivery process is performed (S400).
Even when audio distribution is being performed (S500), the alarm information distribution process (S400) may be performed at the same time, and the alarm information may be displayed on the display screen 43. It is possible to deliver both (S400, S500) instead of delivering either one.
In this way, by collating the gaming machine that requested unlocking with the gaming machine that opened the door (S702), it is possible to quickly and easily detect unauthorized opening and closing of the gaming machine. In addition, for the employee MS, it is possible to confirm the characters (“123 series door open”, “door open”, “123 series unauthorized door open”, “illegal door open”, etc.) on the display screen 43, images, etc. From S704 to S400), it becomes possible to notify by voice (S704 to S500).

In addition, the event code “door open” transmits an abnormal signal from the hall computer 90 to the surveillance camera system 60, and the surveillance camera system 60 zooms the surveillance camera 61 with respect to the gaming machine to allow the visiting customer to play the game. It may be used as a trigger for imaging M. In this way, it is also possible to attach the face image and moving image of the visiting customer M who is playing the game to the alarm information and distribute it. In addition, the alarm information “illegal door open” is notified, so that the employee MS can rush to the site while checking the status with the delivered face image and video, and can respond accurately and promptly. Is.
Note that the alarm information distribution process when an “unauthorized door open” occurs can be performed even during a group call by distributing it to a specific employee, for example, only the leader of the group call or the person in charge of the hall. well. It is also possible to set a group call in which an employee who can deal with illegally even in a group call is specified and alarm information is distributed.

In this way, by preliminarily setting the employees to whom the alarm information is to be distributed according to the type of error, the division of roles becomes clear and quick response is possible. At that time, the employee registers the work that he or she can do in the management server 32 from the portable terminal device 40, the leader of the group call approves, and the management server 32 performs the work to be delivered with the alarm information during the group call. It may be a system for selecting alarming employees and distributing alarm information.

<<Control when a person who needs attention visits the store>>
Further, a mode in which the control of the process of distributing the alarm information when the caution person MB comes to the game arcade 1 will be described in detail.
The control relating to the alarm information will be described with reference to the sequence diagrams and flowcharts shown in FIGS. 48 to 53 and 57. FIG. 48 is a sequence diagram when the caution person MB comes to the store, and FIG. 49 is a flowchart regarding control processing when the caution person MB comes to the store. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the control in which the face authentication server 80 collates a person in order to identify the person MB requiring attention. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data transmitted to the face authentication server 80. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data indicating the matching result from the face authentication server 80. FIG. 53 is an example of alarm information displayed on the mobile terminal device 40. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram of a captured image of a system for identifying a goto group.

First, the process of notifying the visit of the caution person MB by the alarm information starts from the process of collating by the face authentication server 80 to specify the caution person MB (S900).
The face authentication server 80 detects an image from another store stored in the database of the face authentication server 80 or an image accumulated at its own store by the monitoring camera 61 installed at the entrance of the game arcade 1 or the like. It is determined whether or not they match with each other by comparing with the face image (S901). In this process, if the face image data stored in the database and the store visitor M do not have a certain rate of collation, it is determined that they do not match, and the next store visitor M is repeatedly collated (S901). NO). Then, the face image detected by the surveillance camera 61 (for example, the captured image 600 in FIG. 57) and the face image data of the face image stored in the database of the face authentication server 80 (the face represented by the face authentication number 583 described later). When the image data 605, for example, the image of FID001) is compared and it is determined that they match (YES in S901), the surveillance camera system 60 is notified that the suspected caution person MB has come to the store (S902). Upon receiving the notification, the surveillance camera system 60 extracts an image from the video recorded in the surveillance camera system 60 (S903), and transmits the extracted image together with the command data 67 shown in FIG. 51 to the face authentication server 80 (S904).

Here, the command data 67 includes “start code” indicating the key number of the extracted image, “version” indicating the version of the application software, and “device” indicating the position where the surveillance camera 61 recording the extracted image is installed. “Code”, “device number” indicating the number of the surveillance camera 61 that recorded the extracted image, “year/month/day”/“hour/minute/second” indicating the date and time when the extracted image was recorded, and the amount of data of the extracted image. The “image data size” shown and the “image data” shown as a file name obtained by encrypting the extracted image are held as data to be transmitted to the face authentication server 80.
By using “year/month/day”/“hour/minute/second” indicating the date and time of recording as the command data 67, the image can be extracted from the video recorded by the surveillance camera system 60 and used again for collation work and confirmation work afterwards. can do. Further, by using “year/month/day”/“hour/minute/second” indicating the date and time of recording as the command data 67, it is not necessary to save the image in the face authentication server 80 if there is recorded data of the surveillance camera system 60. Instead, only the data recorded by the surveillance camera system 60 need be saved, and the amount of data in the face authentication server 80 can be reduced.
Further, by encrypting the face image data 605, the image cannot be easily viewed even if the image is leaked, which is a deterrent effect against information leakage and a preventive measure against data interception.

Next, the face authentication server 80 recognizes a plurality of faces shown in the image based on the image and the command data 67 sent from the surveillance camera system 60, and calculates the number of faces. The face authentication server 80 collates the image data for the number of calculated faces (S905), and sends the results for the collated persons together with the image to the surveillance camera system 60 (S906). FIG. 52 shows an example of the matching result data 84 showing the matching result from the face authentication server 80.

The matching result data 84 includes a “start code” indicating the key number of the extracted image, a “data size” indicating the amount of data of the matching result data 84, an “authentication number” indicating the number of faces authenticated in the image, and an image. “Authentication No.” indicating a value obtained by sequentially coding the authenticated faces in the table, “authentication type” indicating the type of authenticating the face, and coordinates of the face and the authenticated position shown in the image as shown in FIG. 57. “Face authentication area” indicating the, “matching rate” indicating the matching rate with the face image registered in the database of the face authentication server 80, and the date and time when the face image registered in the database of the face authentication server 80 is registered. The “year/month/day” and “hour/minute/second” shown are held as data to be transmitted to the surveillance camera system 60.

Then, the face authentication server 80 repeatedly collates the items from “authentication No.” to “hour/minute/second” shown in FIG. 52 by the number of “authentication number”, and the collation result is included in the image. The data 84 is transmitted to the surveillance camera system 60. By thus authenticating a plurality of faces from one piece of image data, even if a Goto master who will be described later visits the group in a group, it becomes possible for one of the caution persons MB to recognize it as a group, You can immediately recognize a group of Goto masters. Therefore, it becomes possible to promptly notify the employee that the Goto group exists.
Also, by providing an "authentication type" that indicates the type of face authentication, it is possible to classify the person MB requiring attention, a good customer, a new customer, etc., reducing the time for collation, and sales data for each individual player. It is also possible to use it for the analysis of.

Further, by analyzing the matching rate with the face image data 605 registered in the database of the face authentication server 80, the “matching rate” can be used as an index of whether or not the person MB needs attention. . The responsible person or the like operating the surveillance camera system 60 can carry out the registration work in the database while being convinced that the person MB is a caution person. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous misregistering as the person MB requiring attention by deciding and registering a predetermined "matching rate" as the threshold value. In addition, a method of collating faces by individually analyzing and comparing the feature points of each of the facial features of “eye”, “nose”, “mouth”, and “ear”, and the outline of the entire face and each A method of comparing faces by comparing the positions of “eyes”, “nose”, “mouth”, “ears”, etc. can be considered. In this way, it is conceivable to further improve the collation rate.
It should be noted that the work of registering the caution person MB in the database is shown to be made by a person, but if the “matching rate” is equal to or more than a predetermined value, the probability of being the caution person MB is high. The work of registering the caution person MB in the database may be automatically registered, and the work of the operator is reduced by the automation.

Next, the person in charge operating the surveillance camera system 60 judges from the result sent from the face authentication server 80, and if it is confirmed that the person MB needs attention (YES in S907), the face authentication is performed. A registration instruction is given to the server 80 (S908), and data having the same content as the command data 67 is registered in the face authentication server 80 (S909).
The data registered in the face authentication server 80 is “start code” indicating the key number of the extracted image, “version” indicating the software version, and “position indicating the position where the surveillance camera 61 recording the extracted image is installed”. “Device code”, “device number” indicating the number of the surveillance camera 61 that recorded the extracted image, “year/month/day”/“hour/minute/second” indicating the date and time when the extracted image was recorded, and the amount of data of the extracted image There is "image data size" indicating that and the face image data 605 in which the extracted image is encrypted.
If the person in charge of operating the surveillance camera system 60 is not the caution person MB, the person in charge is not in registration with the caution person MB and waits until the notice of the visit of the caution person MB is received (S907). NO).

Next, when the caution person MB is registered in the face authentication server 80, the surveillance camera system 60 acquires information on the position of the surveillance camera 61 that last captured the caution person MB (S802). The surveillance camera system 60 selects the event code (“105”) and “suspicious person information” (S803), and the management server 32 displays the event code (“105”), an image or moving image of a face or appearance, and the surveillance camera 61. The position information is transmitted and a notification is given (S804).
The management server 32 obtains the information of all the logged-in SIP clients 36/37 (S805), and obtains the information of the positions of the SIP clients 36/37 from all the SIP clients 36/37 to obtain the information of the radio wave intensity. Data is requested (S806). Each of the SIP clients 36 and 37 measures the radio field intensity (S807) and transmits the radio field intensity and the number of the connected access point to the management server 32 (S808). The management server 32 calculates the positions and distances of the SIP clients 36 and 37 and the caution person MB from the position information of the surveillance camera 61, the position of the caution person MB, and the position information of the SIP client (S809). The management server 32 stores this information in the database of the DB server 25 (S810), displays it as alarm information in characters such as "suspicious person information" on all the SIP clients 36 and 37, and transmits an image or a moving image (S811). ).

FIG. 53 is an example of alarm information displayed by the SIP client 36 on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40.
The alarm information detail screens 3901 and 3910 represent the transition from the alarm information list screen 380 (FIG. 31) to the detail screen. Then, the alarm information detail screen 3901 (FIG. 53(A)) that has transited to the detail screen is first displayed, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the alarm information detail screen 3910 (FIG. 53(B)) is automatically switched.
The alarm information detail screen 3901 is provided with a delivery date/time display 3902 that shows the time when the suspicious individual information was delivered. At the center of the alarm information detail screen 3901, a face image display unit 3903 is provided which displays the face image or appearance captured by the face authentication server 80 or the surveillance camera system 60. A switching button 3904 is provided so that the user can switch to not only an image but also a moving image. The position number 3905 of the camera that captured the image is displayed on the upper portion of the face image display portion 3903. Below the alarm information detail screen 3901, the SIP client 36 and a distance display unit 3906 that displays the distance from the camera position or the position where the surveillance camera system 60 last captured the caution person MB is provided.
The distance display unit 3906 expresses the distance with a figure, a character, and a color. For example, if the color of the distance display portion 3906 is red, a close state is represented, and if the color is blue, a distant state is represented. Further, if the diagonal line of the figure between the display of perspective and the perspective is close to either, it represents the perspective. The near distance may be expressed by the color of the square figure surrounded by the face image display portion 3903. Further, the distance may be expressed by a numerical value.

On the alarm information detail screen 3910, the layout of the game arcade 1 is expressed, and the position of the caution person MB is displayed. It is displayed that the caution person MB is in the passage of three courses, and the position of the SIP client 36 is represented by MS. In addition, the position (CH3) of the camera that has captured the caution person MB is also represented. By displaying the position (CH3) of the captured camera on the alarm information detail screen 3910, it is possible to recognize in what state the sent image was captured, so that the employee MS accurately grasps the situation. be able to.
With the above configuration, by notifying the employee MS of accurate information, it is possible to move while confirming the information of the image such as the face or appearance of the caution person MB on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40. Therefore, it is possible to rush to the site while quickly grasping the person MB requiring attention. Further, it is possible to prompt the employee MS close to the caution person MB to pay attention by the information such as the position and distance from the caution person MB. Further, since it is possible to notify by a moving image, it is possible to grasp the situation of the trouble more clearly than the image, and it is possible to respond more quickly.
The layout may be displayed by real-time bidirectional communication to represent not only the stop image but also the movements of the caution person MB and the employee MS (client 36) in real time.

<Control to analyze and identify groups that cause cheating or artificial trouble>
The mode in which the control of the process of analyzing and identifying the group that causes the fraudulent act or the artificial trouble processed in the game hall 1 and the chain store headquarters 500 will be described in detail.
Control for identifying a goto group will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 50 and FIGS. 54 to 66 using sequence diagrams, flowcharts, schematic diagrams, explanatory diagrams, and the like. FIG. 48 is a sequence diagram when a caution person comes to the store, and FIG. 49 is a flowchart regarding control processing when the caution person comes to the store. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a control in which the face authentication server 80 collates a person in order to identify the person requiring attention. FIG. 54 is an overall configuration diagram of a game hall system that specifies a goto group. FIG. 55 is a sequence diagram of a group code creating process of the system for identifying a goto group. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of a group code creating process of the system for identifying a goto group. 57 and 58 are schematic diagrams of captured images of a system for identifying a goto group. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram of each server of the system for identifying a goto group. FIG. 60 is a conceptual diagram of a system for identifying a goto group. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of group code data. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data of the face authentication number 583 and pseudo data. 63, 64, and 65 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the screen of the mobile terminal device 40. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the extraction processing of the system for identifying the goto group.

First, the control for identifying the goto group will be described using sequence diagrams, flowcharts, schematic diagrams, explanatory diagrams, etc. of the control of the game hall system for identifying the goto group.
In the game arcade 1, it is judged whether the game player M captured by the monitoring camera 61 is the caution person MB. 48 and 49 (S800), the face image data 605 stored in the face authentication server 80 is collated to determine whether or not the person MB needs attention (S901 in FIGS. 48 and 50). When it is determined that the caution person MB has visited the game arcade 1 of store A (YES in S901 of FIGS. 48 and 50), the capture image shown in FIG. 57 used when the above-mentioned caution person MB visited the store. From 600, the question data 584 is created as a number for managing the files of the face image data 606 of the persons (MG2 to MG5) other than the face image data 605 of the caution person MB, and is stored for the number of persons (S1012). The system is on standby until the caution person MB comes to the store (NO in S901 of FIGS. 48 and 50).

For example, in the game arcade 1 of store A, the file name of the face image data 606 of the suspected person (MG2 to MG5) captured mainly by the caution person MB is the number “GID001 to GID004” of the suspected data 584, In the game hall 1 of another store B, as shown in FIG. 58, the suspicious data 584 as the file name of the face image data 606 of the suspected person (MG2, MG6 to MG8) captured mainly by the caution person MB. Numbers (GID10001 to GID10004) are attached. By creating the suspicious data 584, it is possible to mark a person (MG, etc.) that is captured together with the caution person MB on the assumption that the person is a member of the Goto group. However, at this stage, the person is recorded as a suspicious person rather than a person requiring attention.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 62, store data 582 for distinguishing stores, face authentication number 583 as a file number for managing face image data 605, and suspicious data 584 as a file number for managing face image data 606 and Photographing date/time data 585 indicating the date/time when the face image data 605 was photographed is created, and these data are transmitted to the face authentication server 580 of the chain store headquarters 500 (S1013). Further, the transmitted data may be accompanied by data indicating the rental unit price of the game medium depending on the shooting location.
The date and time of the shooting date and time data 585 can be used for verification when an incident occurs, and can also be used for increasing the credibility when the face image data 606 is collated. These prevent misidentification of the visitor M who accidentally appears as the caution person MB as the caution person MB and make a determination.
The data transmitted from many stores is stored in the face authentication server 580 of the chain store headquarters 500 as shown in FIG. In this way, by collecting the face image data 606 from many shops in a wide range, it becomes possible to perform collation in a wide range and with high accuracy.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the data collected from many stores is extracted by the extraction process (S1100) described later, and the data is extracted so that the general public is not mistakenly recognized.
The same face authentication number 583 is extracted using the face authentication number 583 as a key, and it is collated whether or not the same person exists in the face image data 605 of the extracted doubt data 584 (S1015). As shown in FIG. 60, the same FID001 is extracted from the transmitted FID001, and it is determined that the person with the GID001 transmitted from the A store and the GID10001 transmitted from the B store are the same among the suspicious data 584 therein. If so (YES in S1015), as shown in FIGS. 59, 60, and 61, a group code 586 is created as G001 as a goto group of FID001 (S1016). At the same time, the suspicious data 584 is rewritten, and a face authentication number 583, for example, the number of FID002, is newly added as the caution person MB (S1017). By rewriting the suspicious data 584 with the caution person MB, not only the caution person MB can be quickly grasped but also many caution person MB can be specified.

Then, the group code 586 created as shown in FIG. 61 is numbered and stored for each goto group in the face authentication server 580 of the chain store headquarters 500 (S1018). In the group code 586, for example, in G001, FID001, FID002, and FID056 are shown as the face authentication number 583 as a file name recognized as a goto group. In addition, the face authentication server 580 saves the face image data 605 and the shooting date/time data 585 which are the suspicious data 584 of FIG. 62 not only when the face authentication number 583 but also when it is determined that they are not the same person (No in S1015). To do. This storage processing enables the storage and analysis of a large amount of data thereafter. The group code 586 not only makes it possible to recognize that the caution persons MB form a group and facilitates management of the Goto group, but also when some kind of incident occurs or is likely to occur. It is used for analysis such as search and extraction of the face image data 605 and 606.

After that, the face authentication server 580 of the chain store head office 500 delivers the face image data (605 or 606) indicated by the group code 586 and the face authentication number 583 to all the stores via the Internet line 588 (S1019). By collecting the suspicious data 584, collating it, and distributing the face image data 605 and 606 to other stores with the face authentication number 583 as a management file, it is possible to quickly grasp the goto group, which is insufficient in advance. It is possible to prepare for the situation.
The face image data (605 or 606) having the distributed group code 586 and the file name as the face authentication number 583 is stored in the face authentication server 80 of each game arcade 1.

Then, the above-mentioned control of the system for the amusement hall is repeatedly performed, and as the face image data (605 or 606) is accumulated, the accuracy of the Goto group analysis is improved, and more attention-required persons MB can be grasped. Become. Up to now, a person has comprehensively judged from individual videos and images to judge a goto group, but a large number of people are extracted from one image and judged from many face image data (605 or 606). Therefore, the more the number of face image data (605 or 606) is large, the more accurate the determination becomes.
Further, in the present system, management is performed for each group code 584, but if the same person is found by periodically checking whether the same person exists across the group code 584, It is possible to unify the group codes 584 into a large population. In this way, it becomes possible to grasp the Goto group in a chained manner, and it is possible to promptly grasp the visit of the Goto group from one person MB requiring attention.
Furthermore, since the group code 584, the face authentication number 583, and the face image data 605 are distributed from the chain store headquarters 500 to other stores as well as the own store, information between other stores can be quickly and widely distributed over a wide area. Can call attention to the store.

Next, the extraction process (S1100) will be described with reference to FIGS. 59, 62 and 66. In the extraction process (S1100), it is determined whether or not the same face authentication number 583 exists among different data numbers as shown in FIG. Then, this process is continuously repeated until the same face authentication number 583 is found (NO in S1101). If the same face authentication number 583 is found (YES in S1101), the suspicious data 584 with the data numbers shown in FIGS. 59 and 62 are extracted (S1103). For example, GID001, GID002, GID003, GID10001, GID10002, and GID10003 are extracted from the extracted doubt data 584.

Next, of the data (S1103) extracted from the face authentication server 580 provided in the chain store headquarters 500, priority is given to the face authentication number 583 shown in the area where the gaming machine with a high rental unit price of the game media is installed. This is a process of performing registration as data for determination (S1104).
For example, in the area where the pachinko machine P is installed, in the case of three areas where the unit price of the rental ball is 4 yen, 1 yen, and 0.5 yen, the pachinko machine P with a high rental unit price of the game medium is installed. The data captured by the camera showing the area of 4 yen is preferentially extracted (YES in S1104). At the amusement hall 1 of each store, the face authentication number 583, the suspicious data 584, and the shooting date/time data 585 as well as the data for distinguishing the high rate or the low rate from the face authentication server 80 in advance (for example, a rental ball unit price of 4 yen, 1 yen, a rental medal) A unit price of 20 yen, 5 yen) is attached and transmitted to the face authentication server 581 of the chain store headquarters 500.
With the above configuration, the Goto group often conducts Goto acts aiming at high-rate gaming machines, and it is possible to verify from the event that the damage amount due to Goto act is large, and to quickly identify the Goto group from a large amount of data. It will be easier and quick delivery to each store will be possible.

Next, it is determined by the store data 582 whether the extracted data (S1103) is data shot at the same store (S1105). Here, if it is determined that the data is not taken at the same store (NO in S1105), it is unlikely that a general customer who is accidentally photographed will be mistakenly recognized as a member of a person requiring attention, so the data for discrimination is used. Register (S1113) and end. In the case of data of another store, it is less likely that an ordinary person is a member of a person requiring attention, as compared with the case of the same store, and therefore the determination is highly accurate.

Next, when it is determined that the data was taken at the same store (YES in S1105), it is determined from the shooting date/time data 585 whether the data was taken on the same day (S1107). Here, when it is determined that the data is not the data captured on the same day (NO in S1107), it is unlikely that a general customer who is accidentally photographed will be mistakenly recognized as a member of a person requiring special attention, and is registered in the data for discrimination. (S1113) and the process ends. In the case of data taken on another day, it is less likely that a general person will be recognized as a member of a person requiring attention as compared with the case of the same day, and therefore the determination is highly accurate.

Next, when it is determined that the data was captured on the same day (YES in S1107), it is determined whether the data has passed a predetermined time from the capturing date/time data 585 (S1109). Here, the predetermined time may be freely set from about 10 minutes to about 1 hour.
If it is determined that the data has not passed the predetermined time (NO in S1109), the continuously captured face image data 606 may have been erroneously transmitted. It returns to the collation of the number 583 (S1115). By this processing, it is possible to eliminate erroneous recognition of a general person as a member of a person requiring attention by continuous shooting, and it is possible to store highly accurate data.
Next, when it is determined that the data has passed the predetermined time (YES in S1109), there is a high possibility that the person MB needs attention after the predetermined time has passed after entering the store. Since there is a high possibility that it is a member, the registration is ended as registration data (S1113). By such control, it is possible to determine the member of the goto group in the same store from the data obtained in a short time, so that the processing can be performed quickly and the determination can be performed accurately.

In addition, in the same shop, the caution person MB approaches the person MG other than the face image data 605 of the caution person MB for a predetermined time, for example, 10 minutes, and then approaches the person MG a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). If it is stored in 606, the suspected person M may be rewritten from the suspected data 584 as the suspected person, and the group code 584 may be added as the cautioned person MB to manage the suspected person M. By doing so, even if an ordinary person happens to appear in the image with the caution person MB, it can be quickly grasped without being mistakenly recognized as a Goto group at the same store on that day.

Next, FIG. 63 to FIG. 65 show an example of notifying the employee MS of the goto group when the above-mentioned person MB requiring attention visits the store.
63 or 64, the face image display unit 3903 displays the face image or the appearance captured by the surveillance camera system 60 on the alarm information detail screen 3901 on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40 described above. The Goto group of MB is shown. The group code 584 and the face authentication number 583 are used to notify the employee MS of the goto group and the person MB requiring attention.

FIG. 65 shows an alarm information detail screen 3910. On the alarm information detail screen 3910, the layout of the game arcade 1 is displayed, and the position of the caution person MB is displayed. It is displayed that the caution person MB is in the passage of three courses, and the position of the SIP client 36 is represented by MS. In addition, the position (CH3) of the camera that has captured the caution person MB is also represented. By displaying the position (CH3) of the captured camera on the alarm information detail screen 3910, it is possible to recognize in what state the sent image was captured, so that the employee MS accurately grasps the situation. be able to.

With the above configuration, by notifying the employee MS of accurate information, it is possible to move while confirming the information of the image such as the face or appearance of the caution person MB on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40. Therefore, it is possible to rush to the site while quickly grasping the person MB requiring attention. Further, it is possible to prompt the employee MS close to the caution person MB to pay attention by the information such as the position and distance from the caution person MB. Further, since it is possible to notify by a moving image, it is possible to grasp the situation of the trouble more clearly than the image, and it is possible to respond more quickly.
Further, since a group of the attention-required persons MB is displayed at a certain place in the game arcade 1, it is possible to predict in advance a danger that the Goto group will gather and cause something wrong. Further, it becomes possible to notify the employees MS of the fact that the Goto group is gathering to the employees by the group call.

In particular, a cautionary person MB having a group code 586 in an area in which a gaming machine with a high rental unit price, such as a unit price of a ball for a pachinko machine P is 4 yen or a unit price for a loan medal of a slot machine SMA is 20 yen, is installed. Staying in the same room and another person MB needing attention having the same group code 586 invades the same area with a high rental unit price, it is displayed on the monitor of the mobile terminal device 40, the hall computer 90 or the surveillance camera system 60. You may notify the employee MS. With the above configuration, it is possible to prevent damage to a gaming machine installed in an area where the unit price for rent is high due to a messy act of the got group. In particular, there is a high probability that goto acts will be performed in the area where gaming machines with a high rental unit price are installed, and the amount of damage will also be large, so notification with this system is a cost-effective way to prevent goto actions. The effect is high.
The alarm information detail screen 3910 may be displayed not only as a still image but also in real time as the movements of the caution person MB and the employee MS by performing bidirectional communication in real time.

Further, when there is the above-mentioned “unauthorized door open”, the person with the group code 586 is mainly used by the surveillance camera 61 by using the above-described processing of S800 and S1000, and the attention-requiring person MB visiting the store. May be monitored for location identification and behavior, and may alert employees.

In the present system, the system is such that the game hall 1 of the chain store and the chain store head office 500 are separated, but the system is not particularly limited, and the configuration is completed in one game hall 1 or in the face authentication server 80. It may be a different system.
Further, this system may be a system for cooperating with a third party organization to grasp the Goto group nationwide.

<Control of individual face authentication device in system for game hall>
The manner in which the individual face authentication device 800 used for fraud monitoring and sales in the game arcade 1 is controlled will be described in detail with reference to the sequence diagrams, flowcharts, schematic diagrams, explanatory diagrams, etc. shown in FIGS. 74 to 93. To do.
FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the main process. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of member processing. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of non-member processing. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of non-member processing. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of common processing. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the recorded data capture process. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the face authentication matching process. FIG. 81 is a time chart of a recorded data capture image. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the face authentication server matching process. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the leaving process. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the abnormality processing. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the personal identification number registration processing. FIG. 86 is a sequence diagram showing processing when a member is seated. FIG. 87 is a sequence diagram showing processing when a non-member sits down. FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram of the captured image instruction list 823. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of inputting a personal identification number. FIG. 90 is an explanatory view of the state of inputting the personal identification number as seen from a plane. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing items determined by the face authentication engine installed in the individual face authentication device 800. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram of a form output from the hall computer 90. FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram of a form output from the face authentication server 80.

<<Main processing>>
FIG. 74 shows a flowchart of the main processing (S2000) of the individual face authentication device 800. When the player sits in front of the pachinko machine P, each camera 69 of the individual face recognition device 800 equipped with the face recognition engine captures the face of the person and determines whether or not the person is seated ( (S2101), when it is detected that a person is seated (YES in S2101), a standby state is set and video recording is started (S2102). Then, it is determined whether or not the member card 550 is inserted, and the process proceeds to the member process (S2200). If it is determined that the membership card 550 is not inserted (NO in S2103), the process proceeds to non-member processing (S2300). After that, regardless of which processing has passed, the processing shifts to the common processing (S2400), and these processings (S2103 to S2104) are repeated until the user leaves the seat (NO from S2104 to S2103). When the member card 550 or the guest card 551 is discharged and the user leaves the seat or when all the valuable value is consumed and the person normally leaves the seat without any balls, the leaving process described below is performed (S2500). The main process ends.

<<Member processing>>
FIG. 75 shows a flowchart of member processing (S2200) of the individual face authentication device 800.
The personal identification number is stored in the IC chip 553 of the membership card 550 in order to secure security such as theft, and the process starts when the personal identification number is input and the two coincide with each other (YES in S2201). In addition, this process stands by until the personal identification number is input (NO in S2201).
Next, the process starts when the personal identification number is input and the passwords match (YES in S2201), and the process shifts to a recording data capture process described later (S2800). After the recorded data capture process (S2800) is performed, the individual face authentication device 800 generates face image data 559 from the captured capture image 600 (S2203), and the face image data 559 shown in FIG. The data is stored in the area 865 (S2205). At the same time, the individual face authentication device 800 reads the face image data 555 stored in the membership card 550 and compares it with the face image data 559 stored in the capture data area 865 (S2209). When the face image data 555 stored in the membership card 550 and the face image data 559 stored in the capture data area 865 match (YES in S2209), the individual face authentication device 800 sets the monitoring level to 1 (S2210). The face image data 559 is saved in the save data area 864 of the HDD 855 (S2211). Also, the individual face authentication device 800 transmits the unit number to the face authentication server 80 when the face authentication is successful (S2213), and ends the member process.

In this way, by using the face image data 555 stored in the membership card 550, it is possible to collate with the face image data 555 which is highly reliable and clear without accessing the face authentication server 80. The processing speed can be increased, and the processing load on the face authentication server 80 can be reduced. For members who have few troubles at the amusement hall 1 and who can confirm their contact information, etc., set the monitoring level to 1 and suppress the monitoring by equipment and employees as much as possible, so that the burden on employees and the important person MB It becomes possible to focus on the monitoring of.
When the face image data 555 stored in the membership card 550 and the face image data 559 stored in the capture data area 865 do not match (NO in S2209), the individual face authentication device 800 has the stolen membership card 550. Since there is a suspicion that there is a doubt, or because there is a possibility that the device is abnormal, etc., the process proceeds to the abnormal process (S3000), and the member process ends.

<<Recorded data capture process>>
FIG. 79 shows a flowchart of the recorded data capture process (S2800) of the individual face authentication device 800.
As shown in FIG. 88, the individual face authentication device 800 has a monitoring level in consideration of security, and the timing of capturing the captured image 600 from the recorded data is changed according to the monitoring level. A capture image instruction list 823 is a list showing the capture instruction signals. The low monitoring level is set for persons with high credibility such as members and good customers. On the contrary, the higher the monitoring level, the more the person MB needs attention. By setting the monitoring level in this way, it is not necessary to save wastefully, and a large storage area for data is not required. Further, since the process is not complicated, the access to the face authentication server 80 is small, and the process of the individual face authentication device 800 is quick. Further, in terms of security, this system can focus on and monitor the person MB requiring attention.

If the individual face authentication device 800 receives a capture signal for capturing a face image from the ball lending machine PT, the platform information display device K, or the hall computer 90 as shown in FIG. 81 (S2801), the individual face authentication device 800. Of the HDD 855, the recorded data for a total of 3 seconds of 2 seconds after receiving the capture signal from the recorded data of 1 second before is stored in the captured image extraction area 824 and the captured image extraction area 824. The still image data is extracted from the frame stored in (S2802). The individual face authentication device 800 extracts the captured image 600 in the best state for authentication from the still image (S2803). In particular, by checking back one second before, it is possible to catch the face without fail at the moment when the face is surely caught in a situation such as an abnormality of the game machine or an operation of the personal identification number. It is also possible to capture and select the clearest image in this frame. These are processed by incorporating software for instantaneously determining the frontal visibility and the sharpness.
The individual face authentication device 800 determines whether the captured image 600 is a front-facing face (S2804), and if it is a front-facing face (YES in S2804), the front-view image is extracted. (S2805) If it is a profile (NO in S2804), the profile image is extracted (S2806), and the recorded data capture process (S2800) is ended.

<<Face Authentication Matching Process>>
FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the face authentication matching process. The face authentication matching process (S2600) first proceeds to the above-described recorded data capture process (S2800), extracts an image from the recorded data, and generates face image data 559 (S2601). Then, the individual face authentication device 800 determines whether or not there is the face image data 559 already stored (S2603). When the face image data 559 is not stored (NO in S2603), the individual face authentication device 800 is in the initial state of sitting in front of the gaming machine, and therefore is compared with the face authentication server 80 to identify the person MB requiring attention. In order to determine whether or not it is and the monitoring level, the processing shifts to the face authentication server matching processing described later (S2900). When the face image data 559 is stored (YES in S2603), the individual face authentication device 800 extracts the face image data 559 from the storage data area 864 of the HDD 855 (S2605).

Then, each time the capture signal is output, it is determined whether or not the face image data 559 stored is the same as the seated person (S2606). If they are not the same person (NO in S2606), the process proceeds to the abnormal process described later and ends (S3000). In this way, fine monitoring can be performed.
When the person is the same person (YES in S2606), the individual face authentication device 800 outputs an ejectable command to the card lending machine PT to make the card ejectable (S2607), and the card can be ejected. The state is displayed on the liquid crystal operation unit 801 or the LED display unit 812 of the ball lending machine PT (S2608). Further, the individual face authentication device 800 cancels the function of stopping the various functions (supply operation, display of the number of owned balls, etc.) of the other ball lending machine PT (S2609), and the face authentication server 80 receives the collation result and the machine number. The process is transmitted and the process ends (S2613).

<<Face authentication server matching process>>
FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the face authentication server matching process. The face authentication server matching process (S2900) is a process mainly for selecting a non-member monitoring level by the face authentication server 80.
First, the individual face authentication device 800 stores the face image data 559 of the player M who is seated for the first time in the storage data area 864 of the HDD 855 (S2901). The stored face image data 559 is transmitted to the face authentication server 80 together with the machine number (S2903). The face authentication server 80 first determines whether or not the person MB needs attention, which may hinder sales, so that the face image data 605 of the person MB needing attention is stored in the person data area 87 of the person needing attention. The face image data 605 is collated with the transmitted face image data 559 (S2905). If the face authentication server 80 determines that the person MB needs attention (YES in S2905), the face ID (FID) is extracted (S2915) and set to the highest monitoring level 4 (S2917).

Next, when the face authentication server 80 is not the caution person MB (NO in S2905), the face authentication server 80 determines whether or not the customer is a good customer (S2907). If the customer is a good customer (YES in S2907), the face authentication number 583 (FID) is extracted (S2911), and is set to the low monitoring level 2 like the member (S2913). Next, in the case of the general game player M who is not good at the face authentication server (NO in S2907), the face authentication server 80 determines whether or not it is a new customer (S2909). If the customer is a new customer (YES in S2909), the face authentication number 583 is newly registered in the platform analysis data area 88 or the customer analysis data area 89 of the face authentication server 80 (S2910), and the monitoring level is moderate. It is set to level 3 (S2923). If the face authentication server 80 is the general game player M who is not a new customer (NO in S2909), the face authentication server 80 sets the monitoring level to the intermediate monitoring level 3 (S2923).
Then, the face authentication server 80 stores the extracted face authentication number 583 (FID) and the face image data 559 sent from the individual face authentication device 800 (S2925), and monitors with the extracted face authentication number 583 (FID). The level is transmitted to the individual face authentication device 800 (S2927).

<<Non-member processing>>
76 and 77 show a flowchart of the non-member processing S2300.
In the non-member processing, it is determined whether or not the monitoring level is set (S2301). In the first process, all the non-member gamers M who are seated do not have the monitoring level set (NO in S2301), and thus the above-described face authentication matching process is performed (S2600).
Here, if there is a monitoring level setting (YES in S2301), the individual face authentication device 800 shifts to each process according to the monitoring level (S2303).

The monitoring level 4 (4 in S2303) is a monitoring level for monitoring the caution person MB. As one of the targets of monitoring, the number of times the game machine is started is monitored. When the number of starts of the gaming machine has reached a predetermined number or more (YES in S2305), the face authentication collation process is performed (S2600), and it is confirmed whether the person is the same person. With such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 is effective for a goto that induces a big hit by causing a magnetic sensor to malfunction due to a radio wave goto or the like and causing a switch for determining a big hit to malfunction in a short time. Therefore, by determining whether or not the person playing the game is the same based on a predetermined number of times, even if the person is replaced by the group, it is possible to deal with the abnormality processing described later. It is intimidating to the person who performs it.

Monitoring level 3 (3 in S2303), or a monitoring level for monitoring a caution person MB or a general player M when the number of starts of the gaming machine has not reached a predetermined number of times (NO in S2305). .. One of the targets of monitoring is monitoring the number of difference balls. When the number of times reaches the predetermined number or more (YES in S2307), the face authentication matching process is performed (S2600), and it is confirmed whether the person is the same person. By such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 can determine how much difference the gaming machines in which the same person is playing have a difference, and in particular, obtain the gaming medium in a short period of time. It is also possible to monitor the goggling behavior that may occur, and it can also be used as sales information for analysis of new machines.
Next, when there are a predetermined number of balls (YES in S2309), the process proceeds to face authentication collation processing (S2600), and it is confirmed whether or not the same person. By such a process, it is possible to determine how many balls the gaming machine in which the same person is playing holds, and in particular, a game that acquires a game medium for a short period of time. It is also possible to monitor the behavior. It can also be used as sales information for analysis of new units. In particular, if the possessed ball is the one acquired today, it is possible to analyze which gaming machine the game is currently playing through.

Next, when the player M has made a big hit (YES in S2311), the individual face authentication device 800 proceeds to face authentication matching processing (S2600) and confirms whether the person is the same person. By such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 can monitor the state in which the same person has won the jackpot. Since the captured image 600 described above captures the recorded data one second before the jackpot signal is received, the image from the state before the jackpot is stored together with the determination as to whether or not the person is the same person. In some cases, it is possible to confirm later. It can also be used as sales information for analysis of new units.

Next, when the individual face authentication device 800 divides the balls into a player accompanied by the player M and allows the accompanying person to play the game (YES in S2313), the individual face authentication device 800 shifts to the face authentication matching process (S2600), and the same. Check if you are a person. By such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 can prevent the stolen guest card 551 from being used, and can prevent mischief while leaving the seat such as a break or a meal.
Next, when the player M inserts the guest card 551 into the ball lending machine PT (YES in S2314), the process proceeds to the face authentication matching process (S2600) to determine whether the same person or the first process. Confirm and store face image data 559. Through such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 prevents the stolen guest card 551 from being used, and also prevents the player from being mischieved while leaving a desk such as a break or a meal by registering a personal identification number described later. be able to.

Next, when the player M puts money into the ball lending machine PT (YES in S2315), the individual face authentication device 800 shifts to face authentication collation processing (S2600) and confirms whether the person is the same person. .. Through such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 prevents the stolen guest card 551 from being used, analyzes how much money the same person has used, and uses the money to restrict the use of money and call attention. It can be used as sales information for analysis of new machines.
Next, the individual face authentication device 800 shifts to the face authentication collation process when the player M throws the balls he/she has acquired into the counting unit 805 of the pachinko machine P to activate the counting unit 805 (YES in S2316). (S2600), it is confirmed whether the same person. Through such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 prevents the stolen guest card 551 from being used, analyzes how much the same person has acquired, and uses it as business information for analysis of a new machine. be able to. Further, even when the counting unit 805 malfunctions to perform a goto act to increase the number of balls held at one time, a criminal act or a person is captured, and the face image data 559 is generated and saved to be used for later verification. Is possible.

Next, when the player M registers the personal identification number in the guest card 551 using the liquid crystal operation unit 801 of the ball lending machine PT (YES in S2319), the process shifts to face authentication collation processing (S2600), and the person is the same person. Whether or not it is the first processing is stored, and the face image data 559 is stored. By such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 prevents the stolen guest card 551 from being used, and also prevents a mischief while leaving a seat such as a break or meal by registering a personal identification number described later. can do.
When the face authentication processing ends (S2600), the individual face authentication device 800 transitions to the personal identification number registration processing (S2700), and the non-member processing ends.

<<PIN code registration processing>>
FIG. 85 shows a flowchart of the personal identification number registration processing (S2700).
The ball lending machine PT uses the individual face authentication device 800 to prevent theft and mischief during a break, meal, etc. while away from the seat, and not only on the membership card 550 but also on the guest card 551, the personal identification number. A lock function is provided as a function for registering the information and stopping the operation of the ball lending machine PT. In order to use the lock function, it is necessary to input a personal identification number (S2701) and register the personal identification number in the ball lending machine PT (S2703). In addition, in order to prevent a mischief in which the personal identification number is forgotten or to inform the personal identification number while registering the personal identification number, the machine number and the personal identification number are transmitted to the face authentication server 80 or the hall computer 90 and stored (S2705). ). By these processes, the individual face authentication device 800 can be prepared for a later trouble.
FIG. 93 shows an example of the personal identification number registration form 81 output when managing the personal identification number stored in the face authentication server 80 when the personal identification number is registered. Items stored by face authentication are face authentication number 583, member card ID, personal identification number, and communication history. By outputting the personal identification number registration form 81, it is possible to promptly deal with the case where the personal identification number is forgotten or the mischief of notifying the personal identification number registered intentionally.

<<Common processing>>
FIG. 78 shows a flowchart of common processing (S2400) common to members and non-members.
When an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine (YES in S2401), the individual face authentication device 800 moves to face authentication matching processing (S2600), confirms whether the person is the same person, and if the person is not the same person, performs the abnormality processing. You can also do Further, even the same person can update and record the face image data 559. By such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 can deal with troubles to the game machine such as Goto, and it is possible to confirm later by the image.
Next, when the player M inputs the personal identification number (YES in S2403), the individual face authentication device 800 shifts to the face authentication collation process (S2600) and confirms whether the person is the same person. By such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 can prevent the stolen membership card 550 and guest card 551 from being used, and also prevent mischief while leaving the desk such as a break or a meal. .
In particular, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, until the password is input on the password input display section 845 shown in the liquid crystal operation unit 801 of the ball lending machine PT and the enter button 843 is pressed, the camera 69 is pressed. Since there are many cases where the face is viewed from the front and the camera 69 is facing the front for a long time, capturing an image during this period is an opportunity to reliably capture the front view. Further, by extracting the face image during this period, it is highly possible that a clear image is obtained, and there is an effect of threatening theft. In particular, in the capture process (S2800), the image can be captured one second before the personal identification number is input, so that the front view can be reliably captured.
Next, when the player M ejects the membership card 550 and the guest card 551 (YES in S2405), the individual face authentication device 800 shifts to the face authentication collation process (S2600) and confirms whether the person is the same person. To do. By such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 can prevent the member card 550 and the guest card 551 from being stolen and prevent them from being mischieved while leaving the desk such as a break or a meal.

<<Away away processing>>
FIG. 83 shows a flowchart of the leaving process (S2500) when the player M leaves the seat.
First, it is determined whether the membership card 550 is being inserted into the membership card 550 (S2501). If the membership card 550 is being inserted (YES in S2501), the individual face authentication device 800 waits until the personal identification number is entered (NO in S2502) for the ball lending machine PT until the personal identification number is entered (NO in S2502). Is prohibited (S2513) and the ball lending function is stopped (S2515). By such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 can prevent the member card 550 and the guest card 551 from being stolen and prevent them from being mischieved while leaving the desk such as a break or a meal.
When the personal identification number is input (YES in S2501) while the membership card 550 is being inserted (YES in S2502), the individual face identification device 800 ejects the membership card 550 (S2504), and the machine number and face identification number 583. And an end signal are transmitted to the face authentication server 80 and the individual face authentication server 120 (S2509). Then, the face image data 559 is stored in the face authentication server 80 and the individual face authentication server 120 (S2511). In this way, the individual face authentication device 800 can later confirm the image or the like for a trouble. Also, since it is possible to confirm the replacement of people, it can be used as sales information for analysis of new machines.

Next, when there is a guest card 551 or the like and the lock function described above is activated (YES in S2503), the ejection of the membership card 550 is prohibited to the ball lending machine PT (S2513) and the ball lending function Stop is performed (S2515). By such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 can prevent the guest card 551 from being stolen and being prevented from being mischieved while leaving the seat such as a break or a meal.
Next, when the guest card 551 or the like is inserted and there is a balance while leaving the seat (YES in S2505), the ball lending machine PT is prohibited from discharging the membership card 550 (S2513) and the ball lending function Stop is performed (S2515). By such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 can prevent the guest card 551 from being stolen and being prevented from being mischieved while leaving the seat such as a break or a meal.
Next, when the guest card 551 or the like is inserted and there is a ball held while leaving the seat (YES in S2507), the ball lending machine PT is prohibited from discharging the membership card 550 (S2513) and the ball lending function. Is stopped (S2515). By such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 can prevent the guest card 551 from being stolen and being prevented from being mischieved while leaving the seat such as a break or a meal.

In the case of non-members other than the above, the individual face authentication device 800 determines that the game is over because the ball lending machine PT is in a state where there is no remaining money, balls, etc. The number and the end signal are transmitted to the face authentication server 80 and the individual face authentication server 120 (S2509). Then, the face image data 559 is stored in the face authentication server 80 and the individual face authentication server 120 (S2511). In this way, the individual face authentication device 800 can later confirm the image or the like with respect to the trouble. Also, since it is possible to confirm the replacement of people, it can be used as sales information for analysis of new machines.

<<Abnormal Processing>>
FIG. 84 shows a flowchart of the abnormality processing (S3000) which is processing when an abnormality occurs in the control of the individual face authentication device 800.
The individual face authentication device 800 determines the type of abnormality described above (S3001), and when prohibiting the ejection of the membership card 550 and the guest card 551 of the ball lending machine PT (YES in S3003), the ball lending machine PT is notified. On the other hand, a card ejection prohibition command is output (S3005), and the ball lending machine PT cancels a card ejection signal such as a return button from the gaming machine (S3007). Further, in order to display that the card lending machine PT prohibits card ejection, a card ejection prohibition display is displayed on the LED display section 812 and the operation display section 802 (S3009). An abnormality code for discriminating the unit number and the type of abnormality is transmitted to the face authentication server 80 and the individual face authentication server 120 (S3011). The individual face authentication device 800 prohibits card ejection until the generated abnormality is processed and the prohibition of card ejection is released (NO in S3013). When the generated abnormality is processed and the prohibition of card ejection is removed (YES in S3013), the individual face authentication device 800 outputs a card ejection possible command to the ball lending machine PT (S3015), and the ball lending machine. In order to display that the card can be ejected, the PT displays on the LED display unit 812 or the operation display unit 802 that the card can be ejected (S3017).

<Processing from sitting to leaving the game machine by the member>
The processing of data from when the member sits down to when he/she leaves the game machine under the control of the individual face authentication device 800 will be described with reference to the sequence diagram shown in FIG. 86.
When the individual face authentication device 800 detects that a person is seated by each of the cameras 69 by detecting a moving body or a human body sensor, the individual face authentication server 820 enters a standby state and starts recording. When the personal identification number is input (YES in S2201), the process moves to the recorded data capture process (S2800), and the captured image 600 is saved. The individual face authentication server 820 generates face image data 559 from the captured capture image 600 (S2203). The individual face authentication server 820 reads the face image data 555 stored in the membership card 550 and compares it with the face image data 559 stored in the capture data area 865 (S2209). When the face image data 555 stored in the membership card 550 and the face image data 559 stored in the capture data area 865 match (YES in S2209), the individual face authentication server 820 sets the monitoring level to 1 (S2210). The face image data 559 is saved in the save data area 864 of the HDD 855 (S2211). The individual face authentication server 820 transmits the unit number, the member ID, and the start signal to the face authentication server 80 when the face authentication is successful (S2213). The face authentication server 80 stores the transmitted member ID, machine number, collation result, and start time.

Next, the individual face authentication server 820 starts the process of ending by pressing the return button 402 of the gaming machine or the end button of the ball lending machine, and leaves the seat (S2500) by inputting the personal identification number (S2502). Begins. When the leaving process is normally completed, the individual face authentication server 820 transmits the member ID, the machine number, and the end signal to the face authentication server 80 (S2213). The face authentication server 80 saves the transmitted member ID, machine number, and end time, and ends the control.

<Processing from non-member seating to leaving the game machine>
In the control of the individual face authentication server 820, the processing of data from the non-member sitting on the game machine to leaving the seat will be described. The processing of the individual face authentication server 820 and the face authentication server 80 will be described with reference to the sequence diagram shown in FIG. To do.
When the individual face recognition device 800 detects that a person is seated by the camera 69 by detecting a moving body or a human body sensor, the individual face authentication server 820 enters a standby state and starts recording. Then, since the monitoring level is not set at first, the face authentication matching process is performed to set the monitoring level (S2600), and then the process proceeds to the recorded data capture process (S2800) to save the captured image 600. To do. The individual face authentication server 820 generates face image data 559 from the captured capture image 600 (S2601), and stores the face image data 559 in the capture data area 865 (S2901). The individual face authentication server 820 transmits the unit number, the face image data 559, and the start signal to the face authentication server 80 (S2903).

The face authentication device server 80 checks the sent face image data 559 to determine whether it is a person requiring attention, a good customer, a new customer or a general customer (S2905, S2097, S2909), and sets the monitoring level of the player M. (S2913, S2921, S2915). The face authentication device server 80 stores the machine number, the face image data 559, and the start time (S2925). The face authentication device server 80 transmits the face authentication number 583 and the monitoring level to the individual face authentication server 820.

Next, the individual face authentication server 820 starts the ending process by pressing the return button 402 of the gaming machine or the end button of the ball lending machine, and if it can be completed normally, the leaving process is started (S2500). The individual face authentication server 820 transmits the face authentication number, the machine number, and the end signal to the face authentication server 80. The face authentication server 80 saves the transmitted member ID, machine number, and end time, and ends the control.

<Data saved in the hall computer by the above processing>
FIG. 92 shows an example of data stored in the hall computer 90 as a form 99.
Member ID, face authentication number 583, machine number, start time and end time of game, game data "number of big hits, number of start (S), number of owned balls, number of difference balls" are shown and used for new machine analysis and business analysis can do.

In the present invention, the guest card 551 is shown and described, but not only the card type but also a coin type having an IC chip mounted therein or a mobile phone having an IC chip mounted therein may be used.

<Control of edge treatment device in amusement hall system>
The manner in which the edge treatment device 70 is controlled when performing the edge treatment in the game arcade 1 will be described in detail with reference to the sequence diagrams, flowcharts, schematic diagrams, explanatory diagrams, etc. shown in FIGS. 94 to 108. .. The end ball processing device 70 mainly includes an end ball server 71 installed in the chain store headquarters 500, a ball lending machine PT installed for one pachinko machine P in the game arcade 1, and a personal mobile terminal SM. It is composed by.

<<Registration processing of the edge ball by the edge ball processing device in the system for amusement hall>>
The sequence diagram, the flowchart, the schematic diagram, the explanatory diagram, etc. shown in FIGS. 94 to 98 and 105 to 107 for controlling the end piece processing device 70 when the game player M in the game arcade 1 registers the end piece A detailed description will be given with a focus on the sequence diagram shown in FIG.
FIG. 94 is a flowchart of an application end ball registration process for registering an end ball by application software installed in the personal mobile terminal SM. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the ball lending machine registration processing for registering an end ball by the ball lending machine PT. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of an edge ball server registration process of registering an edge ball by the edge ball server 71. FIG. 97 is a sequence diagram of a process of registering an end ball. FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram when registering an end ball. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the special code creating process when creating the special code 75. 106 and 107 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of data stored in the end ball server 71.

First, after the end of the game, the player M operates the end ball processing display portion 802h of the ball lending machine PT to register the remaining end balls (YES in S3221). At that time, the ball lending machine PT shifts to the special code creating process (S3350) and creates the special code 75. Next, the ball lending machine PT displays the address of the end ball server 71, the special code 75, the number of balls, the number and the store code on the end ball processing display portion 802h, which are difficult to identify at a glance such as QR code (registered trademark). The information is displayed on the information display unit 815 in the mode (S3223). At the same time, the ball lending machine PT transmits the special code 75, the number of balls to be registered, the machine number, the store code and the ball lending unit price to the end ball server 71 and the hall computer 90 (S3225).

Further, the player M who has started the application software of the personal mobile terminal SM selects the edge ball registration processing, and the ball lending machine PT reads the information displayed on the information display section 815 of the edge ball processing display section 802h. When read from the camera 872 (S3203), the end piece server 71 is automatically accessed (S3205), and the personal mobile terminal SM transmits the application code 76, the special code 75, the store code, the unit number, and the number of balls ( S3207).

If there is a registration instruction from the personal portable terminal SM or the ball lending machine PT, the end ball server 71 starts the processing (YES in S3241), and the special code 75, the unit number, the store from the ball lending machine PT. Data is received and stored for the code, the ball lending unit price and the number of balls (S3243).
The edge server 71 waits until data for collation is transmitted from the personal mobile terminal SM (NO in S3245). If the data for matching is transmitted from the personal portable terminal SM (YES in S3245), the end ball server 71 sends the special code 75, the unit number, the store code and the number of balls sent from the ball lending machine PT. Is collated (S3247).

If the collation result is normal (YES in S3249), the end ball server 71 gives an instruction to display the number of balls to be registered in the personal mobile terminal SM and whether to register (S3211) (S3209) (S3251). ). The personal mobile terminal SM displays whether or not to register (S3211) (S3209), and when registering (YES in S3211), instructs the end server 71 to perform registration (S3213). If there is a registration instruction from the personal portable terminal SM (YES in S3257), the edge server 71 stores the application code 76, the special code 75, the machine number, the shop code, the ball lending unit price and the number of balls (S3259). ). Then, the end ball server 71 gives a normal notification to the personal portable terminal SM and the ball lending machine PT (S3261).
On the other hand, if the collation result is abnormal (NO in S3249), the edge server 71 notifies the personal portable terminal SM and the ball lending machine PT of an abnormality (S3253), and an abnormality in communication may be considered. As a precaution, temporary registration is performed, and the transmitted data is stored for a certain period (S3255).
In this way, since the number of balls to be registered is checked by the ball lending machine PT and the end server 71, even if the player M falsifies the data, the number of balls of the game medium to be registered does not match. Without registration, the game arcade 1 can use the system with enhanced security.

The ball lending machine PT waits until a notice of a normal signal or an abnormal signal is sent from the end ball server 71 (NO in S3229 and NO in S3231), and if the end ball server 71 notifies the normal signal (YES in S3229). , The process ends. Further, when the ball lending machine PT is notified of the abnormal signal from the end ball server 71 (YES in S3231), the ball lending machine PT saves the data in the hall computer 90 and ends the processing (S3233). In this way, by storing the data in the hall computer 90, it is possible to prevent the data from being erased due to an abnormality in communication and to be effective for collation later, so that it is possible to avoid a trouble with the player M.
The personal portable terminal SM ends this process if a normal notice is given from the end ball server 71 (S3261) and returns to the process from the beginning if an abnormal notice is given (NO in S3215). .
The game player M accesses the edge server 71 in advance to download the application software of the personal mobile terminal SM. At that time, at the time of downloading or initial registration, a secret code necessary for accessing the application code 76 or the edge server 71, which is changed to an ID, is registered. In particular, since the application code 76 can be used in place of an ID without registering personal information such as an address, it is possible to register anonymously by registering a personal identification number in order to enhance security, and no troublesome operation is required. For a mobile phone without an IC chip, it is possible to easily register.

Here, the special code creation processing (S3350) described above will be described with reference to FIG. In the special code creation process (S3350), a program to be created in the edge server 71 or the ball lending machine PT is installed, and when a special code creation instruction is issued (S3351), the edge server 71 or the ball lending machine PT. Generates a hexadecimal code generated by random numbers (S3353). Further, the end ball server 71 or the ball lending machine PT also codes the date (S3355). Further, a hexadecimal number generated by a random number and a code obtained by coding the date are added and coded (S3357). Then, the end ball server 71 or the ball lending machine PT creates the special code 75 by these processes, stores it, and ends the processing (S3359).
The special code 75 created in this way can be encrypted by using a random number, and even if it is generated at the same time, the same code does not exist and is a highly secure code. By using the key 75 as a key for verification, the security is enhanced. Further, by mixing the special code 75 with the date data, it is not necessary to separately send the date data, and the processing is speeded up.

<<Process of paying out the end ball by the end ball processing device in the system for amusement hall>>
Using the sequence diagram, the flowchart, the schematic diagram, the explanatory diagram, etc. shown in FIGS. 99 to 105 and FIG. A detailed description will be given centering on the sequence diagram shown in FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of an application end ball payout process when paying out an end ball by application software installed in the personal mobile terminal SM. FIG. 100 and FIG. 101 are flowcharts of the edge server payout processing by the edge server 71. FIG. 102 is a flowchart of the ball lending machine payout processing by the ball lending machine PT. FIG. 103 is a sequence diagram of a process for paying out an end ball. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram when paying out an end ball. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display displayed when the end ball server 71 displayed on the personal mobile terminal SM is accessed.

First, the player M activates the application software of the personal mobile terminal SM (YES in S3271), and the personal mobile terminal SM inquires of the end server 71 for the application code 76 and the personal identification number (S3273). If there is an inquiry for the personal mobile terminal SM (YES in S3291), the end server 71 inquires the application code 76 and the personal identification number (S3293), and if the verification is successful (YES in S3295), the personal mobile terminal. The SM has successfully accessed the end server 71.
The end server 71 reads the stored data from the application code 76 (S3297), and displays the number of accumulated balls held by the player M on the read display screen 871 of the personal mobile terminal SM of the personal mobile terminal SM (S3299). .
The player M operates the reading display screen 871 of the personal mobile terminal SM, selects a store, inputs the unit number, the unit price for payout and the number of payout balls, and the personal mobile terminal SM stores the store code. , The unit number, the ball unit price, and the payout ball number are transmitted to the end ball server 71 (S3277). The oddball server 71 waits until there is a payout instruction (NO in S3301), and if there is a payout instruction from the personal mobile terminal SM as described above (YES in S3301), the oddball server 71 indicates the store code, the table The number, the ball unit price, and the number of paid-out balls are received (S3305), the number of paid-out coins is compared with the number of stored balls in the end-ball server 71 (S3307), and it is confirmed whether the number of coins can be paid out (S3309). If the number of balls to be paid out is not (NO in S3309), a confirmation instruction is issued to the personal mobile terminal SM to confirm the number of balls to be paid out (S3311), and the payout is given to the player M. It is urged that there is an error in the setting of the ball unit price or the number of payout balls. In this way, by prompting the player M to make a mistake, the game hall 1 can reduce troubles with the player M.

If the number of balls that can be paid out (YES in S3309), the end ball server 71 moves to the special code creating process and creates a special code (S3350). The edge server 71 transmits the access code, special code 75, unit price and payout number to the personal mobile terminal SM, and the access code, special code 75, unit price and payout is displayed on the reading display screen 871 of the personal mobile terminal SM. The information display unit 875 is instructed to display information such as the number of balls (S3315).
The personal mobile terminal SM receives the access code, special code 75, ball unit price and payout ball number data from the end ball server 71 (S3281), and the access code, special code 75, ball unit price, and application are displayed on the information display unit 875. The information of the code 76 and the number of payout balls is displayed in a display mode that is difficult to identify at a glance such as QR code (registered trademark) (S3283). As described above, by using the display mode that is difficult to identify at first glance, it is possible to prevent the surrounding game player from stealing, paying off, and paying out the stored end balls.

The player M operates the end ball processing display portion 802h of the ball lending machine PT to display information such as the access code, special code 75, ball unit price, application code 76 and payout ball number displayed on the information display portion 875. As shown at 104, a reading instruction is given to each camera 69 of the ball lending machine PT (YES at S3331).
The ball lending machine PT makes preparations for reading information from each camera 69 (S3333), performs reading (S3335), and waits until the reading of each camera 69 succeeds (NO in S3337). If the reading of the platform camera 69 is successful (YES in S3337), the edge server 71 is automatically accessed by the access code.
The ball lending machine PT transmits the special code 75, the ball unit price, the application code 76, and the number of payout balls, which are read by the cameras 69, to the end ball server 71. If the personal mobile terminal SM succeeds in reading the information of the information display unit 875 from each camera 69, the personal mobile terminal SM ends the process (YES in S3285).
In this way, by utilizing the reading of each camera 69 of the ball lending machine PT, information is transmitted/received to/from the end piece server 71 to enhance the security of communication with other devices, and the game player M plays the game machine. Convenience is high because you can sit down in front of the floor while processing. Further, since the personal mobile terminal SM can be used as long as it is a mobile phone having a camera for capturing information and a function for displaying information, it can be used even for a mobile without an IC chip.

The end ball server 71 waits until information is received from the ball lending machine PT (NO in S3317), and when the information is received (YES in S3317), sets the information of the ball lending machine PT from the personal portable terminal SM. The information is compared and collated (S3319). As a result of the collation, if the information matches (YES in S3321), the end ball server 71 approves the payout to the ball lending machine PT (S3323). The ball lending machine PT, which has been waiting until the payout approval is received (NO in S3341), receives the payout approval (YES in S3341), pays out the ball (S3343), and notifies the end ball server 71 of the completion when the payout is completed. Is transmitted (S3345). The ball lending machine PT displays the number of paid-out balls on the end ball processing display unit 802h (S3347).
When the information does not match as a result of the collation (NO in S3321), the end ball server 71 notifies the ball lending machine PT of the abnormality (S3323), and the ball lending machine PT pays the player M. The processing is terminated by urging that there is an error in the setting of the ball unit price or the number of balls to be paid out. In this way, by prompting the player M to make a mistake, the trouble with the player M can be reduced.
Further, since the number of balls to be paid out is checked by the ball lending machine PT and the end ball server 71 by performing such a check (S3319), even if the player M falsifies the data, the payout is made. Since the number of balls of the game medium does not match, the payout is not made, and the game hall 1 can use the system with enhanced security.

After performing the payout approval to the ball lending machine PT (S3323), the edge ball server 71 updates the data by subtracting the number of balls paid out from the data of the edge ball server 71 (S3325), The completion is notified to the personal mobile terminal SM by e-mail (S3327).
The e-mail sent to the personal mobile terminal SM sends not only the information about the stored amount but also information about registration from the amusement center 1 that manages the stored coins and the institution, and various changes such as operation. You may make an announcement.

The information from the ball lending machine PT is stored in the hall computer 90, and the hall computer 90 replaces the processing of the ball lending machine PT (the processing of S3225 to S3233 and S3339 to S3347). It is also possible to transmit and receive to and from each ball lending machine PT by performing processing (S3225 to S3233, S3339 to S3347).
In this way, the hall computer 90 performs processing in place of the ball lending machine PT, so that not only the transmission/reception with the end ball server 71 becomes faster, but also the security can be enhanced because it is independent from the operation of the player M.
Further, like the face image data 559 from the ball lending machine PT and money sales data, information such as an access code, a special code 75, a ball unit price, an application code 76, and the number of balls to be paid out is a stand computer 93 and an island computer 91. Is transmitted to the hall computer 90 via. By using the same data communication line in this way, it is not necessary to additionally install it later.

Next, an example of the data stored in the edge ball server 71 of the edge ball processing device 70 described above is shown in FIGS. 106 and 107.
In FIG. 106, the data stored in the oddball server 71 shows an oddball server list 72. The “application code” 76 indicates a unique number of application software installed in the personal mobile terminal SM. The “personal identification number” is a number for approval when accessing the end server 71, and the number of payouts paid out from the ball lending machine PT after inquiring about the number of game media held by the player M. Can be set. The “E-mail address” indicates the address of the personal mobile terminal SM of the player M, and is used to send a notification that the registration process or the payout process is completed, a notification that the expiration date or arrival is about to arrive, and business information. It
The “number of coins saved (1 yen)” is the number of balls converted to the lending unit price of 1 yen and stored in the end server 71. The “update date and time” stores the last update date and time, and is the starting date of the expiration date. The "special code" stores the special code 75 at the time of the last processing. The "store code" stores the number of the store when the process was last performed.

FIG. 106 shows an individual-end ball server list 72 showing data for each application code 76 stored in the end-ball server 71.
In addition to the data displayed in the end-table server list 72, the "birth-date of birth" and "visit store history" are described in the individual end-table server list 72. The store visit history stores “year/month”, “date/time”, “number of deposits”, “corner” indicating the rental unit price of the game medium, and “deadline” indicating the deadline state.
In this way, by providing the expiration date, the end server 71 can keep the amount of accumulated data constant. Further, it can be used for management to notify the player M that the expiration date is near by e-mail or the like. The expiration date can be set to a predetermined period.

Although the end ball server 71 is provided outside the game arcade 1 and is connected to the ball lending machine PT using the Internet network E, the end ball server 71 is provided inside the game arcade 1 and connected by the switching hub 7. It may be a small one used.
In addition, although the case where the end ball is stored has been described in the present embodiment, the present system can be applied to a ball storage system in which the storage amount is increased to store the ball acquired by the player M.
The installation of the application software itself of the personal mobile terminal SM, the registration to the edge server 71, the registration of the number of odds, and the series of operations described above on the personal mobile terminal SM are performed by the ball lending machine PT on each unit. , A display of a QR code (registered trademark) displayed on a liquid crystal screen or the like of the ball lending machine or the table information display device K installed in the game hall 1 is read by the camera 872, and the personal portable terminal SM of the personal digital assistant SM is displayed. The application software registration and the above-mentioned payout operation may be automatically performed. With the above configuration, even if the operation of the personal mobile terminal SM is complicated, it becomes possible for anyone to easily perform the operation of registering and paying out the accumulated coins. Alternatively, a seal attached with a QR code (registered trademark) may be read and photographed by the camera 872, and the application software of the personal mobile terminal SM may automatically operate for registration and withdrawal operations.

<Sales analysis system using individual face recognition device>
The details of the data obtained by controlling the individual face authentication device 800 and the hall computer 90 in the game arcade 1 will be described in detail using the cheats and forms shown in FIGS. 109 to 113.
FIG. 109 is a payout chart 650 showing the transition of the difference ball of the gaming machine P and the possessed ball for each individual. FIG. 110 is an individual balance sheet 655 of an individual using the individual face authentication device 800. FIG. 111 is an analysis form 660 for each gaming machine of the gaming machine P, which is aggregated for each individual using the individual face authentication device 800. FIG. 112 is a correction value form 680 for each income and expenditure using the individual face authentication device 800. FIG. 113 is a gaming machine-specific analysis form 670 of gaming machines that are totalized for each individual who uses the individual face authentication device 800 and analyzed based on the correction values.

First, the pay-out ball chart 650 shown in FIG. 109 represents the pay-out balls of the pachinko machines P in the 503's by a pay-out slump graph 651 represented by a line graph. The difference ball indicates the difference between the number of safe balls and the number of out balls, and when it is disclosed to the player M, it shows a value obtained by subtracting the number of out balls from the number of safe balls (difference ball=safe. Number of balls-number of out balls). Therefore, for the player M, if the number of balls acquired is larger than the number of balls used, it is represented by a plus. Although the payout chart 650 shows the figure displayed on the platform information display device K, it may be displayed on the monitor or the form of the hall computer 90, in which case the plus and minus of the display of the difference ball are reversed. It may be displayed on.

In addition, the broken line on the vertical axis shown in the drawing indicates the boundary where people are replaced. In consideration of protection of personal information, the face authentication number 583 (FID006, FID007, FID005, FID004, FID003) and individual mascots (654a to e) are used. The individual mascot 654 may be arbitrarily set, and may be automatically determined by the platform information display device K or the individual face authentication device 80 and displayed in consideration of personal information. The personalized mascot 654 may represent gender or age by changing the background color, mascot, etc. By displaying whether it is popular with men or women, future pedestals can be replaced. It can also be used as an index.

A positive balance chart 652 derived from the horizontal dotted lines of points A to D is shown. The plus balance chart 652 starts from the state of 0 from the point A, enters the minus area until there is a big hit, etc., the point B represents the minimum number of balls, and the point C is The maximum number of balls held is shown, and point D shows the state of balls held at the end. The plus balance chart 652 is represented by a white bar graph for the individuals of FID006, FID005, and FID004, indicating that the balance is positive.
Further, a minus balance chart 653 derived from a horizontal dotted line of points E to H is shown. The minus balance chart 653 starts from the state of the point E to 0, and shows the maximum number of balls with a big hit at the point F. In addition, although the number of balls used is large due to a big hit or the like, and the number of balls used is large, the point G represents the minimum number of balls held, and the point H is the number of balls held at the end. Although the state is shown, the number of used balls is more negative. The minus balance chart 653 is represented by a hatched black bar graph for individuals of FID007 and FID003, and shows that the balance is negative.

With the above configuration, since it is possible to check at a glance whether each game has a negative balance or a positive balance as a result of each game, the player M or the gaming hall 1 can immediately determine the state of the gaming machine. Moreover, since individual results can be confirmed while considering protection of personal information, it can be used as an index for the player M to play with peace of mind.
Further, FIG. 110 shows an example of an individual balance sheet 655 in which the hall computer 90 aggregates individual information. The personal balance sheet 655 shows the time slot in which the game player M played the game, the machine machine number, and the balance.

Next, FIG. 111 shows an analysis form 660 for each gaming machine. In the gaming machine-specific analysis form 660, daily columns are provided in the vertical columns in the upper column, and the horizontal columns are arranged for each game player M represented by the face authentication number 583. In addition, information is displayed in each column for each player M and for each day.
The information indicates that, for example, the player M whose face authentication number 583 is represented by FID004 indicates “+”, which is a positive balance in the balance result column 662 in the 503s on May 6, and the correction value column 661. Since there is no previous data in, "1" is shown. On May 7, the balance result column 662 shows a minus balance “Δ”, and the correction value column 661 shows “0.8” because the previous day, which is the previous time, is a plus balance. The game player M of FID004 enjoyed the game, but the last time was a positive balance, and therefore the balance shows a large effect, so 0.2 points are reduced and points are given. On the contrary, since the balance result column 662 on May 7 has a negative balance “Δ”, the correction value column 661 on May 8 shows “1.2”. In this way, the last time was a negative balance, and by playing while having an impression that the balance is not good, it is considered that this pachinko machine P is an interesting game machine, so add 0.2 points to the point It is possible to confirm the interest of the gaming machine without being affected by the balance of payment. Therefore, the gaming machine can be evaluated by these indexes, and it can be used as an index for the replacement of a new gaming machine or the timing of disposing of an existing gaming machine to a used table.

In particular, the FID007 player M is playing the pachinko machines P in the 503's even if the negative balance continues, and since he/she recognizes that he/she is more entertaining than the other players M, the point is “5.8. It is high. As described above, not only the game player M but also the game arcade 1 can understand that the game machine has an interest, so that it is possible to allow the game player M to play a game as an entertainment machine while making a sufficient profit. Therefore, it can be used as an index of how much profit can be returned to the player.

Next, as another example of analysis method, the gaming machine-specific analysis form 670 is shown in FIG. 113, and the correction value form 680, which is a list of correction values when the gaming machine-specific analysis form 670 is calculated, is shown in FIG.
The correction value form 680 has different points given according to the balance of the number of balls acquired or used. In the case of a positive balance, the points to be given are described in the positive balance correction value column 681. "0.97" is given from 0 to +2500, and "0.94" is given from +2501 to +5000. , +5001 to +7500 are given "0.91", +7501 to +10000 are given "0.88", and +15000 or more are given "0.80", which is a point subtracted from 1.
In the case of a negative balance, the points to be given are described in the negative balance correction value column 682, "1.03" is given from 0 to -2500, and "1.06" from -2501 to -5000. Is given, “1.09” is given to −5001 to −7500, “1.12” is given to −7501 to −10000, and “1.12” is given to −10001 to −15000. However, for -15000 or less, points in which "1.20" is added to 1 are given.
In this way, by providing correction values at a plurality of stages and giving points, it is possible to perform a detailed analysis, and the taste of an individual can be analyzed more finely. In addition, this information can be used as an indicator of the timing of replacing a new machine or disposing of an existing game machine into a second-hand machine by adding the above-mentioned tendency by gender and age, as well as the area of the store. Gender trends can also be analyzed.

Next, an analysis form 670 for each gaming machine using this correction value form 680 is shown in FIG. In the gaming machine-specific analysis form 670, columns for each day are provided in the vertical columns in the upper column, and the horizontal columns are arranged for each game player M represented by the face authentication number 583. In addition, information is displayed in each column for each player M and for each day.
For example, the player M whose face authentication number 583 is represented by FID004 indicates the number of balls of “+3300” which is a positive balance in the balance result column 671 in the 503 series on May 6, and the information is corrected. Since there is no previous data in the value column 662, “1” is shown. On May 7, the number of balls of "-6110", which is a negative balance, is shown in the balance result column 671, and the correction value column 672 is "0" because the previous day, which is the previous day, is a positive balance of "+3300". .94” is shown. The player M of FID004 enjoys playing the game, but has a positive balance in the previous time, and since the influence of the balance is large, it is reduced by 1 to 0.06 points to give "0.94" points. On the contrary, since the balance result column 662 on May 7 has a negative balance "-6110", the correction value column 672 on May 8 adds 1 to 0.09 points to "1". .09”.

In this way, the pachinko machine P is considered to be an entertaining gaming machine by playing while having an impression that the balance is negative and the balance is not very good, so points are added by 0.09 points and added. By doing so, it is possible to confirm the interest of the gaming machine without being affected by the balance. Therefore, the gaming machine can be evaluated by using these indexes, and it can be used as an index of the timing of replacing a new machine or disposing of the existing game machine to a used machine. Further, if the correction value has a large positive balance, the influence of the balance increases. Therefore, by reducing the points, it is possible to evaluate the interest of the pachinko machine itself in consideration of the influence of the balance. On the contrary, if the negative balance is large, it can be understood that the game machine is playing the game machine even if it is affected by the negative balance, and the game machine is an entertaining game machine. Therefore, by adding points according to the number of balls with a negative balance or a positive balance and awarding points, the interest of the gaming machine becomes clearer.

Further, as shown in the gaming machine-specific analysis form 670 of FIG. 113, it is possible to grasp the total number of players M and the total number of times per person who have played the 503's pachinko machines P in a certain period, and the total number of times per day can be grasped. The total number of players and the number of games played can also be grasped. Although these are described for each day, it is possible to analyze how many times an individual has played a game in one day from the individual income and expenditure form shown in FIG. 110. Therefore, even during a short period or a long period, it is possible to analyze the gaming machine using such a correction value.
Although the correction value and the like are given as points, they may be expressed as the number of times. Further, the correction value represents reduction or addition in the range of “0.2”, but this range is not limited and may be any correction value within a range in which the interest of the gaming machine can be analyzed. Further, not only the number of times, other game machine related information may be used to give points, and the correction value is not limited to income and expenditure, and other game machine related information such as the number of starts may be used. good.

<Control of intruder monitoring system>
The manner in which control is performed when detecting and notifying an intruder in the game arcade 1 will be described in detail with reference to the flowcharts, schematic diagrams, explanatory diagrams, etc. shown in FIGS. 114 to 132.
The intruder monitoring system is a system for monitoring an intruder at times other than during business hours, and is often used especially at night. The monitoring camera system 60 mainly controls the monitoring cameras 61 and the individual cameras 61 as appropriate. It consists of a system to select and control. A nighttime monitoring system 860, which will be described later, is a system that monitors the opening/closing of the gaming machine by the battery BA at a time other than during business hours, especially at nighttime in consideration of energy saving. The representative systems will be described below.

<<Control of intruder surveillance system by surveillance camera>>
First, a mode in which control is performed by the surveillance camera system 60 when detecting an intruder in the game arcade 1 will be described in detail with reference to schematic diagrams or explanatory diagrams shown in FIGS. 114 to 118.
FIG. 114 is a schematic view of the arrangement of the surveillance camera 61 in operation in the intruder surveillance system. FIG. 1115 is a schematic view of the arrangement of the monitoring camera 61 in which the intrusion monitoring system is operating in the intruder monitoring system. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing an image pickup position list 881 indicating the positions taken by the surveillance camera 61 in the intruder surveillance system. FIG. 117 is a schematic diagram showing a state of a monitor 882 connected to the surveillance camera system 60 in the intruder surveillance system. FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram showing a recording area 883 of the recording device provided in the intrusion monitoring system.
The surveillance camera system 60 has surveillance cameras 61 (A to Q) provided above the position of the passage in the game area 3 of the game arcade 1, and as shown in FIG. The surveillance cameras 61 (A to Q) constantly take images of the gamers M who are playing a game or equipment equipment such as a counter JC, and record their images. The employee confirms the video imaged by each surveillance camera 61 (A to Q) on the monitor 882 shown in FIG. 117(A) connected to the camera surveillance system 60 in the management area 2 (FIG. 1), It monitors whether there are human troubles or troubles in equipment such as safes (GB1 and GB2) including game machines.

Next, the control for monitoring the intruder especially at night after the player M is not present except during business will be described.
The surveillance camera system 60 is a doorway (EX1 to EX5) or a safe box (GB1 and GB1) which is an entrance and exit to the game arcade 1 which is considered to be an entrance passage for imaging the intruder MF after the player M disappears. The setting positions of the monitoring cameras 61 (A to J and P and Q) are switched to image the location where the gold products of GB2) and the acceptance counter UK are stored. Further, the surveillance cameras 61 (K to O) in the game area 3 enter the power saving mode to stop the image capturing and recording, and save energy.

FIG. 116 shows an image pickup position list 881 showing changes in the positions of the surveillance cameras 61 (A to J and P and Q) which are periodically imaged so as not to miss an intruding portion and to have no blind spots. There is. The positions taken by the surveillance cameras 61 (A to J and P and Q) are changed from a and b in FIG. For example, the surveillance cameras 61A and P first image the in-store entrance EX2, and after about a predetermined time of about 10 minutes, image the in-store entrance EX3. Then, in a and b of FIG. 116, all imaging positions are designated so that there is no leakage at the desired position. Since the monitoring camera system 60 can change the imaging angle of the designated imaging position by switching the monitoring cameras 61 (A to J and P and Q), the image can be recorded without any blind spot. Can be recorded. Further, since it can be changed according to the object to be imaged during the business and during non-business, it is possible to variously change the position where the single monitoring camera 61 captures an image.
The surveillance camera 61 may have a structure in which a driving mechanism for driving a lens such as pan/tilt or zoom is provided, or may be a system for performing wide-angle imaging by a wide-angle lens and monitoring by image processing.

117 and 118 describe the processing when the surveillance camera 61 (K to O) is in the power saving mode.
In FIG. 117, a monitor 882 connected to the surveillance camera system 60 is displayed. FIG. 117(A) shows a state of display on the monitor 882 during business hours, and images captured by the nine monitoring cameras 61 (A to C, F to H, and K to L) are displayed in 9 divisions. (A1 to A9). In FIG. 117(B), when the surveillance cameras 61 (K to O) are in the power saving mode, the images captured by the six surveillance cameras 61 (A to C and F to H) are displayed in 6 divisions. (A1-A3 and A7-A9). In FIG. 117(B), since the monitoring camera 61 (K to O) is in the power saving mode, the monitor 882 is operating in the display area (A4 to A6) of the monitoring camera 61 (K to O). The state is assigned to the cameras 61 (A to C and F to H) (A1 to A3 and A7 to A9). Therefore, the display area of the monitor 882 is enlarged and displayed so that details can be easily seen. Further, in another example, the display area (A1 to A9) may be divided into nine parts as it is, and the other monitoring cameras 61 (C to E) may be displayed by being interrupted, which can be displayed at one time. The number of surveillance cameras 61 can be increased.

FIG. 118(A) shows a recording area 883 of the recording device provided in the surveillance camera system 60, and the recording area 884 records the image captured by the surveillance camera 61A. The recording area 885 records the image captured by the surveillance camera 61K. The recording area 886 records an image captured by the surveillance camera 61F.
FIG. 118(B) allocates the recording area 883 to other operating monitoring cameras 61 (A to C and F to H) when the monitoring cameras 61 (K to O) are in the power saving mode. This is how it looks. The recording areas 887 and 889 are areas in which the images captured by the surveillance cameras 61A and 61F are recorded, but the recording capacity is expanded. Therefore, by allocating the capacity of the surveillance camera 61 (K to O) in the standby state, the recording capacity is expanded, and it is possible to sufficiently secure the recording capacity corresponding to an intruder. In another example, the recording area 883 is allocated to the other surveillance cameras 61 (A to C and F to H) as it is, so that the recording capacity of each surveillance camera 61 is increased and the recording capacity is insufficient. It is possible to monitor by the monitoring camera 61 even during the time when the employee is not present. Further, even if it is desired to confirm the recording later, the recording capacity is not used unnecessarily, so that the recorded data can be stored for a long time by maximizing the recording capacity.
In addition to the surveillance camera 61, each camera 69 can be appropriately selected and used.

<<Control of intruder monitoring system by each camera>>
Next, the manner in which the surveillance camera system 60 and each camera 69 perform control when detecting an intruder in the game hall 1 is a flowchart, a schematic diagram, an explanatory diagram, or the like shown in FIGS. 119 to 125 and 128. Will be described in detail.
FIG. 119 shows a system diagram of a power supply line for a game machine and facility equipment. FIG. 120 shows a transition diagram of control modes in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 121 is a flowchart of nighttime monitoring mode processing in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of the reproduction mode process in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 123 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the focus position of each camera 69 in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 124 is a conceptual diagram showing how the intrusion monitoring system catches an intruder. FIG. 125 is a conceptual diagram showing how the intrusion monitoring system catches an intruder. FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a recorded image is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the platform information display device K in the intrusion monitoring system.

FIG. 119 shows a system diagram of a power supply line for a game machine and facility equipment. A power line 863 to the pachinko machine P and the platform information display device K and a power line 865 to the ball lending machine PT are provided separately. At the end of the island facility HS, a power distribution facility DT for switching ON/OFF of each power supply line (863, 865) is provided. The power distribution facility DT is provided with a power distribution board DL1 and a power distribution board DL2 for each supply target, and supplies 100 VAC to each device. AC100V supplied from the power supply line 863 connected to the switchboard DL1 is transformed by the transformer TR, and the transformed AC24V is supplied to the pachinko machine P and the platform information display device K. Further, AC 100V supplied from the power supply line 865 connected to the switchboard DL1 is supplied to the ball lending machine PT equipped with each camera 69.

By separately providing the power distribution board DL1 and the power distribution board DL2, only the ball lending machine PT used as a surveillance camera can be supplied with power in the night monitoring mode, and a power line not required for the night surveillance mode of the pachinko machine P or the like can be provided. Energy saving can be realized by setting the line off.
In addition, the switchboard DL1 provided at the island edge is provided with one on/off switch for one gaming machine such as a pachinko machine P, so that the switch can be switched independently when a new machine is replaced, at the time of failure, at the time of inspection, or at an event. It can be turned on and off, increasing convenience.

As shown in the flow chart of the state of FIG. 120, the surveillance camera system 60 including the ball lending machine PT provided with each camera 69 has the above-mentioned normal business mode S2000 (processing of the individual face authentication device 800) and night surveillance mode. The processing is switched between S3370 and the reproduction mode S3380, and it is possible to appropriately or selectively switch the processing depending on the target to be monitored and the reproduction processing.

As shown in FIGS. 121 to 125 and 128, when the processing shifts to the night monitoring mode, night monitoring mode processing S3370 is executed. First, the standby state is entered, and as shown in FIG. 124, the individual cameras 69 on both ends of the island facility HS among the individual monitoring cameras 69 are activated, and the other individual cameras 69 are placed in a standby state (S3371). This makes it possible to detect the intruder MF by operating only the cameras 69 on both ends of the island facility HS, while realizing the energy saving and the intrusion passage to the game area 3 accurately.
As shown in FIG. 123(A), in the business mode (S2000), the focus position 892 of each camera 69 captures the vicinity of the center of the chair C on which the player sits, that is, the face of the player M. ing. However, as shown in FIG. 123(B), when the process shifts to the nighttime monitoring mode process, at least the individual cameras 69 on both ends of the island facility HS switch the focus position 893 of each individual camera 69 to the passage center side (S3372). . Further, at that time, the focus is changed during non-business hours such as changing the lens to a wide angle or changing the viewpoint to a wide angle in order to capture a wide range of objects to be photographed, and the intruder MF can be imaged as much as possible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124, each camera 69 of the ball lending machines (PT1, PT2, PT3, and PT4) installed at both ends of the island facility HS does not capture or record until the intruder MF appears. Then, the moving object detection mode is set (S3373). In the moving body detection mode, this state is maintained until a moving object such as an intruder MF is captured by each camera (NO in S3374).
If a moving object such as an intruder MF is captured by each camera (YES in S3374), the mode is shifted to the recording mode (S3375). In the recording mode, not only the cameras 69 of the ball lending machines PT1 and PT2 in the passage where the moving body is detected, but also the cameras 69 of all the units and the cameras 69 of all the units in the passage where the moving body is detected are detected. You may shift to the state of imaging and recording. Further, as shown in FIG. 125, each camera 69 of the ball lending machine PT5 installed in the pachinko machine P with the pachinko machine P opened and closed, and the ball installed on the opposite side of the pachinko machine P opened and closed. Imaging and recording of several lending machines PT6, PT7, PT8. This is to enable the intruder MF to be accurately captured while minimizing the number of cameras 69 for each unit.

Then, if the moving body of the intruder MF or the like is detected, the nighttime flag is set (S3376), and the process ends. After the end, when the mode is switched, the mode is changed to the reproduction mode and the reproduction mode process is executed (S3380).
The reproduction mode process S3380 determines whether or not the surveillance camera system 60 including the ball lending machine PT has the night flag (S3381). If there is no night flag (NO in S3381), the reproduction mode process S3380 ends. If there is a nighttime flag (YES in S3381), the monitoring camera system 60 including the ball lending machine PT transmits the image recording information captured to the platform information display device K as shown in FIG. 128 (S3383). As shown in FIG. 128, on the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the platform information display device K, a state where the intruder MF enters the passage between the island facilities HS and approaches the pachinko machine is reproduced based on the received recording information ( S3384).
In this way, the image captured by each camera 69 of the ball lending machine PT is reproduced by the table information display device K provided in the vicinity of each camera 69 installed in the passage where the intruder MF enters. Therefore, the image to be reproduced differs depending on the position of each camera 69, and it is possible to analyze what happened at night while reproducing it as if the user was watching it on the spot. Further, by using a large liquid crystal monitor or the like for the liquid crystal display screen 891, the state can be confirmed at a glance. In addition, the reproduction between the platform information display devices K can be reproduced at the same time by reproducing in the same manner, and the state of the site can be reproduced as it is.

<<Control of system that uses battery to detect opening/closing of game machine at night>>
Next, a mode in which control is performed when the opening/closing of the gaming machine is detected by the night-time monitoring system 860 using the battery BA will be described in detail with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 126 to 132, a schematic diagram or explanatory diagrams, and the like. To do.
FIG. 126 is a flowchart of nighttime monitoring mode 2 processing in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 127 shows a systematic diagram of a power supply line to the game machine and the island facility HS. FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a recorded image is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the platform information display device K in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 129 shows a configuration diagram of the nighttime monitoring system 860 in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 130 is a conceptual diagram showing how the nighttime monitoring system in the intrusion monitoring system catches an intruder. FIG. 126 is a time chart regarding recording by each camera 69 of the night surveillance system in the intrusion surveillance system. FIG. 132 is a flowchart of power supply abnormality processing in the intrusion monitoring system.
First, the configuration of the nighttime monitoring system 860 will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 129. The night-time monitoring system 860 is used as an energy-saving system for detecting whether a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine P or the like is illegally opened or closed by using the battery BA, especially during nighttime, other than during business hours.
The ball lending machine PT in which each camera 69 is installed is operated by being supplied with AC100V as described above during normal business, but each camera 69 is DC5V from the power supply unit built in the ball lending machine PT. Alternatively, DC12V is supplied and driven.

When the night-time monitoring system 860 is operating, the supply of AC100V from the above-described power distribution equipment DT (FIG. 119) to the ball lending machine PT and the pachinko machine P is stopped. Therefore, power is not supplied to each camera 69 due to energy saving.
However, the night monitoring system 860 is supplied with DC 12V or DC 5V from the battery BA in order to detect whether or not a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine P has been illegally opened or closed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 127, two night monitoring devices 868 each having a battery BA mounted on the island facility HS are provided. As described above, in order to monitor the passage between the island facilities HS, one battery BA supplies power to the individual monitoring cameras 69 provided in the ball lending machine PT that faces the island power supply wiring 877 through the ceiling. Is being supplied. In this way, the night-time monitoring device 868 is configured with the group of the cameras 69 facing each other as one system.

As shown in FIG. 129, the night-time monitoring system 860 includes a night-time monitoring device 868, a pachinko machine P that is a game machine, a ball lending machine PT equipped with each camera 69, and a night opening/closing sensor 864.
As described above, during normal business hours, the AC 100V is supplied from the switchboard DL1, the transformer TR transforms it to AC 24V, and the pachinko machine P, which is a gaming machine, is supplied with power. In addition, AC100V power is supplied to the ball lending machine PT from the switchboard DL2.

The nighttime monitoring device 868 is supplied with AC100V from the switchboard DL1 during normal business hours, converts AC100V into DC12V or 5V by the AC-DC converter 870, and charges the battery BA by the charging circuit 871. The charging circuit 871 is configured with a diode for preventing backflow and a circuit that prevents overcharging and overdischarging, and always performs charging/discharging according to the capacity and voltage of the battery BA. The night-time monitoring control circuit 873 connected to the battery BA stops the control during normal business, that is, while detecting the voltage from the AC-DC converter 870, and if the supply of AC100V at night is stopped, It operates by the power source supplied from the battery BA.

While the night-time monitoring control circuit 873 is operating, the night-time opening/closing sensor 864 detects whether the pachinko machine P is opened or closed. The night open/close sensor 864 uses a switching contact, and the night monitoring control circuit 873 energizes the DC power supply of the battery BA from the sensor terminal board 879. When the night-time opening/closing sensor 864 operates, the night-time monitoring control circuit 873 sends a camera to each camera 69 of the ball lending machine PT connected to the pachinko machine P provided with the energized night-time opening/closing sensor 864. DC power for the battery BA is directly supplied from the terminal board 875 through the battery wiring 877. Further, each camera 69 records the imaged data on an SD card or HDD (855 in FIG. 68).

Next, the control of the nighttime monitoring system 860 will be described. The nighttime monitoring mode 2 process (S3390) shown in FIG. 126 will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 132.
The night-time monitoring system 860 does not operate while detecting the voltage from the AC-DC converter 870 that converts the power supplied from the switchboard DL2 as described above (NO in S3391). When the voltage from the AC-DC converter 870 is decreasing, it is determined whether the voltage is less than 5V DC, for example, and when the nighttime monitoring control circuit 873 determines that the power supply line is OFF (YES in S3391), the nighttime is determined. The program of the monitoring control circuit 873 starts night monitoring control (S3392). The night-time monitoring control circuit 873 waits until the signal from the above-mentioned night-time opening/closing sensor 864 is sent, that is, until the opening/closing of the pachinko machine P is detected (NO in S3393).

The night-time monitoring control circuit 873 is provided in the vicinity of the pachinko machine P when the signal from the above-mentioned night-time opening/closing sensor 864 is transmitted, that is, the intruder MF illegally opens the pachinko machine P's door. When the opening/closing sensor 864 for detection detects (YES in S3393), the night-time monitoring control circuit 873 stores the unit number and the first flag of the pachinko machine P in which the opening/closing sensor 864 for night detected door opening (S3394). . Then, the night-time monitoring control circuit 873 directs the camera terminal board 875 to the DC of the battery BA to each camera 69 of the ball lending machine PT connected to the pachinko machine P provided with the energized night-time opening/closing sensor 864. Power is directly supplied through the battery wiring 877 (S3395). Each camera 69 records the captured data. By using the battery BA, it is possible to effectively use electricity stored in the daytime, so that it is possible to save energy. Each camera 69 switches the focus position 893 to the center of the passage to pick up an image as described above. In addition, each camera 69 may switch the position so as to automatically track the intruder MF and capture an image.

After that, the timer of the night-time monitoring control circuit 873 is activated (SS3396), and after a predetermined time, for example, about 5 seconds has elapsed (YES in S3397), the night-time monitoring control circuit 873 causes all the units facing the passage as shown in FIG. DC power of the battery BA is directly supplied from the camera terminal board 875 to each camera 69 via the battery wiring 877 (S3398). By operating the timer, the time for recording the first flag can be secured without malfunction. Since the first flag is reliably set in this way, it becomes possible to distinguish and identify which gaming machine was opened and closed at night during inspection in the morning, as will be described later.
Then, the controller 834 (FIG. 68) of each camera 69 records the captured image and, at the same time, determines that the power supply line is different from the normal time and stores the night flag as ON (S3399).

FIG. 131 shows a time chart regarding recording by each camera 69 of the night monitoring system 860.
When the AC100V power supply line 865 supplied from the switchboard DL2 is turned off, the control of the nighttime monitoring control circuit 873 is started. Then, when the door open is detected as described above, the night-time monitoring control circuit 873 supplies power to each camera 69 detected by the power supply A of the battery BA through the battery wiring 877. After a lapse of a predetermined time, DC power is supplied from the camera terminal board 875 to all the cameras 69 connected to the power source B of the battery BA. Each unit camera 69 starts recording at the same time when DC power is supplied.
Here, the battery BA may have a design in which all the connected cameras 69 do not have the capacity to operate until morning, and the charged capacity of the battery BA is exhausted, so that the DC power supply is not naturally supplied. When 80% of the rated voltage of each camera 69 and the recording function is cut off, recording is stopped and stored in the HDD or SD card. Then, the power is turned off while the overwrite control is ON. Then, when the AC100V power line 865 is turned on in the morning or the like, it is detected that the overwrite control is turned on at the initial start-up, and the recorded data stored in the HDD or SD card is prohibited from being overwritten. Next, the recorded data is saved. Therefore, there is no concern that the recorded contents will be erased, and it is possible to confirm the event that occurred in the field by reproducing the recorded image even afterwards.

Next, processing in the morning when the AC100V power supply line 865 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. Until the employee turns on the power of the switchboard DL2 in the morning, the nighttime monitoring control circuit 873 cannot operate when the battery BA has no capacity (SS3401 N0). Then, when AC 100 V is supplied to the power supply line 865, the night-time monitoring control circuit 873 detects the energization of the power supply from the AC-DC converter 870 (YES in S3401) until the battery BA is sufficiently charged. Checks the presence of the first flag using the power from the AC-DC converter 870, and blinks the call lamp of the platform information display device K for which the first flag is set (S3403). If an employee is informed that an abnormality has occurred by blinking a calling lamp, and if the nighttime flag is present in the recorded data of each unit camera 69, the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the unit information display device K is displayed as shown in FIG. A state in which the intruder MF enters the passage between the island facilities HS and approaches the pachinko machine P is reproduced based on the received recording information (S3380).
Further, the calling lamp of the platform information display device K is blinked until confirmation by the employee (S3403), and the recording information is reproduced on the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the platform information display device K (S3380), and the processing is repeated (S3405). NO). If the employee cancels the notification of the power supply abnormality by the battery BA of the nighttime monitoring device 868, the power supply abnormality processing (S3400) ends.

As described above, in the present invention, the battery BA charged in the daytime is used for nighttime monitoring, which leads to energy saving. Also, especially in the case of night surveillance, if there is a P gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that has been opened and closed, 69 power is supplied to each camera and the state of the intruder is accurately grasped to start recording, and the pachinko machine is operated. Imaging and recording are performed only in the abnormal state of opening and closing the machine P, which is useful for energy saving. Further, not only the door opening/closing abnormality but also the power supply of the battery BA not normally used causes an abnormality, so that the abnormality at night can be detected.
Although all the individual cameras 69 facing the passage were operated, as shown in FIG. 125, by operating only the individual cameras 69 facing the pachinko machine P whose opening/closing was detected, the imaging was performed. It is possible to secure a long time or a long recording time and contribute to energy saving.

The surveillance camera 61 and each camera 69 are provided with an infrared camera, and by performing image processing at the time of reproduction or recording, a person or the like can be recognized and imaged and reproduced even at night. Has been done.

<Configuration and control of immobilization detection system>
Regarding the configuration and control of the immobilization detection system 920 that detects when each camera 69 in the game arcade 1 is immobilized, refer to the flowcharts, sequence diagrams, schematic diagrams, explanatory diagrams, etc. shown in FIGS. 133 to 142. Will be described in detail. The same components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

<<Configuration of immobilization detection system>>
FIG. 133 is an explanatory view showing a partially enlarged plan view of each camera 69 in the immobilization detection system 920.
The immobilization detection system 920 as the immobilization detection means of each camera 69 in the game hall system is mainly a surveillance camera 61, each camera 69 provided in the ball lending machine PT, the surveillance camera system 60 and an individual face. The authentication device 800 includes a face authentication server 820. The immobilization detection server 66 connected to the surveillance camera system 60 includes the surveillance camera 61, each camera 69 provided in the ball lending machine PT, the face recognition server 820 provided in the surveillance camera system 60 and the individual face recognition device 800. Have control.

In the present embodiment, each platform camera 69 is provided in the ball lending machine PT (FIG. 67), but the position at which each platform camera 69 is installed is not particularly limited and may be the platform information display device K. As shown in FIG. 133, the front surface of each camera 69 is a dark smoke resin of a half mirror as a first semi-transmissive means so that the player M is not aware that each camera 69 is installed. It is covered by the formed first front cover 837. Further, the left side surface of the camera housing 839 is also covered with a second front cover 838 made of a dark smoke resin of a half mirror as a second semi-transmissive means. The second front cover 838 is a see-through window for picking up the player M on the left side with each camera 69. The second front cover 838 takes an image in place of the left adjacent camera 69 when the front adjacent camera 69 is broken or the front surface of the left camera 69 is blocked by a mischief or the like described later. It becomes a see-through window for.

Thus, even if the position of the lens 836 is switched by covering with the two front covers 837 and 838 of each camera 69, the position of the lens 836 of each camera 69 can be switched without being known to the player M. Since this is possible, it becomes easier for the player M to collect data. Further, by using the first and second semi-transmissive means, it becomes difficult for the player M to know that each camera 69 is installed.

Further, although the first and second front covers 837 and 838 have been described as half mirrors, they are not particularly limited, and may be formed of mesh-shaped metal or resin, and when the camera is installed. It may be hard to recognize.
Further, when the present invention is used, it is possible to detect that the front surface of the camera is covered by mischief or the like. Therefore, the first and second front covers 837 and 838 are formed of transparent resin or the like, and the camera is installed. It may be installed in a state where it is understood that it is done.

In addition, since each camera 69 can perform pan/tilt/zoom operations by the drive unit 835 including the lens 836, the subject or the focus can be changed.
FIG. 133(A) shows the camera position A of each unit camera 69, and images the game player M who is playing the gaming machine at the same unit number with the unit number. The camera position A is set as an initial value. FIG. 133(B) shows the camera position B of each camera 69, and images the player M as the subject MH playing the game machine on the left side. As for the camera position B, when a blackout signal 921 is sent from the left side, each camera 69 can switch the image capturing position if the image capturing condition is satisfied. The camera position B may face left or even right, and can be changed depending on the position of the subject MH.
Although each type of camera 69 of the present invention uses a type of camera that switches the image capturing position to the left or right, it is not particularly limited and may be a wide-angle lens or a camera having a field of view of 360 degrees. Further, it is possible to perform control such as determination and detection by image processing without switching the camera position.

<<Blackout detection method>>
Detection of a blackout will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 136.
FIG. 134 is a selection field 844 displayed item by item when the blackout detection means 932 of the immobilization detection system 920 selects a method for detecting a blackout. FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram of a blackout detection method. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram of a blackout detection method.

The blackout detection means 932 of the deactivation detection system 920 is built in the ROM 851 (FIG. 68) by the CPU 850 (FIG. 68) of each camera 69 and has an application corresponding to the detection method.
The detection method A detects the distance to the subject MH or the obstacle 842, as shown in FIG. Normally, the detection distance from the lens 836 to the subject MH is L3 (range of 50 cm to 100 cm). To L2 (range of 5 cm to 10 cm), and when the obstacle 842b is attached to the first front cover 837, the detection distance from the lens 836 to the obstacle 842 is L1 (3 cm). The detection distance is in the range of up to 5 cm.

Each camera 69 detects a blackout according to the distance to the obstacles 842a and 842b. For the distance measurement, the phase difference of the focus of the camera, an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, etc. can be used. In this way, not only when the obstacle 842 is in close contact, but also when the obstacle 842a is placed slightly apart, such as when the obstacle 842 is installed in a floating state without being brought close to it, it is possible to detect the obstacle 842a.
The detection distance can be changed in setting and is not particularly limited. However, the blackout detection means 932 is most preferably detected under the condition that the obstacles 842a and 842b are within the range of 3 cm to 10 cm.

In detection method B, as shown in FIGS. 135(B-1) and 135(B-2), each camera 69 determines that the camera 69 is blackout based on the detection based on the difference in the light amount between the normal time and the obstacle 842.
As shown in FIG. 135(B-1), the normal light amount is X1, but the front surface of the lens 836 is blocked by the obstacle 842c, and the light amount is as small as X2 as shown in FIG. 135(B-1). Become. Therefore, each camera 69 makes a determination when the difference between X1 and X2 is greater than or equal to a predetermined amount. The amount of light is expressed in lumens (lm·s) and may be measured by illuminance expressed in lux (lx). As a method of measuring the amount of light and illuminance, there is a method of detecting with each camera 69 by a CCD camera, a method of detecting with a luminance meter or an illuminance meter, and the like.
As described above, when the detection is performed based on the amount of light, the determination can be made regardless of the shape or size of the obstacle 842c, and therefore it is effective regardless of the shape.

As shown in FIG. 136(A), the detection method C-1 detects an image 841 accompanied by the face image data 605 in which each platform camera 69 identifies the face by the face authentication engine when the subject MH is imaged in the normal state. To do. However, as shown in FIG. 136(B), each camera 69 detects an image 841a covered with an obstacle 842, and 70% or more of the images are detected by the image processing of the face authentication engine of the individual face authentication device 800. When the area of the area is covered with the monochromatic or multicolored obstacle 842d, it is determined to be a blackout.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 136(C), each camera 69 detects the image 841b covered with the obstacle 842e, and even if the subject MH is partially covered and the subject MH is hidden, When the area of 70% or more of the image is covered with the monochromatic or multicolored obstacle 842 by the image processing of the face authentication engine, it is determined to be a blackout.

In addition, the detection method C-2 determines when the moving body detection of each camera 69 is not functioning for a certain period of time. The detection process employs the detection method C-1, and the determination is made when the motion detection of each camera 69 is not functioning for a certain period of time. When a person is being imaged, the person's movement is captured, and there is no movement for a certain period of time during business. This is the case when it is blocked by the object 842 or when each of the cameras 69 is out of order. Therefore, the blackout detection means 932 determines whether the front surface of each camera 69 is blocked by the obstacle 842 or the failure of each camera 69 by determining when the moving object detection is not functioning for a certain period of time. It can be detected quickly.

In the detection method D, each unit camera 69 uses the face authentication engine of each unit camera 69 to identify the face of the player M, but the face data 605 is found despite the operation of the gaming machine. If it is not specified, it is judged as a blackout.
To detect whether the gaming machine is operating, whether or not there is a count of the out ball signal as described above, the sales signal from the ball lending machine PT, the number of starts and the safe ball number of the gaming machine are detected. There is also a way to detect if there is a payout.
The detection method D is effective as a detection method because it can be determined irrespective of the shape or state of the obstacle 842, and can detect even a failure of each camera 69.
As described above, the blackout detection unit 932 has been described up to the detection methods A to D, but it may be selectively used, or the detection methods A to D may be used in combination at the same time.

<<Control of immobilization detection system>>
The control of the immobilization detection system 920 will be described with reference to the flowcharts and sequence diagrams of FIGS. 137 to 142.
FIG. 137 is a schematic view showing an enlarged plane of a part of the island facility HS in the immobilization detection system 920. FIG. 138 is a flowchart of blackout detection processing in the immobilization detection system 920. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of the blindfold countermeasure process in the immobilization detection system 920. FIG. 140 is a sequence diagram of the immobilization detection system 920. FIG. 141 is a time chart of each camera 69 in the immobilization detection system 920. FIG. 142 is a time chart in the immobilization detection system 920.

First, the blackout detection processing (S3410) shown in FIGS. 138 and 140 will be described. Each camera 69H detects whether the front surface of each camera 69H is covered for a predetermined time (TB) (S3411). It is considered that the predetermined time (TB) is optimal for about 1 to 2 minutes in consideration of a malfunction, merely touching the front surface of each camera 69 with a hand, and preparation for carrying out a goto action. Even if you decide to touch even for a moment, on the contrary, it will cause malfunction and decrease the service to the player, so by checking after a predetermined time, you will be wary of goto It can also prevent malfunction.

The blackout detection is constantly detected by the blackout detection means 932 provided in each camera 69 (NO in S3411). When the blackout is detected (YES in S3411), the blackout signal 921 is detected. The number is output to the immobilization detection server 66 together with the number (S3412).
Here, the blackout detection unit 932 described above has been described up to the detection methods A to D, but it may be selectively used, or a plurality of methods may be used in combination at the same time.
In this way, it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring while lowering the service to the player and alerting the goto act.

Next, the blindfold countermeasure process (S3413) shown in FIGS. 137, 139 and 140 will be described. When the deactivation detection server 66 receives the blackout flag ON from each camera 69H that has detected the blackout (YES in S3415), the deactivation detection server 66 turns the blackout flag ON (S3416). The deactivation detection server 66 identifies the area of each camera 69H that has detected the blackout (S3417). For example, as shown in FIG. 137, from the cameras 69H (301s) that detect blackouts installed in the island equipment HS1 to the adjacent 302s and 303s, and the island equipment HS2 behind the 301s. The adjacent sixty-six cameras 69 of the 206th, 207th, and 208th units that are installed are identified as the area ARI1. In this area (ARI1, ARI2, ARI3), the closest distance that can be captured by each camera 69 is selected, but the number is not limited to six, and a larger number may be set. By defining this area (ARI1, ARI2, ARI3), control processing becomes quick and easy.

Next, the immobilization detection server 66 identifies each nearby camera 69 that has not been immobilized (YES in S3418), and switches the camera of each identified camera 69 to the subject HM (S3419). The platform cameras 69 image the subject MH (S3421), and it is determined whether or not the face data 605 can be created by the face authentication engine of the individual face authentication apparatus 800 built in each platform camera 69 (YES in S3418).
In addition, the immobilization detection server 66 moves the target of imaging the surveillance camera 61 connected to the surveillance camera system 60 to the subject MH when all of the cameras 69 in the area are not capable of capturing the image. Yes (S3420). The monitoring camera 61 images the subject MH (S3421), and determines whether the face data 605 can be created by the monitoring camera 61 or the face authentication engine built in the face authentication server 80 (YES in S3418).

Next, each of the camera 69 and the surveillance camera 61 extracts face image data 605 from the image of the subject MH captured by the face authentication engine installed therein, and transmits the data (S3423). The data to be transmitted are recording data, face image data 605 created by the face authentication engine, and time data indicating the time at which the image was picked up. If there is at least time data that captures the characteristics of the player M, recorded data, and a camera number (CH) as an identification number of each camera 69 or surveillance camera 61, even if the face image data 605 is not saved, Since it can be confirmed later from the recorded data, the store can store the face image data more safely than in the case of directly storing the face image data from the viewpoint of protecting personal information such as information leakage.
Recording data, face image data 605, and time data stored in the face authentication server 80 or the face authentication server 80 stored in each camera 69 or the hard disk HDD of the ball lending machine PT, the face image data 605 and the time data are transmitted from each camera 69 or the monitoring camera 61. Data is stored by replacing the obtained data (S3424).

The deactivation detection server 66 transmits an abnormal signal to the surveillance camera system 60 or the hall computer 90, displays it on the monitor connected to the surveillance camera system 60 or the hall computer 90 in the management area 2, and informs the employee. To notify (S3425). By notifying the employee, it is possible to quickly detect and deal with goto and mischief. Further, by notifying only the management area 2, it is possible to deal with the problem without being known to the player, and it is possible to prevent a trouble with the player M in advance.

Next, the operation of the system under the above control will be described with reference to the schematic diagrams and timing charts shown in FIGS. 137, 141 and 142.
FIG. 137 shows a pachinko machine P installed in the island facility HS and a chair C on which the game player M sits. . And, the pachinko machine P16 units to which the 206th to 310th units, which are a part of the island facility HS, are attached are shown as an example.

For example, when the front surface of each of the 307-series cameras 69H is covered with paper or the like, the blackout detection means 932 by the above-described method detects it, and after a predetermined time (TB) elapses, each of the cameras 69H turns black. The out signal 921 is output to the immobilization detection server 66. The deactivation detection server 66 turns on the blackout flag. Upon receiving the camera position switching signal 925, each camera 69 in the area (ARI3) switches the camera position from the camera position A to the camera position B toward the subject MH, and in some cases, the zoom signal 928 changes the subject MH to the subject MH. Zoom in.
When all the cameras 69 in the area (ARI3) cannot take images, the surveillance camera 61 is used. Since the monitoring camera 61 is away from the player M (subject MH), it is possible to take an image without being known by the player M (subject MH).

Then, the subject MH is imaged, and the above-described recording data, face image data 605 created by the face authentication engine, time data indicating the time when the image was captured, and the like are collected. The surveillance camera 61 and the individual cameras 69H operate until the blackout signal 921 is turned off or data collection is completed.
Here, since the immobilization detection system 920 gives priority to the monitoring of its own pachinko machine P, when there is an operation of the pachinko machine P as in the 306th series, it gives priority to its own monitoring and does not switch the camera. When it is determined that the pachinko machine P is not in operation, the cameras 69 of the individual units are switched. In this way, while reliably monitoring the player M, it is possible to effectively use the cameras 69 that are not monitored.
The method of grasping the operation of the pachinko machine P is determined by detecting the out-ball signal 931, but it is not particularly limited, and it is judged by the start signal from the pachinko machine P or the sales signal from the ball lending machine PT. Well Alternatively, the face authentication engine of each camera 69 may detect that the player M is seated and may make a determination.

Further, when the 301s and 302s occur at the same time, the 303s of the cameras 69 in each area ARI1 monitor the gamers M because the gamers M are present, and if the gamers M are not present, The platform camera 69 is switched to the 301s or 302s. Further, even when the player M is present, if the face data 605 can be saved, the cameras 69 may be switched to the 301s or 302s.
Further, if the face 69 can be captured by switching the cameras 69 of the 206 to 208 behind the 301s and 302s, the face data 605 is collected. If all the cameras 69 in the area ARI1 cannot be used, the monitoring camera 61 is switched to capture an image. In order to prioritize the opening and closing of the gaming machine and the monitoring of the counter JC, the monitoring cameras 61 are switched and used when all the cameras 69 in the area ARI1 cannot be used.
If the individual cameras 69 outside the area ARI1 cannot be used, the individual cameras 69 in the 305th series or the 210th series may be used.

Next, when a blackout is detected, the counter shutter 832 is actuated to prohibit the counting of possessed balls, in order to prevent goggling. By the prohibiting operation as described above, it is possible to prevent the damage caused by the goto act. In addition, similarly, in order to prevent damage due to a goto act, it is possible to respond by prohibiting the operation of paying out balls and the operation of sharing balls. In addition to the case where the operation of the ball lending machine PT is prohibited, the display screen of the platform information display device K may be stopped and the provision of information such as the number of big hits and the number of start times to the game player M may be stopped. Stopping the provision of information from the platform information display device K or the like does not directly affect the game, and is effective in terms of stopping the service to the player M.

In this way, if the emission of the game medium such as balls purchased by the player M is prohibited, it may cause troubles with the player M. Therefore, lending the purchased balls is not prohibited, and the game is not used. By prohibiting an operation that does not affect the occurrence of troubles between the game player M and the game arcade 1 side.
Although the present invention has shown the case where the front surface of each camera 69 is covered with paper, tape, or the like, the present invention can also be utilized in the case of failure of each camera 69.

(Island equipment installed in the game hall)
The island facility HS installed in the game arcade 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 154. FIG. 143(A) shows a schematic view of the layout of the island facilities (HS1 to HS6) installed in the game arcade 1 from a plan view, and FIG. 143(B) shows each island facility installed in the game arcade 1 ( It shows a schematic view of the arrangement of HS1 to HS6) seen from the side. FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram showing a side surface of a part of the inside of the island facility HS3. FIG. 145 is a schematic view showing each device installed in the island facility HS3 in a perspective view. FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram showing a storage state of the game media stored in the game media storage tank TA3 installed in the island facility HS3. FIG. 147 is a perspective view of a part of the shelf board 407 for collecting the game medium as seen from the back surface. FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the entire shelf board 407 for collecting game media, as viewed from the back side. FIG. 149 is a schematic side view showing how the game media are collected by the shelf board 407. FIG. 150 is a perspective view in which a part of the modified example of the shelf board 407 is viewed from the back side by cutting a part of the game medium storage tank TA. FIG. 151 is a perspective view of a part of a modified example of the shelf board 407a for collecting game media, as seen from the back surface. FIG. 152 is a side view showing a part of a modified example of the shelf board 407a. FIG. 153 is a perspective view showing the upper tank B3 installed in the island facility HS3. FIG. 154 is a perspective view showing the inside of the shutter unit 440. FIG. 155 is a schematic view showing a state where the shutter section 440 is opened and closed on the side surface. FIG. 156 is a block diagram showing a state in which devices that control the shutter unit 440 installed in a plurality of island facilities HS are connected. FIG. 157 is a block diagram showing the connection of devices that control the shutter unit 440.

FIG. 143 shows an example of the layout of each island facility (HS1 to HS6) in the game arcade 1. This layout changes depending on the shape and size of the site of the game arcade 1, and the present invention is not limited to this layout and may be appropriately changed and applied. KC is displayed for the island facilities HS3 to HS6 provided with the counting unit 805 described above. The counting unit 805 reduces the work of exchanging the coin box of the employee even when a gaming machine having a low lending unit price of the game medium is installed or even when the lending unit price of the game medium is high. Often installed.

The island equipments HS1 to HS3 represent the island equipments HS in which the FP is displayed and the counting unit 805 is not provided. The island facilities HS1 to HS3 in which FP is displayed are placed in a state in which a ball box for storing the game medium acquired by the player M is stacked on a passage in the vicinity of the player M, and a ball is delivered to the player M. There is a case where the counting unit 805 is not provided in the case of showing the situation of No. 1 to make the game arcade 1 look lively or in the case of increasing the game motivation.
Above the island facilities HS1 to HS6, upper tanks B1 to B6 for supplying or collecting the pachinko balls Q are provided. In addition, between the island equipments HS1 to HS6, transport gutters BR1 to BR10 for transporting or collecting the pachinko balls Q to other islands are installed in the upper tanks B1 to B6.

Next, the internal structure of the island facilities HS1 to HS6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 149. Since the internal structures of the island facilities HS1 to HS6 are all the same, the island facility HS3 will be described as an example.
A ball polishing and feeding device 401 is installed near the center of the island facility HS3 while polishing the pachinko balls Q and hoisting the pachinko balls Q to the upper tank B3. Above the upper tank B3, a transport gutter BR4 for transporting the pachinko balls Q to the adjacent island facility HS2 is provided, and the transport gutter BR4 is provided with a slope. In addition, the pachinko balls Q sent from the adjacent island facility HS2 are collected by the transport gutter BR3.
The collected pachinko balls Q are provided in the shape of a metal, wooden, or resin tube that is vertically stretched through the hollow overflow duct 402, and a gradient is provided in the center of the game medium storage tank TA3. It rolls over the overflow shelf 408 and is stored in the game medium storage tank TA3.

The island facility HS3 rolls and transports the pachinko balls Q by providing a gradient and a step due to gravity. Therefore, the discharge port of the ball polishing and lifting device 401 is provided at the highest position.
The slope for rolling and transporting the pachinko balls Q is about 5% (angle about 2.86 degrees) to 10% (angle about 5.71 degrees), which is good if it is intended to convey a long distance. The gradient should be gentle. In this embodiment, in order to convey the pachinko balls Q for a long time, the shelf plate 407, the collection gutter 403, the conveyance gutter BR, and the supply gutter 417 are illustrated with a 5% gradient.

The pachinko balls Q, which are pumped to the upper tank B3 by the ball polishing and lifting device 401, are supplied to the pachinko machine P or the ball lending machine PT. Being transported by. The pachinko balls Q conveyed by the supply gutter 417 are distributed by the separator 410 to the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT, and the metallic bendable hollow supply bellows (411, 411, provided in the separator 410). 412) and is supplied to the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT.

Below each of the pachinko machines P, an out box BO for collecting the out balls discharged from the pachinko machines P is provided for each pachinko machine P. The outbox BO forms a resin box shape, collects the pachinko balls Q, counts the collected pachinko balls Q, and outputs the counted information to an external information terminal such as the hall computer 90. The counted pachinko balls Q are collected by a collection gutter 403 and a shelf plate 407 that are provided with a gradient through a bendable hollow hollow collection bellows 413 made of metal.

Further, below the ball lending machine PT, a metal bendable hollow recovery bellows 413 is provided, and the pachinko balls Q counted by the above-described counting unit 805 have a gradient through the recovery bellows 413. It is recovered by the recovery gutter 403 and the shelf board 407 provided.
The collection bellows 413 does not damage the surface of the collection gutter 403 or the shelf 407 made of metal or resin due to the drop of the pachinko balls Q. It is stretched, and the length of each recovery bellows 413 is adjusted according to the gradient of the recovery trough 403 and the shelf plate 407.

The upper tank B3 has a structure for supplying the pachinko balls Q to the supply gutter 417 most preferentially in order to give priority to the supply of the pachinko balls Q to the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT, and then the overflow duct. It is stored in the game medium storage tank TA3 via the 402 and the overflow shelf 408. The collected pachinko balls Q and the pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tank TA3 are conveyed to the upper tank B3 by the ball polishing and feeding device 401 via the joining section 404. The pachinko balls Q transported to the upper tank B3 are transported to the replenishment gutter 417 or to the adjacent island facility HS2 by the transport gutter BR4.

Next, the game medium storage tank TA3 will be described. The game medium storage tank TA3 is made of wood or metal and has a box shape with an open top. The upper part of the game medium storage tank TA3 communicates with the overflow duct 402, and the overflow shelf 408 and the shelf board 407 whose surfaces are made of resin or metal are installed with a slope. Inside the game medium storage tank TA3, a space for storing the pachinko balls Q is provided. The bottom portion 406 of the game medium storage tank TA3 is provided with a bottom collection gutter 405 that is in communication with the collection gutter 403 and that has a slope for taking in the collected pachinko balls Q and the pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tank TA3. .
The merging unit 404 communicates with the bottom collection gutter 406 and the collection gutter 403 on the opposite side of the game medium storage tank TA3, and collects the collected pachinko balls Q and the pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tank TA3. It is flowing into the lifting device 401.

The game medium storage tank TA3 has a structure capable of storing a larger amount of pachinko balls Q than the upper tank B3, and the upper tank B3 can store approximately 30,000 pachinko balls Q, while the game medium storage tank TA3 has the capacity to store approximately 150,000 to 250,000 pachinko balls Q in one tank. It is possible to increase or decrease the storage amount of pachinko balls Q by installing a plurality of this game medium storage tank TA3 in the island facility HS according to the number of pachinko machines P installed and the business form.
When a plurality of game medium storage tanks TA are provided in the island facility HS, the transportation distance may be long and the transportation may not be possible only by the gradient. In that case, a conveyor-type transfer lift or the like, which will be described later, is installed to configure a system for lifting or horizontally moving the pachinko balls Q.

FIG. 146 shows the storage order of the pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tank TA3 with the numbers “1” to “5”. The pachinko balls Q rolling on the shelf board 407 are rolled to the lowermost end of the shelf board 407 and stored from the end of the game medium storage tank TA3. When the "1" portion of the storage tank at the bottom end is filled, the pachinko balls Q remain on the shelf plate 407 and gradually change the position at which they drop into the game medium storage tank TA3 to the upstream, while changing the position of the game medium storage tank TA3. It fills in order from 1”. The game medium storage tank TA3 sets the initial value SS with a margin in storage capacity in anticipation that the pachinko balls Q are returned at once after the store is closed, instead of filling the entire capacity with the pachinko balls Q. The initial value SS is a set value in a state in which the entire amount of pachinko balls Q is evenly stored in the island facility HS of the game arcade 1.
A spare ball detection sensor S7 is attached to the position of the initial value SS, and the ball detection sensor S7 is used as a spare sensor for S4 and S5. The ball detection sensor S7 is capable of promptly responding to an emergency, and at the same time, can be used to detect a case where the foreign object BD causes a ball jump of the sensor. The setting change to the ball detection sensor S7 can be handled by a simple operation by replacing the wiring or changing the control setting.

Next, the shelf plate 407 will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 149. The shelf plate 407 is formed in a long flat plate shape made of a hard metal or resin to prevent the surface from being worn, is provided with a slope, and is attached to the side wall of the game medium storage tank TA3.
The shelf board 407 is attached to the game medium storage tank TA3 by an L-shaped support piece 425, and the support piece 425 rotatably supports the rotation rod 424. The rotary rod 424 is fixed to the shelf plate 407 by a rotary rod fixing piece 422.
A space 427 smaller than the diameter of the pachinko ball Q (the diameter of the pachinko ball Q is 11 mm) is provided between the side wall 429 side of the game medium storage tank TA3 and the shelf plate 407, while the pachinko ball Q does not drop but foreign matters BD and the like can drop. ing.

The shelf plate 407 can be rotated around the rotation rod 424 to adjust the angle of the shelf plate 407 in the width direction. By adjusting the angle in the width direction, it is possible to change the rate at which the pachinko balls Q drop toward the game medium storage tank TA3. By slightly tilting this angle adjustment to the side wall side 429 of the game medium storage tank TA3 as shown in FIG. 149, the pachinko balls Q do not fall from the middle of the shelf 407 to the game medium storage tank TA3 in order (1 to 5). It has a structure that can be stored in. Since the game medium storage tank TA3 has a structure that can be stored in order (1 to 5), the storage amount of the pachinko balls Q can be accurately measured by the ball detection sensors (S1 to S7). In this way, the storage amount of the game media storage tank TA in the entire game arcade 1 can be equalized by controlling the conveyance of the pachinko balls Q by accurately detecting the storage amount.
Further, the inclination of the shelf board 407 in the width direction is optimally about 1 to 2 degrees. In this embodiment, an angle adjusting unit 421 is provided at the end of the shelf 407, and the angle adjusting unit 421 as an angle adjusting unit is automatic and stepless by providing an angle adjusting motor 423 and gears (428, 426). Although the angle can be adjusted, the angle may be adjusted in stages by using a solenoid or the like.

On the back surface of the shelf 407, ball detection sensors (S1 to S7) for detecting the storage amount of the pachinko balls Q are installed. As the ball detection sensor (S1 to S7), a photo sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a proximity sensor for magnetic force detection, or the like is adopted. By using a photo sensor or an ultrasonic sensor, the distance to the pachinko ball Q can be measured, so that the capacity stored in the game medium storage tank TA can be measured extremely finely. In addition, by installing a ball detection sensor (S1 to S7) that detects the storage amount of the pachinko balls Q on the back surface of the shelf board 407, it is possible for the pachinko balls Q to drop directly to the ball detection sensors (S1 to S7). It is preventing. Therefore, unlike the conventional case, the coil of the sensor, the electronic component, and the like are not destroyed by the impact caused by the drop of the pachinko ball Q. Further, since the position of the ball detection sensor (S1 to S7) is the uppermost part of the game medium storage tank TA3, the drop is small and the ball detection sensor (S1 to S7) is less likely to be damaged by the impact caused by the drop of the pachinko ball Q. . The effects described above are the same for the movable sensor described later.

Next, modified examples of the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) are shown in FIGS. The angle adjusting mechanism (421a, 422a, 425a) has the same structure as that described above, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted. The ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) are used for control for detecting the amount of balls described later. As the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2), a photo sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a proximity sensor for magnetic force detection, or the like is adopted as the sensor unit 433.
Unlike the structure described above, the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) move on the rail portion 431, so that the two sensors can measure the storage amount of the pachinko balls Q extremely finely. The rail portion 431 includes a rail 436 having a U-shaped cross section and a pulley 435 provided in the rail 436. The movable portion 438 moves as the pulley 435 moves on the rail 436. The movable portion 438 has a built-in sensor portion 433 and detects a pachinko ball Q.

The movable ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) can accurately measure the storage amount of the pachinko balls Q, unlike the fixed type described above. In the case of the fixed type, if the pachinko ball Q reaches the detection distance of the ball detection sensor, the amount of balls at the preset position can be grasped, but the amount of pachinko balls Q stored between the sensors can be detected. Can not. However, the movable ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) can measure the storage amount of the pachinko balls Q in a stepless manner by moving, and the sensor that can measure the distance such as ultrasonic waves Since it is possible to measure even the distance of the pachinko balls Q that have been set, it is possible to grasp the storage amount of the pachinko balls Q more finely. Further, in the case of the movable type ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2), since the setting can be freely changed depending on the position to which the level is moved, the control of the pachinko ball Q conveyance is also controlled very finely. It becomes possible. Therefore, when it is desired to change the amount of pachinko balls Q held in the entire game arcade 1 depending on the business mode, it is possible to freely set the amount, which is effective.

As a driving method for moving, a linear method is adopted, a plurality of permanent magnets 437 having N poles and S poles provided inside the pulley 435 are arranged, and a movable portion 438 having a built-in coil allows a current to flow. The electromagnetic force causes the movable portion 438 to move in a non-contact manner to propel the shelf 407a in the longitudinal direction. At both ends of the rail portion 431, end sensors 439 that detect the end of the rail portion 431 are provided. By adopting the linear system, it is possible to accurately control the straight movement. In addition, as another method of linear movement, there is also a moving mechanism that drives a motor connected to a ball screw to move a ball screw nut to make a linear movement.

Next, a structure for carrying the pachinko balls Q between the island facilities HS will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 155. As shown in FIG. 153, the pachinko balls Q are transferred between the island equipments (HS2, HS3, HS4) by the transfer gutters (BR3 to BR6) that are bridged with a gradient.
Above the upper tank B3, transfer gutters BR3 and BR5 for transferring the pachinko balls Q stored in the island equipment HS3 to the adjacent island equipments HS2 and HS4 are provided. Further, below the upper tank B3, there are provided transfer troughs BR4 and BR6 for receiving the pachinko balls Q stored in the adjacent island facilities HS2 and HS4 into the upper tank B3.

Below the transport gutters BR3 and BR5, a shutter section 440 provided on the side wall of the upper tank B3 is provided.
The shutter part 440 is fixed to the side wall of the upper tank B3 with a screw or the like in a shutter mounting hole 447 provided in the shutter mounting part 443. As shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, in the shutter section 440, the shutter movable section 442 in which the shutter motor 441 is connected by a gear or the like moves up and down, and the transfer path 451 of the upper tank B3 is closed or opened to cause pachinko. The conveyance of the ball Q is controlled. The shutter motor 441 detects the position of the shutter movable portion 442 by the upper limit switch 446, the lower limit switch 445, and the detection piece 448 provided on the shutter movable portion 442, and determines whether the shutter movable portion 442 is at the proper position. Based on the determination, the movable shutter portion 442 is moved up and down to close or open the transfer passage 451.

Next, a connection configuration and control of the shutter unit 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 157 with reference to a block diagram for controlling the shutter unit 440 and a control flow.
First, a connection configuration of devices for controlling the shutter unit 440 will be described by exemplifying the island facility HS5 in which the counter JC2 shown in FIGS. 156 and 157 is installed. The shutter section 440 includes a shutter control board 485, a shutter section 440L for the island, a shutter section 440R for the adjacent island, a sensor group 483L for the own island, and a sensor group 483R for the adjacent island. When the control shown in FIG. 157 is connected as a single unit in a daisy chain, the configuration shown in FIG. 156 is obtained. In FIG. 156, one constituent unit is shown by a solid line centering on the island facility HS5, and a broken line is shown as another constituent unit.

The shutter control board 485 provided in the island equipment HS5 is connected by wiring to the shutter section 440L of its own island provided on the right side surface of the upper tank B5, and the shutter control board provided in the island equipment HS6. It is connected via a substrate 485 to the shutter portion 440R on the adjacent island provided on the left side surface of the upper tank B6 by wiring.
Further, the shutter control board 485 is connected by wiring to the own island sensor group 483L installed in the game medium storage tank TA5, and also via the shutter control board 485 provided in the island equipment HS6. It is connected by wiring to the adjacent island sensor group 483R installed in the game medium storage tank TA6 provided in. Either the fixed ball detection sensor (S1 to S7) or the movable ball detection sensor (Sa1 and Sa2) described above may be used for the own island sensor group 483L and the adjacent island sensor group 483R.

Next, the control of the shutter section 440 of the shutter control board 485 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 158. The control of the shutter unit 440 used for the control for equalizing the storage amounts of the pachinko balls Q described later will be described.

The shutter unit opening/closing process (S3501) is a control for controlling one shutter unit 440. When a shutter control signal is transmitted from the shutter control board 485 when equalizing the storage amounts of the pachinko balls Q (YES in S3503), the shutter motor 441 drives to operate the shutter movable portion 442 up and down ( S3504). The detection piece 448 of the shutter movable portion 442 contacts the upper limit or lower limit switch (445, 446), and the shutter motor 441 is driven until the sensor of the upper limit or lower limit switch detects (NO in S3505). When the upper limit or lower limit switch (445, 446) is turned on (YES in S3505), the driving of the shutter motor 441 is stopped and the operation of the shutter movable section 442 is stopped (S3506). After that, the timer operates (S3507), and the operation of the shutter movable unit 442 stops (NO in S3508 to S3506) until the timer elapses for a predetermined time (YES in S3508). The timer setting value is optimally 1 to 3 minutes, although it depends on the specifications of the shutter motor 441. The timer prevents burning of the shutter motor 441 due to the sensitive reaction of the ball detection sensors S and Sa.

<Control of averaging storage amount of pachinko balls stored in the game media storage tank of the island facility>
Next, by controlling the shutter unit 440 described above, the storage amount of the pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tanks (TA1 to TA6) of the island facilities (HS1 to HS6) installed in the game hall 1 is set to the game hall 1 The control for averaging as a whole will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 167.
FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing a storage state of the game media stored in the game media storage tank TA installed in each island facility HS. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the storage tank averaging process. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the ball carrying shutter process. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the closing process mode process. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the sensor position setting process. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the sensor position setting process. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the sensor position setting process. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the initialization process. FIG. 167 is a schematic diagram of the movement of the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) installed on the shelf board 407a as seen from the bottom surface.

The averaging process (S3510) of the game medium storage tank will be described. The game medium storage tank averaging process (S3510) is a main process, and is largely divided into a store closing process mode (S3540) and a ball carrying shutter process (S3520). The ball transfer shutter processing S3520 is used when the store is normally operating, and in the store closing processing mode (S3540), a large amount of pachinko balls Q may be returned to the counter JC at once at the time of closing the store. This is the process used when expected. The store closing mode (S3540) is a storage amount of the pachinko balls Q of the gaming medium storage tanks (TA2, TA5) in which a counter JC is installed in order to smoothly count the pachinko balls Q acquired by the customer, especially when the store is closed. Is a control for adjusting.

The averaging process (S3510) of the game medium storage tank TA branches into a store closing process mode (S3540) and a ball carrying shutter process S3520 (S3511). When the closing process mode (S3540) is selected (YES in S3511), the closing process mode (S3540) is selected (NO in S3515) until an initial value flag described later is turned on. When the initial value flag is turned on, the process proceeds to the ball carrying shutter process (S3520) (YES in S3515). As shown in FIG. 159, the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) is set in five stages, and the storage amount of the pachinko balls Q is divided into five sensor levels to convey the pachinko balls Q and perform averaging control. ing.

First, the ball conveying shutter process (S3520) will be described with reference to FIGS. 156, 157 and 161.
In the ball transfer shutter process (S3520), the above-described shutter unit 440 is controlled to transfer the pachinko balls Q, and the game medium storage tanks (TA1 to TA6) of the island facilities (HS1 to HS6) installed in the game arcade 1 are transported. ), the storage amount of the pachinko balls Q stored in () is averaged in the entire game arcade 1.

In the ball transfer shutter process (S3520), the game medium storage tank TA5 on the own island is compared with the game medium storage tank TA6 on the adjacent island, and if the sensor level of the adjacent ball detection sensor (S or Sa) is low (S3521). YES), that is, if the storage amount of the pachinko balls Q in the game medium storage tank TA5 of the own island is larger than that of the adjacent island, the shutter portion 440L of the own island is opened (S3523) and the shutter portion 440R of the adjacent island is closed ( S3524).

Next, the game medium storage tank TA5 on the own island is compared with the game medium storage tank TA6 on the adjacent island. If the sensor level of the adjacent ball detection sensor (S or Sa) is not low (NO in S3521), the own island Of the game medium storage tank TA5 of the adjacent island and the game medium storage tank TA6 of the adjacent island, and if the sensor level of the ball detection sensor S/Sa of the adjacent island is high (YES in S3522), that is, the game medium storage tank TA5 of the own island If the storage amount of the pachinko balls Q is less than that of the neighboring island, the shutter portion 440R of the neighboring island is opened (S3526) and the shutter portion 440L of the own island is closed (S3527).
If the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on the adjacent island is not high (NO in S3522), it indicates that the sensor level is the same, that is, the amount of pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tank TA5 of the island itself. Is the same as the neighboring island, the shutter portion 440R on the neighboring island and the shutter portion 440L on the own island are closed (S3525).

As described above, the island facilities HS5 and HS6 have been described as an example, but the island facilities HS1 to HS6 are controlled in the same manner, and the amount of pachinko balls stored in the game medium storage tanks TA of the own island and the adjacent island is always controlled. The detection sensors S and Sa are used for comparison, and control is performed so that the game medium storage tanks TA of the island facility HS are even in the entire game hall 1. Therefore, the pachinko balls Q stored in the island equipment HS connected by the transport gutter BR can be transferred between the island equipment HS. Therefore, the pachinko balls Q stored in the entire game arcade 1 can be efficiently used, and there is no shortage of supply of the pachinko balls Q to the pachinko machine P or the ball lending machine PT.

Next, the store closing processing mode processing (S3540) will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 and 162 to 167.
First, the store closing mode processing (S3540) is controlled differently depending on whether or not it is the island facility (HS2, HS5) in which the counter JC is installed (S3541). If it is the island facility HS in which the counter JC is installed (YES in S3541), the lower limit level "lower" is set to the sensor level "2" as shown in FIG. 159(B) (S3542). Further, if the island equipment (HS1, HS3, HS4, HS6) where the counter JC is not installed (NO in S3541), the upper limit level "up" is set to the sensor level "4" as shown in FIG. 159(A). Is set to an initial value SS (shown in FIG. 146) which is an intermediate position between "" and "5" (S3551).

Next, the island equipment (HS2, HS5) determines whether or not the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on the adjacent island is the upper limit level (S3543). In the island facility (HS2, HS5), if the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on the neighboring island is not the upper limit level (NO in S3543), the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on its own island is It is determined whether or not it is at the lower limit level (S3545).
If the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) of the own island is lower than the lower limit level (YES in S3545), the island equipment (HS2, HS5) opens the shutter section 440 of the adjacent island (S3553) and By closing the shutter section 440 of (S3554), it is possible to always secure the necessary storage amount in the island. If the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on the island is not lower than the lower limit level (NO in S3545), the island equipment (HS2, HS5) closes the shutter unit 440 on the adjacent island (S3555). , By opening the shutter section 440 of the island (S3556), even if returned to the counter JC at one time after closing the store, the pachinko ball above the lower limit level, which is more than the required storage amount on the island, can be dealt with. It is possible to transport Q and secure a required free space in the game medium storage tank TA. In this way, by switching the mode to the closing processing mode, it is possible to secure the required free space in the game medium storage tank TA of the island facility HS in which the counter JC is installed in advance.

Further, if the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on the adjacent island reaches the upper limit level (YES in S3543), the island equipment (HS2, HS5) activates the timer to prevent malfunction of the sensor (S3544). .. Until the timer elapses a predetermined time, it is always determined whether or not the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on the adjacent island has reached the upper limit level (NO in S3546, S3544, S3546). If the timer has elapsed for a predetermined time (YES in S3546), the island equipment (HS2, HS5) turns on the sensor level increase flag of its own island used for control described later (S3547). As shown in FIGS. 159(B) to 159(C), by turning on the sensor level increase flag of the own island, the lower limit sensor position is raised by one step. By increasing the sensor level, it is possible to follow the storage amount returned in real time, and reduce wasteful traffic of pachinko balls Q.
Until the lower limit level of the own island rises and becomes equal to the period value (YES in S3548), the raising flag for raising the lower limit level sensor position by one step is set to ON (S3547). When the lower limit level of the island becomes equal to the initial value SS (YES in S3548), the initial value flag is turned on (S3549).
By raising the initial value SS to the same value as the initial value SS, it is possible to guide the storage of the initial value SS without having to wastefully move the pachinko balls Q back and forth. Further, the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) installed can be effectively used.

In this way, according to the business form of the amusement arcade 1, by changing the sensor level position from the sensor level position currently set to another sensor level position, the pachinko balls Q are transported by transportation. And the pachinko balls Q can be stored efficiently. In particular, the game hall 1 does not operate for a long time after the store is closed, and by adopting the system described above, it is possible to move the pachinko balls Q in advance, so after the store is closed, the storage amount is equalized. Can be realized. As a result, when the store is opened the next day, it is possible to perform business with the storage amount of pachinko balls Q being averaged over the entire game arcade 1.

Further, in the island equipment (HS1, HS3, HS4, HS6) where the counter JC is not installed, when the sensor level does not reach the upper limit level (NO in S3552), the shutter unit 440 on the adjacent island is opened (S3553). ), the shutter unit 440 on the island is closed (S3554). By opening the shutter part 440 on the adjacent island (S3553) and closing the shutter part 440 on the own island (S3554), even if the counter JC is returned to the island equipment (HS2, HS5) at once. In order to be able to respond, the pachinko ball Q is transported to the island equipment (HS1, HS3, HS4, HS6) where the counter JC is not installed, up to the upper limit level, that is, the initial value SS, and the counter JC is installed in advance. It is possible to secure the required free capacity in the game medium storage tank TA of the island facilities (HS2, HS5) that are currently installed. In this way, by moving the pachinko balls to the initial value SS in advance, it is not necessary to provide a time for equalizing the storage amount of the pachinko balls Q separated after the closing among the island facilities HS of the entire game arcade 1.

As a modified example in FIG. 176, the island facility HS2 in which the counter JC is installed among the island facilities HS in which the counting unit 805 is not installed will be described.
As shown in FIG. 176, the island facility HS2 is provided with a small tank RTA2 capable of storing the pachinko balls Q under the counter JC, communicates with the small tank RTA2, and a conveyor lift 473 is used to convey the pachinko balls Q in the small tank RTA2. By transporting to the collection gutter 403, the storage amount of the pachinko balls Q can be increased. Further, the above-described control can be performed by providing the small tank RTA2 with the ball detection sensor S5.
In this way, by providing the small tank RTA2, even if the pachinko balls Q having a pumping capacity higher than that of the ball polishing and lifting device 401 are thrown into the counter JC, they are once stocked in the small tank RTA2, so that the counter JC The discharge capacity is not reduced, and the player M does not have to wait even if the concentration is counted near the closing of the store.

In many cases, the island facility HS2 is provided with a pachinko machine P that is likely to be expected to acquire a large amount of pachinko balls at one time. There is a case where the counting unit 805 is not provided for the game arcade 1 in order to create a lively atmosphere by stacking the boxes. On the contrary, the island facility HS (KC) in which the counting unit 805 is installed returns the acquired pachinko balls Q on the spot, so that the pachinko balls Q do not move much. Therefore, the storage amount of the game medium storage tank TA may be small.
At least out of the island equipment HS where the counting unit 805 is not installed, the storage amount of the pachinko balls Q in the island equipment HS2 where the counter JC is installed is made larger than that of the island equipment HS (KC) provided with the counting unit 805. This makes it possible to immediately deal with the return processing of the pachinko balls Q counted by the counter JC and the replenishment of the pachinko machine P when a large amount of processing or ball output is required after the store is closed.

Next, the sensor position setting process (S3560) used to control the shutter unit 440 described above will be described by taking the movable ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) as an example, but there is no need to particularly limit the fixed ball detection sensor. It goes without saying that it can be applied to the sensors (S1 to S7).

In the sensor position setting process (S3560), an initialization process (S3580) is performed to determine the amount of pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tank TA and the position of the sensor. Next, it is determined whether or not the store processing mode processing (S3540) is performed (S3561). If it is in the closing process mode process (S3540) (YES in S3561), it is determined whether or not the island facility (HS2, HS5) in which the counter JC is installed (S3562).

If the island equipment (HS2, HS5) in which the counter JC is installed (YES in S3561), the linear operates (S3563), and the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) move along the rail portion 431 at the sensor level " The position is moved to the position "2" ("2" in Figs. 159 and 167) (YES in S3564), and the lower limit level is set (Fig. 167(A), S3542 in Fig. 162).

The lower limit level does not move until the sensor level increase flag is ON (S3547 in FIG. 162) (NO in S3565), but if the sensor level increase flag is ON (S3547 in FIG. 162) (YES in S3565), linear. Is activated (S3563), the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) raise the sensor level by one step along the rail portion 431 and move to the position of the sensor level “3” (“3” in FIGS. 159 and 167). ) (YES in S3569), the lower limit level is set (“lower” in FIG. 162), and the sensor level is stored (S3571). This series of operations (S3565 to S3572) is repeated until the sensor level increase flag is turned on and the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) move to the position of the initial value (SS in FIG. 167) (NO in S3572).
When the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) move to the position of the initial value (SS in FIG. 167) (YES in S3572), the initial value flag is turned ON (S3573), and the sensor position setting process (S3560) ends.

Further, if the island equipment (HS1, HS3, HS4, HS6) where the counter JC is not installed (NO in S3562), the linear operates (S3566), and the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) move to the rail portion 431. Along with, move to the position of the initial value (SS in FIG. 167) (NO in S3567). When the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) move to the initial value SS (YES in S3567), the upper limit level is set (“up” in FIG. 162) and the sensor level is stored (S3574). Then, the sensor position setting process (S3560) of the island equipment (HS1, HS3, HS4, HS6) where the counter JC is not installed is ended.

If the island equipment (HS1 to HS6) is not performing the closing processing mode processing (S3540) (NO in S3561), the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) perform detection at a preset distance to detect the ball. The sensor moves to a sensor level where the sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) are turned on (FIG. 167(B), S3575). Then, the sensor level is stored (S3576), and the linear is operated (S3577). Since it is not possible to predict whether the storage amount of pachinko balls Q will decrease or increase during business, move upward and downward from the stored sensor level (Fig. 167(C)), and the ball detection sensor Sa1 moves to the position where the storage amount decreases. Then, the storage amount is monitored, the ball detection sensor Sa2 moves to a position where the storage amount increases, and the storage amount is monitored. If any one of the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) is turned on (S3575), it is turned on. Then, the sensor level is stored (S3575 in FIG. 167(B)), the sensor level is stored (S3576), and the linear is operated (S3577). Then, during business, the same processing (S3575 to S3577) is repeated.
In this way, the mobile sensor can detect whether the holding amount of pachinko balls Q is currently decreasing or increasing, so perform detailed control while grasping the trend of increase or decrease. Is possible.

As described above, the movable ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) do not need to have many sensors as in the conventional fixed type having stages, and can detect even a small number. Is. In addition, the movable ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) can be controlled not only in stages but also in stepless control, so the storage amount of pachinko balls Q can also be controlled in five steps. In addition to that, real-time control according to the storage amount can also be realized. In particular, it is optimal for equalizing the amount of balls in the entire game media storage tank TA5 of the game arcade 1 within a limited time until the employee returns home after the store is closed.

Next, the initialization process (S3580) will be described. The game medium storage tank TA of the island equipment (HS1 to HS6) actually puts the stored pachinko balls Q to determine the level position of the sensor, but the sensor level "1" and the sensor level "5" are the game medium. It is defined when the storage tank TA is designed (S3581). The sensor level "5" is set with a little margin from the position where the pachinko ball Q does not enter any more. Further, in the island facility HS where the counter JC is installed, when the storage amount of the pachinko balls Q reaches the sensor level “5”, the acceptance of the counter JC is rejected by blocking or displaying the counter JC. It is also possible. The sensor level "1" is set to the minimum amount of balls that can be secured on the island before the pachinko balls Q are transported.
Next, the pachinko balls Q to be stored are actually stored in the game medium storage tank TA, and the sensor levels “2” to “4” are set to the cut ball amount and stored (S3583 to S3585). In the case of the present embodiment, the sensor level "1" is 50,000, the sensor level "2" is 100,000, the sensor level "3" is 150,000, the sensor level "4" is 200,000, and the sensor level is The optimum storage amount is 250,000 “5”.

<Jam clogging detection control for island equipment shelf boards>
Control for detecting and eliminating foreign matter when foreign matter is mixed in the shelf 407 installed in the game medium storage tanks (TA1 to TA6) of the island facilities (HS1 to HS6) installed in the game arcade 1 to 168 This will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the ball jam detection processing. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing a ball clogging abnormality process. FIG. 170 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the foreign matter BD is mixed in the shelf board 407. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram showing a state when the shelf board 407 operates. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram showing a state when the shelf board 407 operates. FIG. 173 is a perspective view showing a ball detection sensor 460 and a vibration device 470 of a modified example installed on the shelf board 407. FIG. 174 is a perspective view showing the inside of a vibration device 470 of a modified example installed on the shelf plate 407.

A state in which the foreign matter BD is mixed in the shelf plate 407 will be described with reference to FIG. 170. Normally, the pachinko balls Q are stored from the storage area TAC1 to the storage area TAC2 in accordance with the slope of the shelf board 407 and gradually stored in the leftward direction. However, when the foreign matter BD is present, the pachinko ball Q2 falls off from the middle because the foreign matter BD serves as a barrier, the proper storage order of the pachinko balls Q is broken, and the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) makes a false detection. The control for equalizing the game medium storage tanks TA does not work well.

Therefore, the ball jam detection process (S3590) shown in FIG. 168 is required. The ball jam detection processing (S3590) stores the current sensor level (S3591). It waits until the sensor level moves (NO in S3592). When the sensor level has moved (YES in S3592), it is determined whether or not the sensor level is +1 higher than the previous sensor level (S3593). If it is within the range of +1 from the previous sensor level (YES in S3593), the ball jam detection processing (S3590) is terminated because it is the normal order of storing the pachinko balls Q.

If it is not within the range of −1 from the previous sensor level (NO in S3593), there is a possibility that the foreign matter BD may cause a ball jam, so the undetected sensor among the ON ball detection sensors. It is determined whether there is any (S3594). When there is no undetected sensor among the ON ball detection sensors (NO in S3594), the ball jam detection processing (S3590) ends because it is the normal storage order of the pachinko balls Q.
If there is an undetected sensor between the ball detection sensors (S or Sa) that are ON (YES in S3594), it is possible that a ball jam has occurred, so the ball jam flag is turned ON. The ball jam detection process (S3590) is ended as (S3595).

As described above, by recognizing the undetected sensor, it is possible to quickly detect the clogging of the balls, and it is possible to quickly return to the normal state of the obstacle to the control. Further, in the case of the movable ball detection sensor Sa, by measuring the distance to the pachinko ball Q while moving as shown in FIG. 170, ball clogging occurs due to mixing of the foreign matter BD unlike stepwise detection. Whether or not it can be detected quickly. The sensor for detecting the distance can detect the distance by an ultrasonic sensor or a photosensor that picks up a reflected wave or reflected light or a laser beam.

Next, a ball clogging abnormality process (S3600) will be described as a process for dealing with a ball clogging. The ball clogging abnormality processing (S3600) waits until the ball clogging flag of the ball clogging detection processing (S3590) is turned on (S3595) (NO in S3601). When the ball jam flag in the ball jam detection process (S3590) is turned on (S3595) (YES in S3601), the ball jam elimination control is turned on (S3602). When the ball jam elimination control is turned on, the ball jam elimination device described later is driven.

In the ball jam abnormality processing (S3600), the ball jam clearing device is operated (NO in S3605, S3602) until the ball jamming flag is turned off (YES in S3603), and the ball jam clearing device is operated a predetermined number of times. (YES in S3605), it is determined that the clogging is not cleared, the clogging abnormality flag is turned on (S3606), the employee is notified near the island facility HS or in the management area 2, and the clogging is determined. The abnormality processing (S3600) is ended.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172 as a device for clearing a ball jam, the shelf board 407 is built in the L-shaped support piece 425 to a position where the stored pachinko balls Q or the like do not hinder rotation. After being raised by the solenoid 428, the above-mentioned support piece 425 rotatably supports the rotation rod 424, so that the angle adjustment motor 423 is driven and the angle of the shelf 407 is adjusted to an angle at which the foreign matter BD can be eliminated. By changing it, the foreign matter BD can be dropped and eliminated. The angle adjusting unit 421 can also tilt the angle to the left or right around the axis of the rotary rod 424. In addition, it is possible to drop and remove the foreign matter BD by tilting the angle to the left and right repeatedly not only in one direction.

As a ball jam elimination device of a modified example, as shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, a ball detection sensor 460 equipped with a vibrating device 470 that can be used for the ball detection sensors (S1 to S7) can also be used.
The ball detection sensor 460 can be attached to the back surface of the shelf plate 407 with screws or the like from the attachment holes 466 formed in the plate-shaped sensor attachment piece 467. The sensor unit 461 is mounted in the mounting hole 466 by the mounting base 463. Further, the sensor unit 461 has a built-in photo sensor 462 and outputs an ON signal in response to the pachinko ball Q at the set detection distance. The vibrating portion 470 surrounded by the vibrating case 465 is vibrated by rotating the weight eccentrically supported by the small motor 472.
This ball clogging elimination device vibrates a plurality of ball detection sensors 460 provided on the back surface of the shelf plate 407 to drop the foreign matter BD or move it to the end of the path of the pachinko ball Q by vibrating to eliminate the ball clogging. Is a mechanism for performing. In particular, it is possible to design compactly by operating the vibrator. Further, by integrating with the ball detection sensor 460, it is possible to remove foreign matter at a place where an abnormality does not occur (such as above the ball detection sensor), and at the same time detect and clear a ball jam. Therefore, it is possible to design the canceling device including the control in a compact manner.

(Modified island equipment)
A modified example of the island facility HS will be described with reference to FIG. 175. Since the structure above the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT is the same as the structure of FIGS. 147 to 148, the description thereof will be omitted. The pachinko balls Q discharged from the outbox BO and the ball lending machine PT are distributed to the left and right by a distribution shelf board 471 in the shape of a mountain formed of metal, resin or the like. The distributed pachinko balls Q fall from the shelf plate 407b, which is a flat metal plate provided with holes through which the pachinko balls Q pass, to the game medium storage tank TAb.
The game medium storage tank TAb is made of metal or wood and formed in a box shape, the upper side is opened, and the upper side is closed by a shelf board 407b. Further, the island facility HS is provided with a plurality of game medium storage tanks TAb, and a conveyor lift 473 is provided between the game medium storage tanks TAb so that the island facility HS can be transported even in the long island facility HS where the natural gradient cannot be obtained. . The bottom recovery gutter 405b pumps the pachinko balls Q in the game medium storage tank TAb by a conveyor lift 473 and finally pumps them to the upper tank B via a ball polishing pump (not shown).

(Structure of platform information display device)
The platform information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 67. The table information display device K is attached to the curtain plate 894 by an attachment table (not shown). The curtain plate 894 is formed of an aluminum material or a stainless material in a U-shape, and is fixed to the island equipment HS with screws, nails, bolts, or the like. A work door 895 that opens and closes when the separator 410 connected to the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT and the replenishment bellows (411, 412) are clogged is provided above the curtain plate 894. ing.
In addition, the platform information display device K displays the information output from the pachinko machine P, the ball lending machine PT and the outbox BO to the game player M via the platform computer 93 and displays information such as a big hit or the number of starts. There is. The platform computer 93 also transmits the collected information to the hall computer 90 via the island computer 91.

<Modification 1>
Next, the structure of Modification 1 of the platform information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 186.
FIG. 177 is a schematic diagram showing an end surface of the platform information display device Ka and the pachinko machine P of Modification 1 as seen from the side by cutting the island facility HS. FIG. 178 is a perspective view of the platform information display device Ka of Modification 1 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 179 is a perspective view of the platform information display device Ka of Modification 1 as viewed from the back surface side. FIG. 180 is a schematic diagram of a state in which the platform information display device Ka of Modification 1 is displaying information as viewed from the front. FIG. 181 is a schematic view showing a state in which the platform information display device Ka of Modification 1 attached to the island facility HS is closed from the side surface side. FIG. 182 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the platform information display device Ka of the modified example 1 attached to the island facility HS is open from the side surface side. FIG. 183 is a perspective view showing the open state of the platform information display device Ka of the first modification attached to the island facility HS from above. FIG. 184 is a perspective view showing the calling lamp section 620a mounted on the platform information display device Ka of the first modification from the front side. FIG. 185 is a perspective view showing the calling lamp section 620a mounted on the platform information display device Ka of the first modification from the back surface side. FIG. 186 is an explanatory diagram showing an end surface obtained by cutting the calling lamp portion 620a attached to the platform information display device Ka of the first modification.

The table information display device Ka will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 177 to 183 and 197. The table information display device Ka is roughly composed of a table information control board 601 (FIG. 197), a liquid crystal display section 610, a housing 611, a call lamp section 620a, a hinge 613, and an electronic key holding section 614.
The platform information display device Ka is formed in a lateral width including the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT, and further extends in the vertical direction from above the pachinko machine P to the upper end of the island facility HS.
The platform information display device Ka can represent one connected and related effect over a plurality of units by closely adjoining each other when installing the plurality of units on the island facility HS. In addition, even with the stand information display device Ka alone, it is possible to express effects.

Most of the front surface of the platform information display device Ka is covered with the liquid crystal display unit 610, and further the side surface, the lower end and a part of the upper side of the liquid crystal display unit 610 are covered with a metal casing 611.
The liquid crystal display unit 610 includes a transparent liquid crystal display substrate 612 surrounded by a housing 611, and includes a liquid crystal display screen 891a that can be transmitted by making the liquid crystal transparent under control. Moreover, various effects and data can be displayed by control.
The platform information display device Ka is provided with a calling lamp portion 620a described later on the lower side surface of the housing 611 in the horizontal direction.
Further, the platform information display device Ka has hinges 613 attached to the housing 611 so that the platform information display device Ka can be opened and closed vertically at both upper ends. Further, below the hinge 613, electronic key holding portions 614 are attached to both ends of the housing 611.

The electronic key holding portion 614 is attached to the housing 611 by a holding portion attachment piece 617 with a screw or the like. The holding portion attachment piece 617 is connected to the first arm portion 617 that is rotatably supported, and further, the first arm portion 617 and the second arm portion 617 are rotatably supported. Further, the torque fixing portion 615 including the electronic key is rotatably supported by the second arm portion 617.
As shown in FIG. 177, the hinge 613 is fixed to the metal or wooden horizontal rail 491 of the island facility HS, and the electronic key holding portion 614 is fixed to the metal or wooden vertical rail 492 of the island facility HS with screws or the like. There is.

The electronic key holding unit 614 can fix the platform information display device Ka at a constant angle when the platform information display device Ka is opened and closed up and down (FIGS. 182 and 183). By fixing the platform information display device Ka in the upper open state, the employee MS does not need to hold the platform information display device Ka by hand, and can work with both hands so that troubles can be dealt with quickly. is there.
Further, in the closed state (FIG. 181), the opening/closing operation can be fixed by the built-in electronic key. When releasing the electronic key, the electronic key cannot be released without performing authentication such as fingerprint authentication, which will be described later, to identify a person or inputting a personal identification number by a signal from a remote controller or the like.

As described above, the electronic key holding unit 614 is controlled by the platform information control board 601, and has a function of fixing the platform information display device Ka by the fingerprint authentication reading device 627 and the fingerprint authentication board 628. Therefore, this platform information display device Ka is opened/closed, a hand is reached from above the pachinko machine P, the door lock on the back surface of the pachinko machine P is operated, and after opening/closing the pachinko machine P, the main board or the payout board, It is possible to prevent the act of mounting the ROM, the substrate, etc., the act of picking up the bills after purchasing the game medium of the ball lending machine PT from the bill transport gutter, etc.

Next, the call lamp unit 620a will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. The call lamp part 620a is in the shape of a cylinder having a diameter of about 35 mm, and is formed with a length close to the entire width of the platform information display device Ka. Lamp mounting portions 622a at both ends of the calling lamp portion 620a are mounted on the side surface of the housing 611 below the platform information display device Ka.
A cylindrical lamp housing 621a is formed of a metal material such as stainless so as to cover the call display portion 623a. A part of the lamp housing 621a is cut out to expose the call display portion 623. The call display unit 623a is formed of a transparent transparent resin that is milky white or diamond-cut, and allows the light of the LED 625 mounted on the LED substrate 624 built in the call lamp unit 620a to pass through.
By mounting the lamp housing portion 621a of the calling lamp portion 620a on the platform information display device Ka integrated with the work door as described above, the employee MS can easily lift the work door upward and also the player MS. It was easier for M to grab and get up. Further, since the gripping portion has a cylindrical shape, it is easy to grip. Further, by mounting the call lamp portion 620a in the horizontal direction on the platform information display device Ka, the work door can be easily lifted upward.

A fingerprint reading device 627 for reading a fingerprint is provided at the center of the back surface of the lamp housing 621a. The fingerprint reading device 627 can read a fingerprint at the same time as grasping the call lamp portion 620a. Therefore, the operation of releasing the electronic key and the operation of grasping the call lamp portion 620a and raising the platform information display device Ka upward can be simultaneously processed, so that the employee can proceed with the work promptly.
A fingerprint authentication board 628 connected to the fingerprint reader 627, a touch sensor board 626, and an LED board 624 on which an LED 625 is mounted are provided inside the lamp housing 621a. Each of these boards is controlled by a table information control board 601.

The touch sensor substrate 626 connected to the metal lamp housing 621a uses a capacitance touch sensor or a photoelectric photosensor to determine whether a human hand touches the lamp housing 621a. Alternatively, a person can hold the hand over to control lighting of the call display portion 623a.
In this way, since it is a simple operation that only a person touches, the call display section 623a can be turned on at the same time when the call lamp section 620a is gripped. The operation for turning on the light and the operation for canceling the turning on are quick and easy.
In particular, the elderly player M can hold the call lamp unit 620a and simultaneously turn on and off the call display unit 623a when the player M stands up. Further, the employee MS can perform an operation of turning off the call display unit 623a at the same time as an operation of opening/closing the platform information display device Ka.

The LED board 624 built in the call lamp section 620a can control the LED 625 to emit red light or the like in accordance with a signal from the touch sensor board 626, and can be controlled by various patterns such as blinking and lighting. Then, by making the call display section 623 blink or light, it is possible to make a notification for calling the employee MS.
In addition, at the time of a big hit, the function of lighting the call display portion 623 in a rainbow color by the output from the pachinko machine P, and the runner function by the cooperation of the adjacent call lamp portion 620a, the call lamp portion 620a is connected to the call display portion by the beads. It also has a production function such as turning on the part 623.
Although the call lamp section 620a is provided below the table information display device Ka in the present embodiment, it is easy to open and close the table information display device Ka such as the center of the table information display device Ka so that the contents of the liquid crystal display section 610 can be easily seen. If so, the mounting location need not be limited.

<Modification 2>
Next, the structure of Modification 2 of the platform information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 188.
FIG. 187 is a perspective view of the platform information display device Kb of Modification 2 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 188 is a front view of a part of the platform information display device Kb and the pachinko machine P of the modified example 2 as viewed from the front side.

The table information display device Kb is roughly composed of a liquid crystal display unit 610, a housing 611, a calling lamp unit 620b, a hinge 613, and an electronic key holding unit 614.
The same structures and functions as those of the modified example 1 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted. The calling lamp section 620ba which is a different part will be described in detail.
The platform information display device Kb has a plurality of call lamp portions 620b, which are provided side by side in the vertical direction on the platform information display device Kb side.
The platform information display device Kb can provide a space above the pachinko machine P by providing the call lamp portion 620b in the vertical direction to the side, and an accessory or the like is approaching above the pachinko machine P in recent years. However, it is possible to secure a space that does not touch.

Further, since the position where the calling lamp unit 620b is turned on is also deviated from the center position of the pachinko machine P, it is easy for the player M to touch it and turn on and off the calling display unit 623b.
Further, by extending the lower end of the lamp housing portion 621b of the calling lamp portion 620b in a direction closer to the player M, it is easy for the player M to touch and call the call display portion 623b on and off. ing.

In the lighting operation of the LED 625b (not shown), the two call display portions 623b at both ends of the platform information display device Kb are alternately blinked, so that the display is easy to see even from a distance. The position of the call display unit 623b is in the line of sight of the employee MS, and the call display unit 623b extends vertically in a long direction. Since the operation is performed, the display operation looks large and the employee MS is notified easily.
Although the platform information display device Kb is configured to have a lateral dimension of the pachinko machine P, it may be configured to have a lateral width including peripheral devices such as the ball lending machine PT. Further, a dynamic display operation is possible, which makes it easy to notify the employee MS.

<Modification 3>
Next, the structure of Modification 3 of the platform information display device K will be described with reference to 204.
FIG. 204(A) is a front view showing the call lamp section 620c, and FIG. 204(B) is a rear view showing the call lamp section 620c.
The same structures and functions as those of the modified example 1 and the modified example 2 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and will not be described.
The call lamp portion 620c forms a cylindrical metal lamp housing portion 621c. The lamp housing portion 621c is partially cut out at both ends to expose the call display portion 623c. The call display section 623c is made of milk-white or diamond-cut transparent transparent resin, and allows the light of the LED 625 mounted on the LED board 624 (not shown) built in the call lamp section 620c to pass therethrough.
A fingerprint reading device 627c for reading fingerprint authentication is provided at the center of the back surface of the lamp housing 621c. The fingerprint reading device 627c is capable of reading a fingerprint at the same time as grasping the calling lamp section 620c.
Since the two call display portions 623c which are separated from each other at both ends of the large-sized liquid crystal display portion 610 are turned on, the display operation looks large and it is easy to notify the employee MS.

In Modifications 1, 2 and 3, the call lamp units 620a, 620b, 620c are the platform information display device K which is a work door with the liquid crystal display unit 610, but the call lamp unit does not have the liquid crystal display unit 610. A device and a system for displaying the information of the gaming machine in 620 may be used. Further, as shown in FIG. 67, a device and system in which the call lamps 620a, 620b are attached to the work door 895 without the liquid crystal display 610 may be used. In that case, the information display of the gaming machine is a device and system in which it is provided on the upper part of the island facility HS, and as shown in FIG. 67, the platform information display device K is provided on the curtain plate 894 above the gaming machine. It is also possible.
Although the lamp housings 621a, 621b, and 621c have a circular cross section in Modifications 1, 2 and 3, they may have an elliptical shape or a quadrangular shape as long as they are easy to grip as a handle.

(Display control of platform information display device)
Regarding the display control regarding the modified example 1 and the modified example 2 of the platform information display device K, referring to FIGS. 189 to 203, since the modified example 1 and the modified example 2 show the same display contents, the platform information display of the modified example 1 is shown. The device Ka will be described as an example. 189 to 193 are front views showing a state in which a plurality of platform information display devices Ka of Modification 1 are arranged on the island facility HS and information is displayed. 194 to 196 are explanatory diagrams showing a state in which information is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610 of the platform information display device Ka of the first modification. FIG. 197 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the platform information display device Ka of the first modification. FIG. 198 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of platform information display data 644 used when controlling the platform information display device Ka of the first modification. FIG. 199 is a sequence diagram when controlling the platform information display device Ka of the first modification. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing a manual display process when controlling the platform information display device Ka of the first modification. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing a manual transmission process when controlling the platform information display device Ka of the first modification. 202 and 203 are explanatory diagrams showing a state in which information is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610 of the platform information display device Ka of the first modification.

FIG. 197 shows a block diagram of the platform information display device Ka. The platform information display device Ka is mainly controlled by the platform information control board 601. The platform information display device Ka has a built-in CPU, ROM, RAM and SSD, and includes an electronic key holding unit 614, a transparent liquid crystal display substrate 612, a fingerprint reading device 627, a fingerprint authentication substrate 628, an LED substrate 624 and a touch sensor substrate 626. Have control.
The platform information control board 601 is finally connected to the hall computer 90 via the platform computer 93. Information displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610 and maintenance information to be described later are transmitted from the hall computer 90 to the platform information control board 601. The platform information control board 601 is connected to the transparent liquid crystal display board 612 that controls the liquid crystal display screen 891. Further, the platform information control board 601 is also connected to the fingerprint reading device 627 of the calling lamp unit 620a, the fingerprint authentication board 628, the LED board 624, and the touch sensor board 626.

As shown in FIG. 189, each individual platform information display device Ka displays information about the gaming machine such as the number of jackpots and the number of starts on the liquid crystal display unit 610. As the background of the liquid crystal display unit 610, the fishes swimming in the sea are displayed as effects over the plurality of platform information display devices Ka. These effect displays are controlled by the platform information control board 601 in which the neighboring platform computers 93 are connected to each other so that the neighboring platform computers 93 cooperate with each other. In addition, it is possible to display an advertisement of a plurality of platform information display devices Ka installed in the island facility HS by the platform information control board 601 in cooperation with each other. In this way, the entire screen of the island facility becomes a large screen, and it is possible to display an impact as an advertisement display.
As shown in FIG. 190, not only the notification by the calling lamp unit 620a but also the notification by the liquid crystal display unit 610 that an employee is called is possible.

<Control of error display and processing method display of each device>
Next, with reference to FIG. 191 to FIG. 201, a sequence diagram and a flow chart for controlling display related to a display when a device such as a game machine or a ball lending machine PT installed in an island facility HS has an error due to a trouble and a coping method. And an explanatory diagram.

First, the manual display process (S3430) as shown in FIGS. 199 and 200 will be described. When an error occurs in the target device (pachinko machine P, ball lending machine PT, ball polishing machine 401, separator 410, etc.), the target device goes through the platform computer 93 or directly to the platform information display device Ka. An error code is sent to the platform information control board 601. Alternatively, when the employee MS notices, it is possible to call the manual display by transmitting the error code 646 from the remote controller of the platform information control board 601 or the above-mentioned portable terminal device 40 (S3466). When the platform information display device Ka receives the error code 646 (YES in S3431), the platform information display device Ka confirms the history whether the same error code 646 was transmitted (S3432). When the same error code 646 is stored in the history (YES in S3433), the platform information display device Ka displays the coping method on the liquid crystal display unit 610 (S3434).

If the same error code 646 is not stored in the history (NO in S3433), the platform information display device Ka queries the hall computer 90 for the error code 646 (S3438). Upon receiving the manual data 649 from the hall computer 90 (S3438), the platform information display device Ka stores the manual data 649 (S3439) and displays the manual of the coping method on the liquid crystal display unit 610 (S3434). The platform information display device Ka displays the coping method on the liquid crystal display unit 610 (NO in S3435, S3434) until a cancellation signal of the error code 646 is received from the target device or the employee's remote controller or the like (YES in S3435). . When the platform information display device Ka receives the cancellation signal of the error code 646 from the target device or the remote controller of the employee (YES in S3435), the platform information display device Ka transmits an end signal to the hall computer 90 (S3436). Further, the platform information display device Ka simultaneously transmits the target device code 645 and the platform number data 648 of the platform information display device Ka to the hall computer 90 together with the end signal.

Next, the manual transmission process (S3440) as shown in FIGS. 199 and 201 will be described. The hall computer 90 waits until an inquiry about the error code 646 is received from the platform information display device Ka (NO in S3441), and when the inquiry is received from the platform information display device Ka (YES in S3441), the error code 646 is output. After confirming (S3442), the manual data 649 is transmitted to the platform information display device Ka (S3443).
The hall computer 90 stands by until an end signal is sent from the platform information display device Ka (NO in S3444), and when the end signal is received from the platform information display device Ka (YES in S3444), as an example of a record of transmission and reception. The platform information display data 644 shown in FIG. 198 is recorded (S3445).

FIG. 198 shows an example of the stand information display data 644. The platform information display data 644 is recorded in the hall computer 90, and includes the event code 644, the target device code 645, the error code 646, the occurrence time data 647, the platform number data 648 of the platform information display device Ka, and the manual data 649 described above. Etc. are recorded. In this way, the previous record can be called at any time to display the manual, and the manual data 649 can be customized independently.
The stored manual data 649 includes data created independently and data obtained by downloading a manual for repair or the like from the manufacturer of each device including the pachinko machine P or the like from the manufacturer's home page via the Internet.

194 to 196 show examples of the manual display 640 displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610 of the platform information display device Ka under the control described above.
FIG. 194 shows a manual display 640 displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610 of the platform information display device Ka when the upper tank of the pachinko machine P is not replenished with the pachinko balls Q. The manual display 640 shows a target device simulation display 634 as a display simulating the target device so that an employee MS who is unfamiliar with the device can easily understand it. In the manual display 640, the target device simulation display 634 includes an error location display 635 indicating an abnormality at a location corresponding to the error code 646. In this case, the position of the upper tank of the pachinko machine P and a coping method such as "Open and close the platform information display device and shake the bellows."

FIG. 195 shows a manual display 640 displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610 of the table information display device Ka when a bill cannot be inserted into the bill collecting device of the ball lending machine PT. The manual display 640 represents a target device simulation display 634A as a display simulating the target device so that an employee MS unfamiliar with the device can easily understand it. The target device simulation display 634A shows an error location display 635A indicating an error at a location corresponding to the error code 646. In this case, the position of the bill collecting device of the ball lending machine PT and the coping method such as "Open the pachinko machine P and take out the ball lending machine to check the bill collecting portion."

FIG. 196 shows a manual display 640 displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610 of the platform information display device Ka when a pachinko ball is not paid out as a prize ball from the payout device of the pachinko machine P. The manual display 640 represents a target device simulation display 634B as a display simulating the target device so that an employee MS unfamiliar with the device can easily understand it. Then, the target device simulation display 634B shows an error location display 635B indicating an error at a location corresponding to the error code 646. In this case, the position of the dispensing device of the pachinko machine P and "1. Open the pachinko machine and check for clogging of the dispensing device on the back side." "2. Turn off the power and unlock the dispensing device. Please clear the blockage of." The platform information display device Ka also displays an additional position display 638B that shows the shape of the dispensing device so that even an employee MS who is unfamiliar with the equipment can understand the details, and an operation position display that displays the lock operation position for unlocking. The position 638B is displayed.

The additional position display 638B, the operation position display position 638B, or the display of the coping method of “1....”, “2.. It is also possible to display "1..." And "2...." according to the procedure for performing the work. If displayed in accordance with the procedure, even an employee MS unfamiliar with the device can make the work easy to understand with few mistakes, and the trouble can be dealt with quickly. At that time, the display may be switched in order by a remote controller or the like, or the order may be automatically switched at a constant interval for display. Further, it is possible to switch the order of the work procedure by sending a signal from each device such as a game machine.

Next, when the ball lending machine PT or the pachinko machine P is fed from the separator 410 via the supply bellows (411, 412), the fact that the supply bellows (411, 412) or the like is clogged up is determined to be the ball lending machine PT or the pachinko machine P. An example of displaying the clogging point when is detected will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 193.
The liquid crystal display unit 610 of the table information display device Ka is equipped with the liquid crystal display screen 891 whose rear surface can be transmitted under the control as described above, and the transparent liquid crystal display substrate 612 allows a part or all of the liquid crystal display screen 891 to be displayed. It is possible to control the transparency and display the object on the back side.
As shown in FIG. 191, the liquid crystal display unit 610 is shown by making a part of the liquid crystal display unit 610 transparent. The liquid crystal display unit 610 is provided with an error part display 630 in which the actual separator 410 on the back surface is surrounded by a shape such as a red circle to make the inside transparent. The error location display 630 is provided with a confirmation display portion 631 indicated by a red circle so that the employee MS can easily understand it. In this way, the employee MS can easily display the actual abnormal portion without opening and closing the platform information display device Ka, and thus the processing can be performed quickly.

As shown in FIG. 192, the liquid crystal display unit 610 includes not only the separator 410 that makes the entire surface of the liquid crystal display unit 610 transparent and becomes the actual error location display 630 on the back surface, but also the supply bellows (411, 412). The whole can be displayed.
As described above, the employee MS can confirm at a glance which one of the plurality of platform information display devices Ka has the abnormal back surface without opening or closing the platform information display device Ka. Further, since the minimum number of jackpots and the number of starts are displayed as the information on the gaming machine, the player M can confirm the information on the gaming machine regardless of trouble.
As described above, when all or part of the liquid crystal display unit 610 is made transparent and an actual abnormal place is displayed, the manual display unit 640 and the error place display 630 are simultaneously displayed on the same liquid crystal display unit 610. By doing so, since the employee MS can confirm the abnormal point and the coping method at the same time, even the employee MS who is unfamiliar with the equipment can easily understand the abnormal point and the work procedure, and quickly deal with the trouble. It can be carried out.

As shown in FIG. 193, in the liquid crystal display unit 610, the entire surfaces of the plurality of liquid crystal display units 610 are made transparent, and not only the separator 410 that becomes the actual error location display 630 on the back surface but also the supply bellows (411, 412). The whole can be displayed including.
As described above, the employee MS can confirm at a glance which one of the plurality of platform information display devices Ka has the abnormal back surface without opening and closing the platform information display device Ka. Further, it is possible to inspect whether or not there is any abnormality after the store is closed without opening and closing the platform information display device Ka.

Next, as another function of the liquid crystal display unit 610, FIGS. 202 and 203 show a function of moving a display portion of information displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610.
FIGS. 202(A) and 202(B) show how to move the position for displaying the number of jackpots. The liquid crystal display unit 610 can operate the display screen as a touch panel by a capacitance type or photoelectric type photo sensor type. As shown in FIG. 202(A), the jackpot count display unit 641 can be moved to the position shown in FIG. 202(B) by touching and moving it with the hand ha.

Further, although a picture of “octopus” is described in the background pattern 642, the jackpot count display portion 641 is arranged in an upper position in preference to the background pattern 642, and the background pattern 642 moves below the empty area. In addition to moving in this manner, the jackpot count display portion 641 can be set in preference to the background pattern 642 by setting the jackpot count display portion 641 in a higher layer. As described above, the jackpot number display portion 641 can be set with priority to the background pattern 642, so that the information desired by the player M can be displayed in an easy-to-see manner.
When viewed from below, the player M seated on the chair C has game information such as the number of jackpots displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610 due to the projecting accessory or lamp display unit at the top of the pachinko machine P. When it cannot be confirmed, the position of the jackpot number display unit 641 is moved upward to make it easier to confirm the game information.

As shown in FIG. 203(A), the manual display portion 640 can be moved to the position shown in FIG. 203(B) by touching and moving it with the hand ha.
When the employee MS sitting on the chair C and solving the trouble of the game machine or the like is too close to or too far from the bottom when the manual display unit 640 is difficult to see, the manual display is performed. It is possible to freely move the portion 640 vertically and horizontally. With the above-described configuration, by changing the manual display unit 640 to a position where it is easy to see, the employee MS can easily see the manual and can easily work while looking at the manual.

Further, although a picture of “octopus” is described in the background pattern 642, the manual display portion 640 is arranged at an upper position in preference to the background pattern 642, and the background pattern 642 moves to below the empty area. In addition to moving in this way, the manual display unit 640 can be set in priority to the background pattern 642 by setting the manual display unit 640 in an upper layer. By thus setting the background pattern 642 of the manual display unit 640 with priority over the background pattern 642, the information desired by the employee MS can be displayed in an easy-to-see manner.

In addition to the jackpot count display section 641 and the manual display section 640, operation buttons for turning on the notification function of the call lamp 620 are displayed on the liquid crystal display section 610, and the setting position of the operation button can be moved. Is. In this way, when the operation button is difficult to press due to the protruding accessory or lamp display section on the upper part of the pachinko machine P, the player M changes the setting position of the operation button and sets it to a position where it is easy to press. It is possible to change.

(Counting unit)
The counting unit 805 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69. The ball lending machine PT is provided at the bottom with a counting unit 805 capable of receiving a pachinko ball (game medium) acquired by the player M from the lower plate of the pachinko machine P and counting it by a counter 806. The ball lending machine PT counts the number of balls counted by the counting counter 806 as a possessed ball, and displays the number of balls currently stored by the possessed ball number display unit 802d.
The counting unit 805 has a rectangular box-shaped accommodation section provided below the lower plate of the pachinko machine. The pachinko balls accommodated in the accommodating section are accommodated in the lower part of the ball lending machine PT through the counting passage section communicating with the accommodating section, and the pachinko balls accommodated are counted by the counting counter 806. In addition, the counted pachinko balls can be used when playing games as possessed balls, and can be paid out from the pachinko machine P by operating the ball lending machine PT.

(Modification of counting unit)
A modified example of the counting unit 805 will be described, but the same reference numerals are given to the portions having the same structure.
<Modification 1>
Next, the structure of the first modification of the counting unit 805 will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 to 210.
FIG. 205 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit 805a of Modification 1 is mounted on the ball lending machine PT. FIG. 206 is a perspective view showing a counting unit 805a according to the first modification. FIG. 207 is a perspective view showing the counting unit 805a of the first modification. FIG. 208 is a side view showing the counting unit 805a of the first modification. FIG. 209 is a plan view showing the counting unit 805a according to the first modification. FIG. 210 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AB of the counting unit 805a according to the first modification shown in FIG.

FIG. 205 shows a state in which the ball lending machine PT attached to the pachinko machine P is equipped with the counting unit 805a. The counting unit 805a is arranged below the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P. The lower tray 857 is provided with a lower tray storage portion 858 which is a space for temporarily storing the pachinko balls acquired by the pachinko machine P. The lower plate 857 is provided with a lower plate opening portion 856 that is opened in a circular shape in order to further flow the stored pachinko balls into the storage portion 710 of the counting unit 805a. The lower plate opening 856 is normally closed by a lower plate shutter 859. Further, when the number of pachinko balls is counted from the lower plate 857, the lower plate opening portion 856 is opened by sliding the lower plate shutter 859 to the left and right, and the pachinko balls are dropped into the housing portion 710.

Next, the counting unit 805a will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 to 210. The counting unit 805a is roughly composed of a housing portion 710, a counting passage portion 720a, a lock mechanism portion 730a, a rotation passage portion 740a, and a counting strut portion 750. The details of the storage section 710 and the counting support section 750 will be described later.

First, the counting passage portion 720a has a box-shaped first passage portion 721a whose length can be adjusted in four steps, and a box-shaped second passage portion 721a having a size capable of accommodating the outer shape of the first passage portion 721a. And 722a. The counting passage portion 720a is formed by a box-shaped second passage portion 722a having a size capable of accommodating the outer shape of the first passage portion 721a, so that the counting passage portion 720a can be formed without exposing the pachinko balls to the outside. The length can be adjusted and the pachinko balls can be transported without being mischievous or gotten.
The first passage portion 721a and the second passage portion 722a face the ball lending machine PT from the housing portion 710 in order to receive the pachinko balls from the housing portion 710 and roll the pachinko balls to the ball lending machine PT at a natural gradient. The first passage 725a and the second passage 726a shown in FIG. 210 having a downward slope are provided. The inclination of the first passage 725a and the second passage 726a is preferably about 5% (angle about 2.86 degrees) to 10% (angle about 5.71 degrees).

The first passage portion 721a communicates with the storage portion 710 through a storage portion connection passage 724a that is a box-shaped passage. As shown in FIG. 210, the first passage portion 721a is provided with four adjustment holes 734a on the ceiling surface at regular intervals. The first passage portion 721a and the second passage portion 722a are fixed by fitting the fixing piece 732a protruding from the fixing piece insertion hole 733a into the adjustment hole 734a. The length of the first passage portion 721a can be adjusted in four steps in the first passage portion 721a depending on the position where the fixing piece 732a is inserted.

The second passage portion 722a is provided with a circular cover portion 728a integrally formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the cylindrical rotation passage 741a supported by the counting strut portion 750. The circular cover portion 728a of the second passage portion 722a is provided by cutting out a part thereof and has a structure of rotating around the center line X of the rotation passage portion 740a shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 209, since the rotation angle α1 can rotate up to about 90 degrees, the pachinko machine P can be rotated by moving the first passage portion 721a, the second passage portion 722a, and the housing portion 710. It is possible to easily mount the counting unit 805a when the pachinko machine P is replaced without removing the components of the counting unit 805a when moving the.

Moreover, since the length of the counting unit 805a can be adjusted and rotated as described above, even if the lower tray opening 856 of the lower tray 857 of the pachinko machine P is provided at any position, The counting unit 805a can adjust the center of the accommodating portion 710 to the center of the lower plate 857 of any pachinko machine P by adjusting the length or the angle. Therefore, since the center of the accommodating portion 710 of the counting unit 805a can be aligned with the center position of the lower tray opening 856 of the pachinko machine P, the pachinko ball can be installed without bouncing and spilling. Therefore, the accommodation portion 710 is not affected by the position of the lower tray opening portion 856 of the pachinko machine P lower tray 857, and thus can be formed compactly.

Next, the rotation passage portion 740a is connected to the ball lending machine connection passage 723a that communicates with the lower side of the ball lending machine PT. As shown in FIG. 210, the rotation passage portion 740a has a rotation passage 741a having a space 743a through which a pachinko ball passes inside a columnar shape. The rotation passage portion 740a is provided with a lock mechanism portion 730a above.

The lock mechanism unit 730a includes a key cylinder lock 739a, and a key (not shown) can be inserted to switch between locking and unlocking. In the case of locking, the rotation of the circular cover 728a is fixed. By inserting the fixing pin 738a, which is a piece connected to the key cylinder lock 739a, into the fixing groove 727a provided in the circular covering portion 728a, the rotation of the circular covering portion 728a is fixed.

Further, in the case of locking, a biasing fixing piece 326a, which is a piece connected to the key cylinder lock 739a, fixes the upward and downward movement of the upward biasing means 737a which is formed of a spring, rubber or the like and biases upward. .. Therefore, in the first passage portion 721a and the second passage portion 722a, the fixing piece 732a protruding from the fixing piece insertion hole 733a is fitted into the adjustment hole 734a, and the vertical movement is fixed, so that the length adjustment is not possible. It becomes possible, and the first passage portion 721a and the second passage portion 722a are fixed.
Until the key cylinder lock 739a is unlocked, the fixed piece insertion hole 733a is prohibited from moving up and down. Therefore, the storage unit 710 is moved and the number of pachinko balls brought in from another corner or another store is counted. Such acts can be prohibited. Further, as shown in FIG. 205, a fixed piece cover 735a is provided as a cover for covering the fixed piece 732a so that the fixed piece 732a is not operated by mischief.

As described above, by locking the rotation of the circular cover portion 728a is prohibited, and at the same time, the adjustment of the lengths of the first passage portion 721a and the second passage portion 722a is prohibited. It is possible to prohibit the act of counting the number of pachinko balls brought in, and it is possible to deal with mischief.
Further, since the counting unit 805a can freely rotate and adjust the length up to the pachinko machine P by releasing the lock, the accommodation unit 710 can be adjusted to the center of the drop opening of the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P. This is possible, and it is possible to prevent the pachinko balls from jumping and dropping from the counter unit 805a, and to easily install the pachinko machine P such as replacement.

The lock mechanism section 730a is electrically connected to the ball lending machine PT as shown in FIG. 68, and by adopting an electronic key, the lock mechanism section 730a is operated by the liquid crystal operation unit 801 of the ball lending machine PT. It is possible to lock and unlock the lock 730a. The lock mechanism 730a can be locked and unlocked by an operation from the hall computer 90 in the management area 2 via the interface 808 and the base computer 93.
Further, the lock state detection sensor 744a shown in FIGS. 68 and 210 detects the locked state and the unlocked state of the lock mechanism unit 730a, and the hall computer 90 can grasp the locked state.

<Modification 2>
Next, the structure of the second modification of the counting unit 805 will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 218. FIG. 211 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit 805b of Modification 2 is mounted on the ball lending machine PT. 212 and 213 are perspective views showing a counting unit 805b of the second modification. FIG. 214 is a side view showing the counting unit 805b of the second modification. FIG. 215 is a plan view showing a counting unit 805b of the second modification. FIG. 216 is a cross-sectional view of the counting unit 805b of the second modification shown in FIG. 215 taken along the line C-D-E. FIG. 217 is a perspective view showing the lock mechanism 731b of the counting unit 805b of the second modification. FIG. 218 is a cross-sectional view showing a lock mechanism 731b of the counting unit 805b of the second modification.

FIG. 211 shows a state in which the counting unit 805b is attached to the ball lending machine PT attached to the pachinko machine P. The counting unit 805b is arranged below a lower plate 857 formed in a box shape with an upper opening. The lower tray 857 is provided with a lower tray storage portion 858 which is a space for temporarily storing the pachinko balls acquired by the pachinko machine P. The lower plate 857 is provided with a lower plate opening portion 856 that is opened in a circular shape for allowing the stored pachinko balls to flow into the storage portion 710 of the counting unit 805a. The lower plate opening 856 is normally closed by the lower plate shutter 859, and when counting the pachinko balls from the lower plate 857, it is opened by sliding the lower plate shutter 859 to the left and right, and is stored in the housing portion 710. A pachinko ball is falling.

Next, the counting unit 805b will be described with reference to FIGS. The counting unit 805b is roughly composed of a housing portion 710, a counting passage portion 720b, a lock mechanism portion 730b, a rotation mechanism portion 770b, a connection passage portion 741b, and a counting strut portion 750. The details of the storage section 710 and the counting support section 750 will be described later.

First, as shown in FIGS. 211 to 215, the counting passage portion 720b is formed in a substantially S shape from the accommodating portion 710 to the ball lending machine PT, and has a hollow shape so that a pachinko ball can pass inside. And an enclosed arcuate passage is formed. The counting passage portion 720b is composed of an enclosed arc-shaped first passage portion 721b, a second passage portion 722b, and a third passage portion 723b. Further, in order to receive the pachinko balls from the accommodating portion 710 and roll the pachinko balls to the ball lending machine PT with a natural gradient, the slope of the downward slope from the accommodating portion 710 toward the ball lending machine PT as shown in FIG. 216. 1st passage 725b thru|or 3rd passage 727b which is provided. The inclination of the first passage 725b to the third passage 727b has a gradient of about 5% (angle about 2.86 degrees) to 10% (angle about 5.71 degrees).

As shown in FIG. 216, the first passage portion 721b to the third passage portion 723b have a joint portion 741b having a size that covers the tip of each passage portion (721b to 723b) at the end of each passage portion (721b to 723b). It is provided. As shown in FIG. 216, the joint portion 741b can slide the tips of the passage portions (721b to 723b) within the range of the length L2.
Since the counting passage portion 720b is provided with the joint portion 741b having a size that covers the tip of each passage portion (721b to 723b), the first passage portion 721b to the third passage portion 723b without exposing the pachinko balls to the outside. The length can be adjusted.

As shown in FIGS. 211 to 218, the side walls of the first passage portion 721b to the third passage portion 723b are fixed to the rotation outer peripheral portions 728b and 772b of the lock mechanism portion 730b and the rotation mechanism portion 770b. By rotating the rotating outer peripheral portions 728b and 772b within the range of the length R1 (FIG. 215), the first passage portion 721b to the third passage portion 723b can be slid in the range of the length L2 (FIG. 215). 216).
The first passage portion 721b to the third passage portion 723b formed in the S-shape in this way can form the entire passage compactly. Further, since the counting unit 805b can move by sliding the first passage portion 721b to the third passage portion 723b along the arc, not only the length but also the angle can be adjusted at the same time, so various pachinko machines can be used. It is also possible to install the accommodating portion 710 at the center of the lower tray opening 856 of the lower tray 857 of P.

The lock mechanism portion 730b adopts the key cylinder lock 739b of the above-described mechanism (739a in FIG. 210), and the rotation of the rotation outer peripheral portions 728b and 772b is fixed by operating a key (not shown).
Further, as shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the rotation mechanism portion 770b is composed of a rotation outer peripheral portion 772b and a rotation support portion 771b. The rotating outer peripheral portion 772b can rotate around the central axis of the rotating column portion 771b. Eight inner circumferential projecting claws 778b projecting from the inner circumferential side toward the center are circumferentially arranged inside the rotating outer circumferential portion 772b. The inner peripheral protruding claws 778b come into contact with the tips of the eight outer peripheral protruding claws 773b provided on the rotary strut portion 771b, rotate the rotating outer peripheral portion 772b with a little resistance, and get over the tips of the outer peripheral protruding claws 773b. While moving.

As shown in FIGS. 68, 217, and 218, the tip of the fixed claw 775b moves forward and backward, so that the tip of the rotating outer peripheral portion 772b is pushed out beyond the tip of the outer peripheral projecting claw 773b and cannot reach the position where it can get over. It moves and the rotation of the rotation outer peripheral portion 772b is fixed.
The fixed claw 775b is fixed by a support shaft 776 inside the rotary column 771b, and has a structure in which one end of the fixed claw 775b moves back and forth by rotationally moving around the support shaft. Further, the other end of the fixed claw 775b is connected to a guide piece 777b connected to the solenoid SO, and in conjunction with the movement of the solenoid SO, one end of the fixed claw 775b moves back and forth.

As described above, the rotation mechanism portion 770b has a structure in which the fixing claw 775b projects and the rotation of the rotation outer peripheral portion 772b is fixed by the vertical movement of the solenoid SO electrically connected as shown in FIG. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 68, power is supplied from the ball lending machine PT, and when the lock state detection sensor 744a (FIGS. 68 and 210) detects the rotation operation of the key of the lock mechanism unit 730b, the solenoid is operated. It is possible to operate SO to fix the rotation of the rotation outer peripheral portion 772b. Further, the operation can be performed not only from the ball lending machine PT but also from the hall computer, the operation from the platform information display device K, or the operation using the remote controller.
As described above, since it is possible to easily perform the operation of fixing the rotation of the rotating outer peripheral portion 772b with respect to the change of the position of the accommodation portion 710 of the counting unit 805b, it is possible to change the installation position of the accommodation portion 710 to change the position of the other corners. It is possible to prohibit the act of counting the number of pachinko balls brought in from another store, which makes it easier to deal with mischief and the like, and also makes it easier to install the pachinko machine P when it is replaced.

The rotating outer peripheral portion 772b is mounted above the rotating base 774b, but the rotating outer peripheral portion 772b is attached to the rotating strut 771b by attaching and detaching parts (773b and the like) above the rotating base 774b. It has a structure that can be inserted and installed.

<Modification 3>
Next, the structure of the third modification of the counting unit 805 will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 to 225. FIG. 219 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit 805c of Modification 3 is mounted on the pachinko machine P. FIG. 220 is an enlarged perspective view of the counting unit 805c of the third modification mounted on the pachinko machine P. 221: is a perspective view which shows the counting unit 805c of the modification 3. FIG. FIG. 222 is a perspective view showing a state where the counting unit 805c of Modification 3 is disassembled. FIG. 223 is a perspective view showing a counting unit 805c of the third modification. FIG. 224 is a plan view showing a counting unit 805c according to Modification 3. 225(A) shows a cross section of the counting passage portion 720c taken along line FG of FIG. 224, and FIG. 225(B) shows the first passage 727c viewed from the left side surface of FIG. 225(A). A front view is shown and FIG. 225(C) is a layout view of the first passage portion 721c. FIG. 225(D) shows a state where the first passage portion 721c is bent to the left and right, and a state where the first passage portion 721c is bent to the left and right is shown by a broken line.

The counting unit 805c is roughly composed of a lower plate cover portion 760, a housing portion 710, a counting passage portion 720c, and a rotation passage portion 740c. The details of the housing portion 710 will be described later.

First, the lower plate cover portion 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 to 223. The lower plate cover portion 760 includes a lower plate cover 761 that matches the shape of the lower plate 857, a housing portion cover 762, a first connecting portion 763, and a second connecting portion 764.
FIG. 219 and FIG. 220 show a state in which the counting unit 805c is attached to the ball lending machine PT attached to the pachinko machine P. The lower plate cover 761 is arranged above the lower plate 857 which is formed in a box shape having an upper opening. The lower plate cover 761 is formed in a square shape according to the shape of the lower plate 857 formed in a square shape when viewed from above.
By making the lower plate cover 761 in conformity with the shape of the lower plate 857, it becomes impossible to put the pachinko balls into the lower plate 857, and it is possible to prevent the act of bringing in and counting the pachinko balls. . The lower plate cover 761 is formed slightly larger than the lower plate 857 so that it can be easily attached to the lower plate 857.
The material of the lower dish cover 761 may be resin, metal, or the like, but is not particularly limited, and it is possible to confirm whether the pachinko balls are ejected from the pachinko machine P by forming it with a transparent resin.

The accommodating section cover 762 covers the gap between the accommodating section 710 and the lower plate 857, and at the same time connects the lower plate cover 761 and the accommodating section 710. The housing cover 762 is formed to match the shape of the side surface of the lower plate 857. The housing cover 762 is formed in consideration of a position and a size at which the lower plate shutter 859 provided on the lower plate 857 can slide to the left and right.
The housing cover 762 has a lower plate cover 761 fixed to the upper side and a second connecting part 764 fixed to the side surface. The material of the housing cover 762 is not limited, and may be soft urethane or hard resin. A key cylinder lock 765 into which a key (not shown) can be inserted is provided at the upper end of the second connecting portion 764.

The first connecting portion 763 is fixed to the side surface of the housing portion 710, and the connecting portion fitting portion 766 is provided at the upper end. The connecting portion fitting portion 766 can be inserted into the lower end of the second connecting portion 764 and fitted together. Then, by operating the key cylinder lock 765 of the second connecting portion 764, the fitting cannot be released. In this way, since it is possible to integrally fix and lock the lower plate cover 761 to the housing portion 710, it becomes impossible to insert the pachinko balls into the lower plate 857 and the housing portion 710, and the pachinko balls are brought in. It is possible to prevent the act of counting. Further, since it is locked, the lower dish cover 761 and the accommodating section cover 762 cannot be easily attached/detached, which also prevents mischief or goto.
Further, since the housing portion 710 can fix the housing portion 710 in close contact with the lower tray 857 of the pachinko machine P by integrally fixing the lower tray cover 761 to the housing portion 710, the pachinko machine can be fixed. It is possible to prevent the ball from bouncing and dropping from the housing portion 710.
The lower plate cover portion 760 can be applied not only to the modified example 3 but also to the modified examples 1 and 2.

Next, the counting passage portion 720c will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 225. The counting passage portion 720c includes a first passage portion 721c and a second passage portion 722c.
The first passage portion 721c communicates with the housing portion 710 through a housing portion connection passage 724c that is a box-shaped passage.
The first passage portion 721c is connected to a plurality of first passages 727c formed in a conical shape and open at both ends. The first passage 727c has a conical shape in which the front end on the second passage 722c side is narrowed and the rear end is widened. The first passage 727c is provided with a shaft support pin 729c at the top and bottom, and the shaft support pin 729c is pivotally supported in a hole provided in the middle portion of the other first passage 727c. In this way, by axially viewing at two points, it is possible to freely move left and right with the pivot pin 729c as a fulcrum. Therefore, the first passage portion 721c can be bent finely with a right angle and a left angle (FIG. 225(D)).

In addition, the first passage portion 721c is provided below with two guide passages 728c formed of a material such as a bendable metal or resin that straddles a plurality of first passages 727c. The guide passage 728c is provided in a rail shape so that the pachinko balls can roll to the second passage portion 722c, and the inclination of the guide passage 728c is 5% (angle about 2.86 degrees) to 10% (angle about 5). It is formed with a gradient of about .71 degrees. Further, the guide passage 728c can be bent according to the bending of the first passage portion 721c.
In this way, since the first passage portion 721c can be bent to the left and right, when the accommodation portion 710 is installed, the accommodation portion 710 is installed at the center of the lower tray opening portion 856 of the lower trays 857 of various pachinko machines P. It is also possible to do.

The second passage portion 722c, one end of which communicates with the first passage portion 721c, is a cylindrical passage, and the other end thereof is connected to the rotation passage portion 740c. The rotation passage portion 740c communicates with the lower side of the ball lending machine PT, and the pachinko balls that have passed through the rotation passage portion 740c are counted inside the ball lending machine PT. Further, the rotation passage portion 740c can rotate and move the first passage portion 721c, the second passage portion 722c, and the housing portion 710 by adopting the same structure as the rotation passage portion 740a (FIG. 210).
By rotationally moving the first passage portion 721c, the second passage portion 722c and the housing portion 710, when moving the pachinko machine P, without removing the parts of the counting unit 805c except the lower dish cover portion 760, When the pachinko machine P is replaced, the counting unit 805c can be easily attached.

<Modification example of accommodating portion in counting unit>
The accommodating portion 710 of the modified example of the counting unit 805 will be described. The same reference numerals will be given to the portions having the same structures in the modified examples 1 to 3 described above. The accommodating portion 710 described below can be applied to Modifications 1 to 3 without mentioning it.
226 and 227 are cross-sectional views showing the accommodating portion 710 of the counting units 805a to 805c according to the modification. FIG. 228 is a plan view showing the accommodating portion 710 of the counting units 805a to 805c according to the modification. FIG. 229 is a plan view showing a state in which the pachinko balls Q roll in the accommodating portions 710 of the counting units 805a to 805c according to the modification.

The accommodation portion 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 and 207 and FIGS. 226 to 229. The accommodating portion 710 is formed in a shape in which a cylindrical upper end is opened, and accommodates a pachinko ball Q falling from the lower tray opening portion 856 of the pachinko machine P. The inside of the accommodation portion 710 is formed in a circular shape, and the pachinko ball Q can be guided in an arc shape by forming the inside thereof in a circular shape, so that the pachinko ball Q can be guided in a spiral shape. The shape is easy.
The accommodating portion 710 is provided with a first receiving portion 714, a second receiving portion 715, a third receiving portion 716, and a fourth receiving portion 717, which are formed by being divided into four equal parts when seen in a plan view. The 1st receiving part 714 becomes low with the 2nd receiving part 715, the 3rd receiving part 716, and the 4th receiving part 717 in order of the highest, and the 1st receiving part 714, the 2nd receiving part 715, the 3rd receiving part 716, and A step is provided between the fourth receiving portion 717 and the third receiving portion 716 and the fourth receiving portion 717 so that the pachinko ball Q can be easily received.

As shown in FIG. 227, in the first receiving portion 714 and the second receiving portion 715, the first receiving portion 714 is higher, and the first receiving portion 714 and the second receiving portion 715 have an angle of about 2.85 degrees. A slope is provided. The first receiving portion 714 and the second receiving portion 715 are provided with a downward slope of about 2.85 degrees from the outside toward the third receiving portion 716 and the fourth receiving portion 717, respectively.
Further, below the first receiving portion 714, a receiving portion communication port 719 that is connected to the housing portion connecting passage 724 and guides the pachinko balls Q to the housing portion connecting passage 724 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 228, in the third receiving portion 716 and the fourth receiving portion 717, the third receiving portion 716 is high, and the third receiving portion 716 moves toward the fourth receiving portion 717 from about 5 to 6 degrees. There is a slope. Further, a step is provided between the third receiving portion 716 and the fourth receiving portion 717, and is provided in order to reliably guide the pachinko balls Q to the receiving portion passage 718. The receiving passage 718 is provided with a downward slope of about 2.85 degrees toward the receiving communication port 719 in order to guide the pachinko balls Q from the receiving communication port 719 to the housing connecting passage 724.

As described above, the formed accommodating portion 710 receives the pachinko balls Q dropped from the lower tray opening portion 856 of the pachinko machine P and guides them to the receiving portion communication port 719, as shown in FIG. 229.
In FIG. 229, as a state in which the pachinko ball Q rolls, a route LO1 showing a route along which the ball rolls is indicated by a solid line. Further, when the pachinko balls Q fall into the accommodating portion 710, as the directions in which the pachinko balls Q roll, the rolling direction RA1 of the first receiving portion 714, the rolling direction RA2 of the second receiving portion, and the third receiving portion. The rolling direction RA3 and the rolling direction RA4 of the fourth receiving portion are indicated by solid arrows.

In this way, the pachinko ball Q rolls while drawing a spiral according to the inclination of the accommodating portion 710, so that the pachinko ball Q can be clogged because it is smoothly guided to the receiving portion communication port 719 while being aligned over time. Instead, the accommodating portion 710 itself can be compactly molded in order to arrange the pachinko balls Q three-dimensionally. Further, there is an advantage that the pachinko balls Q can be surely guided by the steps provided in the housing portion 710. Furthermore, since the pachinko ball Q can be guided in an arc shape by forming the inside of the housing portion 710 in a circular shape, the ball can be guided in a spiral shape easily.
As described above, since the accommodating portion 710 itself can be formed compactly, it is possible to install the accommodating portion 710 at the center of the lower tray opening portion 856 of the lower tray 857 of various pachinko machines P.
A shock absorbing material may be attached to the surfaces of the first to fourth receiving portions 714 to 717 of the accommodating portion 710 in order to suppress the impact and vibration of the pachinko balls Q. With such a structure, it is possible to prevent the pachinko balls Q from jumping up and from being deteriorated due to the impact of the resin or metal of the housing portion 710.

Next, the counting support 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 227 and 228. Although the structure of the counting strut 750 is adopted in Modifications 1 and 2, it may be used not only in the housing 710 but also in the lock mechanisms 730a and 730b and the rotation mechanism 770b.
The counting support part 750 is provided with a circular base part 757 to be mounted on a counter provided in the island facility HS. The base portion 757 is provided with a cylindrical spring accommodation portion 755, and the spring 753 is incorporated inside the spring accommodation portion 755. Further, the accommodating portion 710 is provided with a cylindrical foot portion 712 that is one size larger than the spring accommodating portion 755, and can be fitted with the spring accommodating portion 755. Further, the accommodation portion 710 is provided with a cylindrical spring support 754 that can be inserted into the inner diameter of the spring 753 at the center of the accommodation portion 710. The spring support 754 has a function of not falling off from the spring 753.

As described above, since the housing portion 710 is constantly urged toward the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P by the spring 753 incorporated in the counting strut unit 750, Become. With such a structure, it is possible to prevent the pachinko ball Q from dropping from the splashing and accommodating portion 710.

Further, a lower plate contact portion 711 formed of elastic rubber (silicon rubber or the like) is provided around the upper portion of the housing portion 710. The lower plate contact portion 711 has a function as a cushioning material between the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P and the accommodating part 710, and biases the accommodating part 710 to the pachinko machine P side to cause the pachinko machine P to move. Can be in close contact. With such a structure, the lower plate abutting portion 711 does not damage the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P even when the housing portion 710 is brought into close contact with the pachinko machine P, so that the close contact with the pachinko machine P is improved. You can Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko balls Q from dropping from the housing portion 710 due to jumping.

<Modification 4>
Next, a modified example 4 of the counting unit 805 will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 to 243. FIG. 230 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit 805d of Modification 4 is mounted on the ball lending machine PT. FIG. 231 is a plan view showing a counting unit 805d of Modification 4. FIG. 232 is a perspective view of the counting unit 805d in the modification 4 showing how the pachinko ball Q is returned from the ball lending machine PT to the return tray 780d. FIG. 233 is a perspective view showing the counting unit 805d in which the accommodating portion 710d and the counting passage portion 720d are cut by the line LM shown in FIG. FIG. 234 is an enlarged perspective view of a part of the counting unit 805d according to the fourth modification. FIG. 235 is a perspective view showing a state in which a part of the counting unit 805d of Modification 4 is enlarged and the pachinko balls Q are returned. FIG. 236 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko ball Q rolls by enlarging a part of the counting unit 805d of Modification 4. FIG. 237 is a side view of the counting unit 805d of Modification 4 showing how the pachinko balls Q roll. FIG. 238 is a side view of Modification 4 showing how the pachinko balls Q roll. FIG. 239 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko balls Q of the counting unit 805d, which is obtained by cutting the containing portion 710d and the counting passage portion 720d by the O-P line shown in FIG. 231, rolls. FIG. 240 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko balls Q of the counting unit 805d, which is obtained by cutting the containing portion 710d and the counting passage portion 720d by the O-P line shown in FIG. 231, rolls. FIG. 241 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko balls Q of the counting unit 805d, which is obtained by cutting the containing portion 710d and the counting passage portion 720d by the O-P line shown in FIG. 231, rolls. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing an individual count returning process in the counting unit 805d of the fourth modification. FIG. 243 is a schematic diagram showing a switching state of the passages in the counting unit 805d of the fourth modification.

FIG. 230 shows a state in which the counting unit 805b is attached to the ball lending machine PT attached to the pachinko machine P. The counting unit 805d is arranged below a lower plate 857 formed in a box shape having an upper opening. The lower plate 857 is provided with a lower plate housing portion 858 which is a space for temporarily housing the pachinko balls Q acquired by the pachinko machine P. The lower plate 857 is provided with a lower plate opening portion 856 (not shown) that is opened in a circular shape for allowing the stored pachinko balls Q to flow into the storage portion 710 of the counting unit 805a. The lower plate opening 856 is normally closed by the lower plate shutter 859, and when counting the pachinko balls Q from the lower plate 857, the lower plate shutter 859 is slid to the left and right to open, and the accommodating portion. The pachinko ball Q is dropped to 710d, and the pachinko ball Q is counted by the counting counter 806 inside the ball lending machine PT via the counting passage 720d and the ball lending machine communication passage 740d.

As shown in FIGS. 230 to 232, the counting unit 805d is roughly divided into a storage portion 710d, a counting passage portion 720d, a return tray 780d, and a ball lending machine communication passage portion 740d described later.
As shown in FIGS. 231 and 232, the box-shaped accommodation portion 710d receives a large amount of pachinko balls Q, and is provided with a bottom plate 749d that is inclined toward the accommodation portion passage 745d. The bottom plate 749d is provided with a cushioning material such as rubber or urethane in order to absorb the impact from the pachinko balls Q falling from the lower plate 857. Further, the bottom plate 749d is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to about 5 degrees toward the accommodation section passage 745d. The accommodating portion passage 745d forms a groove-like passage for guiding the pachinko balls Q below the bottom plate 749d, and is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to about 5 degrees toward the lower passage 747d. The storage passage 745d communicates with the lower passage 747d of the counting passage 720d.

Next, the counting passage portion 720d will be described with reference to FIGS. 231 to 241.
The counting passage portion 720d has an upper passage 746d and a lower passage 747d as main passages. Each of the upper passage 746d and the lower passage 747d is an enclosed passage and communicates with a ball lending machine communication passage portion 740d described later.
As shown in FIGS. 233, 234 and 239, the upper passage 746d is a passage for guiding the pachinko balls Q from the ball lending machine PT to the return tray 780d. The upper passage 746d connects an upper communication passage 787d communicating with the ball lending machine communication passage portion 740d, and an upper conversion passage 786d for converting the direction of the pachinko ball Q rolling from the upper communication passage 787d and connecting with the return port 748d. It is provided.

The upper connection passage 787d is provided with a downward slope of about 2.85 degrees to about 5 degrees toward the upper conversion passage 786d. Further, the upper conversion passage 786d is provided with a downward slope of about 2.85 degrees to about 5 degrees toward the return port 748d. A step is provided between the upper connecting passage 787d and the upper converting passage 786d, so that the direction of the pachinko balls Q can be easily changed. The return opening 748d has a rectangular opening formed above the return tray 780d.

As shown in FIGS. 233, 234, and 239, the lower passage 747d is a passage for guiding the pachinko balls Q from the housing portion 710d to the ball lending machine PT. The lower passage 747d has one end communicating with the accommodation passage 745d and the other end communicating with the ball lending machine communication passage 740d, and the pachinko balls Q collected from the collection port 783d of the return tray 780d. A lower conversion passage 791d that changes the direction and communicates with the lower communication passage 789d is provided.

The lower connecting passage 789d is provided with a downward slope of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees toward the ball lending machine connecting passage portion 740d. Further, the lower conversion passage 791d is provided with a downward slope of about 2.85 degrees to about 5 degrees from the recovery port 783d to the lower communication passage 789d.
A first step 793d, which is a step that is equal to or slightly larger than the thickness of the movable return passage 784d, is provided between the lower communication passage 789d and the storage passage 745d. By providing the first step 793d, it is possible to guide the pachinko balls Q to the movable return passage 784d without causing the pachinko balls Q to stay.
A second step 799d serving as a step is provided between the lower communication passage 789d and the lower conversion passage 791d. By providing the second step 799d, it is possible to guide the pachinko balls Q to the lower collecting passage 791d without backflowing, and to guide the pachinko balls Q passing through the lower connecting passage 789d without staying.

As shown in FIGS. 233, 238, and 240, the movable return passage 784d is a substantially L-shaped passage, the bent L-shaped passage faces the recovery port 783d, and the long passage is at the bottom. It is provided at a position above the communication passage 789d. The long passage of the movable return passage 784d is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 to 5 degrees along the inclination of the lower communication passage 789d. Further, the L-shaped bent short passage is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to about 5 degrees toward the return tray shutter 782d of the return tray 780d. The movable return passage 784d is formed with a triangular guide piece 792d which is a piece protruding in a substantially triangular shape at the tip facing the lower communication passage 789d. The triangular guiding piece 792d guides the pachinko ball Q rolled from the accommodation passage 745d to the return tray shutter 782d.
The movable return passage 784d has one side surface connected to the movable return passage solenoid SOd so as to be movable up and down. The movable return passage solenoid SOd is fixed to a position that does not interfere with the rolling of the pachinko balls Q in the lower communication passage 789d.
Since the movable return passage 784d can be moved up and down in this way, the lower return passage 789d for counting the pachinko balls Q and the movable return passage 784d for conveying the pachinko balls Q accommodated in the accommodating portion 710d. Since the counting passage portion 720d can be compactly arranged by arranging and above and below, the entire counting unit 805d can be provided compactly.

Next, the return tray 780d will be described with reference to FIGS. 231 to 233. The return tray 780d is a tray for storing the pachinko balls Q returned from the ball lending machine PT and the pachinko balls Q returned from the housing portion 710d. The return tray 780d is fixed to the side surface of the counting passage 720d, and is provided with a storage bowl 781d capable of storing about 30 to 150 pachinko balls Q. The return tray 780d is provided at a position between the housing portion 710 and the ball lending machine PT, unlike the position of the housing portion 710 that houses the pachinko balls Q from the lower tray of the pachinko machine P, so that the return tray 780d is returned from the ball lending machine PT. It is possible to secure a space for accommodating a large number of pachinko balls Q to be played, and at the same time, it is possible to provide a space for accommodating a large amount of pachinko balls from the lower plate 857.
Therefore, since the pachinko balls Q obtained with the pachinko machine P can be temporarily stored in the return dish 780d, a preliminary pachinko machine used when purchasing food or drink with the pachinko machine Q or in the game of the pachinko machine P. It can be used as a storage of balls Q. Especially, it is effective for the pachinko machine P which does not have the lower plate 857 or has a small capacity for storing the pachinko balls.

The storage bowl 781d has a structure in which the inner surface is shaped like a mortar and the pachinko balls Q gather on the bottom surface. Further, on the side surface of the storage bowl 781d, an open recovery port 783d that communicates with the lower conversion passage 791d of the counting passage portion 720d is provided.
Further, the return tray 780d is provided with a return tray shutter 782d formed in the same shape as the recovery port 783d on the bottom. The return dish shutter 782d has a triangular cross-section when viewed from the side, and the rotary solenoid RS connected to the support shaft 785d can change the angle in three steps about the support shaft 785d.
The return tray shutter 782d serves as a shutter for holding the pachinko balls Q stored in the return tray 780d by changing the angle, and returns the pachinko balls Q stored in the return tray 780d to the ball lending machine PT. The role of the passage and the role of the passage for accommodating the pachinko balls Q from the accommodating portion 710d in the accommodating bowl 781 and three functions can be fulfilled.

In this way, by constituting the role of several passages with one member, the entire counting unit 805d can be provided compactly without complication.
Further, by providing the return tray shutter 782d, it is possible to store the pachinko balls Q in the return tray 780d without forming an unnecessary flow of the pachinko balls Q.

The operation when returning or counting the pachinko balls Q will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 243 based on the flowchart of the individual counting return process.
The flowchart shown in FIG. 242 describes the individual count return processing (S3450).
First, when the pachinko balls Q acquired by the pachinko machine P are stored in the return tray 780d (YES in S3451), the rotary solenoid RS connected to the return tray shutter 782d rotates, and the return tray shutter 782d moves to the horizontal line. It moves to the position of the angle α (FIG. 243(A), S3452). At the same time, the movable return passage solenoid SOd is turned on (S3453), and the movable return passage 784d moves downward (FIG. 243(A), S3453). The angle α has an upward inclination of about 2.85 to 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal line (FIG. 243(A)). Therefore, the pachinko balls Q housed in the return tray 780d do not move up, pass through the movable return passage 784d and the return tray shutter 782d, and roll along the slope.

When the return tray shutter 782d and the movable return passage 784d are moved as described above, as shown in FIGS. 234, 238, 240 and 243(A), the return tray shutter 782d and the movable return passage 784d. , The pachinko balls Q roll on the return tray shutter 782d and the movable return passage 784d. In detail, the pachinko ball Q that has passed through the storage portion passage 745d from the storage portion 710d passes through the lowered movable return passage 784d, the direction is changed by the triangular guiding piece 792d, and passes through the return tray shutter 782d to return the return tray. Roll toward 780d.
In this way, the pachinko balls Q acquired by the pachinko machine P can be temporarily stored in the return tray 780d, so that the pachinko balls Q can be used as reserves for purchasing food and drink in the store or for playing the pachinko machine P. It is possible to use it as a storage for a variety of pachinko balls Q. Especially, it is effective for the pachinko machine P without the lower plate 857.

Next, the case of counting the pachinko balls Q accommodated in the return tray 780d will be described. When the pachinko balls Q housed in the return tray 780d are counted by the ball lending machine PT (YES in S3454), the rotary solenoid RS connected to the return tray shutter 782d rotates, and the return tray shutter 782d moves to the horizontal line. It moves to the position of the angle β (FIG. 243(B), S3455). At the same time, the movable return passage solenoid SOd is turned off (S3457), and the movable return passage 784d remains in the upper position (FIG. 243(B), S3457). The angle β has a downward slope of about 2.85 to 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal line (FIG. 243(B)). Therefore, the pachinko balls Q stored in the return tray 780d roll along the inclination of the return tray shutter 782d.

When the return tray shutter 782d moves as described above, the return tray shutter 782d forms a downward slope and is accommodated in the return tray 780d, as shown in FIGS. 233, 236, 241 and 243(B). The pachinko ball Q that is rolling rolls on the return dish shutter 782d. Specifically, the pachinko ball Q on the return tray 780d passes over the return tray shutter 782d, rolls along the slope from the lower conversion passage 791d to the lower communication passage 789d, and passes through the ball lender communication passage portion 740d. It rolls to the ball lending machine PT and is counted.
In this way, the pachinko balls Q housed in the return tray 780d can also be collected and counted by the ball lending machine PT, which is convenient when the game is stopped and the payment is made. Further, even when the pachinko balls Q left by the player M are forgotten, the employee can collect the pachinko balls Q in the island facility HS without opening the pachinko machine P, which facilitates the work and at the same time It is possible to manage the pachinko balls Q that the customer M has forgotten.

Next, the case of counting the pachinko balls Q stored in the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P or the case of returning the pachinko balls Q from the ball lending machine PT to the return plate 780d will be described. When counting the pachinko balls Q accommodated from the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine to the ball lending machine PT (NO in S3454), the rotary solenoid RS connected to the return plate shutter 782d rotates, and the return plate shutter 782d is It moves to a position at an angle γ with respect to the horizontal line (FIG. 243(C), S3456). At the same time, the movable return passage solenoid SOd is turned off (S3457), and the movable return passage 784d remains in the upper position (FIG. 243(C), S3457). The angle γ has an upward inclination of about 30 to 70 degrees with respect to the horizontal line (FIG. 243(C)). Therefore, the pachinko balls Q housed in the return tray 780d do not roll into the lower communication passage 789d because the return tray shutter 782d closes the recovery port 783d.

When the return tray shutter 782d is moved as described above, the return tray shutter 782d is closed and the pachinko ball Q from the ball lending machine PT as shown in FIGS. 235, 237, 239 and 243(C). Rolls on the return tray shutter 782d and is stored in the return tray 780d. Further, the pachinko balls Q on the lower plate 857 roll in the lower communication passage 789d according to the inclination, further pass through the ball lending machine communication passage portion 740d, and roll to the ball lending machine PT to be counted.
In this way, the pachinko balls Q accommodated in the lower plate 857 can also be collected and counted by the ball lending machine PT, which is convenient when counting the acquired pachinko balls Q. In addition, since the pachinko ball Q counted by the ball lending machine PT can be accommodated in the return dish 780d, the player M can use the pachinko ball Q to purchase food or drink in the store or to play the pachinko machine P. It is possible to utilize as a preliminary storage of pachinko balls Q. Especially, it is effective for the pachinko machine P without the lower plate 857.

<Modification 5>
Next, a fifth modified example of the counting unit 805 will be described with reference to FIGS. 244 to 254. FIG. 244 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit 805e of Modification 5 is mounted on the ball lending machine PT. FIG. 245 is a perspective view of the counting unit 805e in the fifth modification showing how the pachinko balls Q are returned from the ball lending machine PT to the return tray 780e. FIG. 246 is a plan view showing a counting unit 805e of the fifth modification. FIG. 247 is a perspective view showing a state in which a part of the counting unit of Modification 5 is enlarged and a pachinko ball is returned. FIG. 248 is a perspective view showing a state in which a pachinko ball is returned by enlarging a part of the counting unit of the modified example 5. FIG. 249 is a perspective view showing a state in which a part of the counting unit of the modified example 5 is enlarged and the pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 250 is a perspective view showing the counting unit 805d in which the accommodating portion 710e and the counting passage portion 720e are cut by the QR line shown in FIG. 246. FIG. 251 is a perspective view showing a state in which a pachinko ball of the counting unit 805e, which is obtained by cutting the containing portion 710e and the counting passage portion 720e by the ST line shown in FIG. 246, rolls. FIG. 252 is a perspective view showing a state in which a pachinko ball of the counting unit 805e, which is obtained by cutting the accommodation portion 710e and the counting passage portion 720e by the ST line shown in FIG. 246, rolls. FIG. 253 is a perspective view showing a state in which a pachinko ball of the counting unit 805e, which is obtained by cutting the containing portion 710e and the counting passage portion 720e by the ST line shown in FIG. 246, rolls. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the return dish return processing in the counting unit 805e of the fifth modification.

FIG. 244 shows a state in which the counting unit 805e is attached to the ball lending machine PT attached to the pachinko machine P. The counting unit 805e is arranged below a lower plate 857 formed in a box shape with an upper opening. The lower plate 857 is provided with a lower plate housing portion 858 which is a space for temporarily housing the pachinko balls Q acquired by the pachinko machine P. The lower plate 857 is provided with a lower plate opening portion 856 (not shown) that is opened in a circular shape for allowing the stored pachinko balls Q to flow into the storage portion 710 of the counting unit 805a. The lower tray opening 856 is normally closed by the lower tray shutter 859, and when counting the pachinko balls Q from the lower tray 857, the lower tray opening 856 is opened by sliding the lower tray shutter 859 to the left and right, and the housing portion 710d. Then, the pachinko ball Q is dropped onto the ball and the pachinko ball Q is counted by the counting counter 806 inside the ball lending machine PT via the counting passage 720d and the ball lending machine communication passage 740d.

As shown in FIGS. 245 and 246, the counting unit 805e is roughly divided into a storage portion 710e, a counting passage portion 720e, a return tray 780e, and a ball lending machine communication passage portion 740e described later.

As shown in FIGS. 245 and 246, the housing portion 710e formed in a box shape accommodates a large amount of pachinko balls Q, and is provided with a bottom plate 749e that is inclined toward the housing portion passage 745e. The bottom plate 749e is provided with a cushioning material such as rubber or urethane in order to absorb the impact from the pachinko balls Q falling from the lower plate 857. Further, the bottom plate 749e is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to about 5 degrees toward the accommodation section passage 745e. The accommodating portion passage 745e forms a groove-like passage for guiding the pachinko balls Q below the bottom plate 749e, and is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to about 5 degrees toward the lower passage 747e. The storage passage 745e communicates with the lower passage 747e of the counting passage 720e.

Next, the counting passage portion 720e will be described with reference to FIGS. 250 to 253.
The counting passage portion 720e has an upper passage 746e and a lower passage 747e as main passages. Each of the upper passage 746e and the lower passage 747e is a passage surrounded by the upper passage 746e and the lower passage 747e, and is in communication with a ball lending machine communication passage portion 740e described later.
The upper passage 746e is a passage for guiding the pachinko ball Q from the ball lending machine PT to the return tray 780e. The upper passage 746e converts the direction of the pachinko balls Q rolling from the upper communication passage 787e that communicates with the ball lending machine communication passage portion 740e, and the movable return passage 784e that is connected to the return opening 748e. Is provided. Further, a side wall portion 779e that changes the rolling direction of the pachinko balls Q toward the return port 748e is provided.

The upper communication passage 787e is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees toward the movable return passage 784e. The L-shaped short passage toward the return opening 748e of the movable return passage 784e is provided with a downward slope of about 2.85 to 5 degrees toward the return opening 748e. Further, a step is provided between the upper communication passage 787e and the movable return passage 784e, so that the direction of the pachinko balls Q can be easily changed and the pachinko balls Q do not flow backward. The return opening 748e has a rectangular opening formed above the return tray 780e.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 250 to 253, the lower passage 747e is a passage for guiding the pachinko balls Q from the housing portion 710e to the ball lending machine PT. The lower passage 747e has one end communicating with the accommodation passage 745e and the other end communicating with the ball lending machine communication passage 740e, and the pachinko balls Q collected from the collection port 783e of the return tray 780e. A lower conversion passage 791e that changes the direction and communicates with the lower communication passage 789e is provided.

The lower connecting passage 789e is provided with a downward slope of about 2.85 to 5 degrees toward the ball lending machine connecting passage 740e. Further, the lower conversion passage 791e is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 to 5 degrees from the return port 748e to the lower communication passage 789e.
A step portion 799e serving as a step is provided between the lower communication passage 789e and the lower conversion passage 791e. By providing the step portion 799e, it is possible to guide the pachinko balls Q to the lower collecting passage 791e without backflowing, and to guide the pachinko balls Q passing through the lower connecting passage 789e without staying.

The movable return passage 784e is a substantially L-shaped passage, the L-shaped bent short passage faces the return opening 748e, and the long passage is provided above the lower communication passage 789e. There is. The movable return passage 784e is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees along the inclination of the lower communication passage 789e. Further, the L-shaped bent short passage is provided with a downward slope of about 2.85 to 5 degrees toward the return tray 780e. The movable return passage 784e is formed with a triangular guide piece 792e which is a piece protruding in a substantially triangular shape at the tip facing the lower communication passage 789e. The triangular guide piece 792e guides the pachinko ball Q that has rolled from the storage passage 745e to the return tray 782e.

As described above, the movable return passage 784e has two functions as a return passage from the lower tray 857 of the pachinko machine P to the return tray 780e and a return passage from the ball lending machine PT to the return tray 780e. It is possible to design the 720e compactly. Therefore, since the device itself can be made compact, the storage capacity of the pachinko balls Q in the return tray 780e can be increased.
One side of the movable return passage 784e is connected to the movable return passage solenoid SOe so that the movable return passage 784e can move up and down. The movable return passage solenoid SOe is fixed to a position that does not hinder the rolling of the pachinko balls Q in the lower communication passage 789e.
In addition, since the movable return passage 784e can be moved up and down in this way, the movable return that conveys the pachinko balls Q stored in the lower communication passage 789e and the storing portion 710e when counting the pachinko balls Q is provided. Since the counting passage portion 720e can be configured compactly by arranging the passage 784e in the upper and lower directions, the entire counting unit 805e can be provided compactly.

Next, the return tray 780e will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 250. The return tray 780e is a tray for storing the pachinko balls Q returned from the ball lending machine PT and the pachinko balls Q returned from the housing portion 710e. The return tray 780e is fixed to the side surface of the counting passage 720e, and is provided with a storage bowl 781e capable of storing about 30 to 150 pachinko balls Q. The return tray 780e is different from the position of the accommodating portion 710 for accommodating the pachinko balls Q from the lower tray of the pachinko machine P, and is provided at a position between the accommodating portion 710 and the ball lending machine PT, so that the return tray 780e is provided in an empty space on the counter. It is possible to secure a space for accommodating a large amount of pachinko balls Q returned from the ball lending machine PT, and at the same time, it is possible to provide a space for accommodating a large amount of pachinko balls from the lower plate 857.
Therefore, the pachinko balls Q acquired by the pachinko machine P can be temporarily stored in the return dish 780e, so that the pachinko balls Q can be used as a preliminary pachinko machine for purchasing food or drink in the store or for playing the pachinko machine P. It can be used as a storage of balls Q. Especially, it is effective for the pachinko machine P without the lower plate 857.

The storage bowl 781e is formed in a semicircular shape in a plan view, and has a mortar-shaped structure in which the pachinko balls Q gather on the bottom surface. In addition, an opening return port 748e that communicates with the upper and lower conversion passages 791e and the upper communication passage 787e of the counting passage portion 720e is provided on the side surface of the storage bowl 781e.
In addition, the return tray 780e is provided with a return tray shutter 782e that closes the return opening 748e on the side surface. The return tray shutter 782e is provided with an operating knob 796e on the upper side surface so that it can be manually moved to the left and right. The return tray shutter 782e moves left and right to close and close the return port 748e. Further, inside the counting passage portion 720e, an opening/closing detection sensor 797e that detects opening/closing of the return tray shutter 782e is provided.

The operation when returning or counting the pachinko balls Q will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 254 based on the flowchart of the return dish returning process.
The flowchart shown in FIG. 254 describes return dish return processing (S3460).
First, when the pachinko balls Q acquired by the pachinko machine P are to be stored in the return tray 780e, if the return tray shutter 782e does not open the return port 748e, the system waits as it is (NO in S3461) to detect opening/closing. If it is confirmed by the sensor 797e that the return tray shutter 782e opens the return opening 748e (YES in S3461), the request signal to return to the return tray 780e has been transmitted by the operation from the liquid crystal screen of the ball lending machine PT. Is confirmed (YES in S3462), the movable return passage solenoid SOe is turned on (S3463), and the movable return passage 784e descends. The movable return passage 784e maintains the lowered state as shown in FIG. 250 (S3463) until the movable return passage solenoid SOe turns off the return request signal (NO in S3464). When the return request signal is OFF (YES in S3464), that is, when the pachinko balls Q need not be stored in the return tray, the movable return passage solenoid SOe is turned OFF (S3465), and the movable return is performed. The passage 784e is maintained in the raised state, and the lower communication passage 789e is allowed to pass the pachinko balls Q.

When the return tray shutter 782e opens the return port 748e and the movable return passage 784e moves as described above, as shown in FIG. 250, the pachinko ball Q that has passed from the containing portion 710e to the containing portion passage 745e is: After passing through the lowered movable return passage 784e, the direction is changed by the triangular guiding piece 792e and the rolling tray 780e rolls toward the return tray 780e.
In this way, the pachinko balls Q acquired by the pachinko machine P can be temporarily stored in the return tray 780e, so that the pachinko balls Q can be used as reserves for purchasing food and drink in the store or for playing the pachinko machine P. It is possible to use it as a storage for a variety of pachinko balls Q. Especially, it is effective for the pachinko machine P without the lower plate 857.

Next, the case of counting the pachinko balls Q stored in the return tray 780e will be described. When counting the pachinko balls Q stored in the return tray 780e in the ball lending machine PT, it is possible to open and close the return tray shutter 782e and open the return port 748e to guide the ball to the ball lending machine PT.
When the return tray shutter 782e is moved as described above, as shown in FIGS. 247 and 252, the pachinko ball Q rolls from the lower conversion passage 791e to the lower communication passage 789e in accordance with the inclination to contact the ball lender. After passing through the passage portion 740e, the ball lending machine PT rolls and is counted.
In this way, the pachinko balls Q housed in the return tray 780e can also be collected and counted by the ball lending machine PT, which is convenient when the game is stopped and the payment is made. Further, even when the player M collects the balls that he/she left behind, the employee can collect the pachinko balls in the island facility HS without opening the pachinko machine P, which facilitates the work and the player It is also possible to manage the pachinko balls Q that M has forgotten, such as counting.

Next, a case of counting the pachinko balls Q stored in the lower tray 857 of the pachinko machine P or a case of returning the balls from the ball lending machine PT to the return tray 780e will be described.
When counting the pachinko balls Q stored from the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine to the ball lending machine PT, the movable return passage solenoid SOe is kept OFF as shown in FIG. 253, so that the movable return passage 784e is It is kept in the upper position. The pachinko balls Q in the lower plate 857 roll according to the inclination of the lower communication passage 789e, further pass through the ball lending machine communication passage portion 740e, and roll to the ball lending machine PT to be counted.
When returning a ball from the ball lending machine PT to the return tray 780e, the return tray shutter 782e closes the return port 748e as shown in FIGS. 251 and 253, and the pachinko ball Q from the ball lending machine PT is at the top. It rolls on the communication passage 787e, changes its direction by the movable return passage 784e and the side wall portion 779e, and is accommodated in the return tray 780e through the return opening 748e.

In this way, the pachinko balls Q housed in the lower plate 857 can also be collected and counted by the ball lending machine PT, which is convenient when counting the acquired pachinko balls. In addition, since the player M can store the balls counted by the ball lending machine PT in the return tray 780e, the pachinko balls Q are used as spares for purchasing food and drink in the store or for playing the pachinko machine P. It is possible to utilize it as a storage of a specific pachinko ball Q. Especially, it is effective for the pachinko machine P without the lower plate 857.

<The ball lending machine used for the modification>
The ball lending machine PT and the ball lending machine communication passage portion 740d will be described with reference to FIG. 255. The modified examples can be applied to 1 to 5, and the individual counting unit 805e will be described as an example. FIG. 255 is a schematic diagram showing the movement of the pachinko balls inside the ball lending machine PT. The ball lending machine P is provided near the pachinko machine P. Further, the ball lending machine PT is provided with an individual counting unit 805e, and can count the pachinko balls Q discharged from the pachinko machine P. Specifically, the lower tray shutter 859 of the lower tray 857 of the pachinko machine P is opened, and the ejected pachinko balls Q are stored in the storage portion 710e of the individual counting unit 805. The stored pachinko balls Q pass through the lower passage 747e of the counting passage portion 720e, pass through the ball lending machine connection passage portion 740d, and the counting counter 806 provided in the middle of the counting ball passage 822 of the ball lending machine PT. Counted. The counted pachinko balls Q pass through the equipment connection nozzle 819 and are collected in the equipment HS by the bellows 415. In addition, the counted value is recorded in an IC card or the like as a ball owned by the player M.

Further, the possessed balls can be discharged from the pachinko machine P and can be discharged from the ball lending machine PT to the return tray 780e. When discharging from the ball lending machine PT to the return tray 780e, the pachinko ball Q dispensed from the ball lending machine PT by a sprocket (not shown) or the like passes through the counter discharge passage 821 and the ball lending machine communication passage portion 740d. Through the upper passage 746e and discharged to the return tray 780e.

The ball lending machine PT is a system that uses a prepaid IC card or a magnetic card, a system that puts a credit card or cash into the IC card or IC coin, and adds a valuable value to the game media so that a game medium can be purchased. The present invention can be applied to a system for reading a valuable value stored in a system for giving a valuable value for purchasing a game medium, a system for purchasing a game medium for cash, and the like.

(Wireless system for data transfer of devices including game machines installed in the game arcade)
Regarding the system in which the network in the game arcade shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 is wireless, a system for the game arcade that is wireless will be described with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257. FIG. 256 is a block diagram showing data transmission/reception between each device in the wireless game arcade 1. FIG. 257(A) is a block diagram of the first communication (BLT) showing transmission/reception of data between the transmission/reception device 94 and the platform information display device K. FIG. 257(B) is a block diagram showing the content of the first communication (BLT) data that the transmission/reception device 94 receives from the platform information display device K.

FIG. 256 and FIG. 257 show conveyance of data output from ancillary equipment such as a gaming machine (pachinko machine P) and a ball lending machine PT installed in a game arcade. The data output from the pachinko machine P shown in this embodiment is an example. The data output from the pachinko machine P includes game information such as an out signal, a safe signal, a jackpot signal, and a start signal.
Further, as the data output from the ball lending machine PT, for example, a sales signal, a camera ID obtained from each camera 69 mounted on the ball lending machine PT shown in FIG. 104, imaging time data, and the like are output. The data output from the gaming machine (pachinko machine P) and the ball lending machine PT is once collected on the platform information display device K. The platform information display device K conveys the data described in detail in FIG. 263 described later to the transmission/reception device 94 by the first communication (BLT) equipped with a wireless communication standard represented by Bluetooth (registered trademark), for example. To do. For the first communication (BLT), Class 1 having an output of 100 mW and a reaching distance of about 100 m, Output 2.5 mW, and Class 2 having an reaching distance of about 10 m are adopted.

The transmission/reception device 94 shows the role of the island computer 91 shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. The received data is conveyed through the wireless router 5 and the switching hub 7 by the second communication (WIFI) using the standard.

The wireless communication of the first communication and the second communication is indicated by a broken line, and the solid line indicates that it is a wire.
The first communication (BLT) is not limited to the Bluetooth (registered trademark) wireless communication, and may be the WIFI standard wireless communication. Further, the first communication and the second communication may be wireless communication using any one of standardization standards of IEEE1451, IEEE802.15, IEEE802.11, IEEE802.16, IEEE802.20, 3GPP and 3GPP2.

Further, the switching hub 7 connects the hall computer 90, the surveillance camera system 60, and the face authentication server 80, and exchanges data between these systems. In particular, the surveillance camera system 60 receives and stores the camera ID and the image capturing time data, extracts the image capturing data of the recording device 68 from the camera ID and the image capturing time data, and collates the image data with the face data 605 stored in the face authentication server 80. Judges such as Goto and others need attention. In this way, by managing the image or recorded data by using the camera ID and the image capturing time, it is not necessary to transmit the image data captured each time, and it is possible to individually store a huge amount of image data. Since the image data can be extracted from the recorded data at any time, the capacity of the face recognition system can be small. In addition, since face image data is not stored individually for personal information, it is easy to handle personal information.
Note that the imaging data, which is the recording data captured by each camera 69, can be distributed by a wireless signal. However, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the recording capacity is large and the recording device in the management area 2 is wired. I am sending it to 68.

Next, FIG. 257 shows an outline of a form of data transmission/reception with the transmission/reception device 94 and the platform information display device K. In FIG. 257(A), the device that initiates the communication connection is the master (MA), and the device connected to the master (MA) is the slave (SL). As shown in FIG. 257(B), in this embodiment, the transmission/reception device 94 is connected as a master (MA) and the platform information display device K is connected as a slave (SL) to receive data.
In the present embodiment, the frequency used for communication is provided with a plurality of different frequencies, and one of the plurality of frequencies is selected at regular time intervals, and a technique of using different frequencies at constant time intervals is adopted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent radio wave interference with other frequencies, and thus it is possible to prevent interference with a wireless LAN or the like such as the WIFI standard. By way of example, the frequency band from 2.402 GHz to 2.480 GHz is further divided into 79 channels of 1 MHz width and used to perform hopping from one frequency to another as a function of time, depending on the narrow band carrier signal. It is possible to employ a frequency hopping method in which the data signal is modulated.
The master (MA) can keep the communication with the slave (SL) connected. The master (MA) is capable of simultaneous communication with the slaves (SL) and controls the timing of urgent command and data transmission.

Next, the configurations of the transmission/reception device 94 and the platform information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 258 and 259. FIG. 258 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the platform information display device K of the game hall system shown in FIG. 67 as an example. FIG. 259 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the transmission/reception device 94 of the game hall system.
The platform information display device K shown in FIG. 258 is provided with a platform information display device control unit 910 inside a casing (not shown), and the platform information display device control unit 910 includes a CPU 911, a ROM 912, a RAM 913, and a power supply unit 914. The platform information display device K stores the above-mentioned various data obtained from the game machine in the storage unit 904 connected to the I/O 907 which is an input/output unit, and a touch panel type liquid crystal display connected to the I/O 907. Information accumulated from the obtained data is displayed on the screen 891 under the control of the display control unit 903.

The platform information display device K is provided with a call button 901 for displaying a display for calling the employee MS on the liquid crystal display screen 891 or the like when the player M supplies a ball box or has a trouble with the game machine. Further, the employee MS is provided with a remote control light receiving unit 902 for receiving a signal from a remote control for operating the liquid crystal display screen 891. Further, the platform information display device K includes an external I/F 905 for obtaining information from the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT.
Further, the platform information display device K includes a first communication module 906 that controls the first communication (BLT).

The transmission/reception device 94 shown in FIG. 259 is provided with a reception device control unit 941 inside a casing (not shown), and the reception device control unit 941 includes a CPU 942, a ROM 943, a RAM 944, and a power supply unit 945. The transmission/reception device 94 temporarily stores various data from the platform information display device K obtained by the first communication module 947 connected to the input/output unit I/O 946, and a storage unit connected to the input/output unit 946. It is equipped with 949. The transmission/reception device 94 includes a second communication module 948 that transmits the data once stored in the storage unit 949 to the hall computer 90 via the wireless router 5 (FIG. 256) by wireless communication of the WIFI standard. The transmission/reception device 94 also includes a touch panel type input screen 918 that is connected to the I/O 946 and sets communication. Further, the transmission/reception device 94 is connected to the top lamp 965 provided at the island end of the island facility HS, and controls the lighting of the LED provided in the top lamp 965.

Next, communication connection and data structure of the transmission/reception device 94 and the platform information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 263. FIG. 260 is a block diagram showing transmission and reception of data in the island facility HS of the game hall system. FIG. 261 is a block diagram of the first communication (BLT) showing transmission/reception of data between each device of the game hall system. FIG. 262 is a schematic diagram showing a data structure transmitted/received between the respective devices of the game hall system. FIG. 263 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data transmitted and received by the game hall system.

Communication connection will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. The platform information display device K (SL) and the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) form a piconet that forms one group, and are connected in the relationship of master (MA) and slave (SL) to form one master (MA) unit. On the other hand, up to seven slaves (SL) can be connected at the same time. Then, the master (MA) adopts a time division multiplexing transmission method in which data to be transmitted is processed in a time division manner. The transmitter/receiver 94 is provided at the end of the island facility HS, and is provided at the end on the side close to the wireless router 5 (FIGS. 1 and 2) for performing the second communication (WIFI). Communication is possible without the need to add ports etc. by the time division multiplexing method.

The relay device 96 has the same structure as the transmission/reception device 94 shown in FIG. 259, but does not include the second communication module 948 but has the first communication module 947. Further, the relay device 96 installed at the island end of the island facility is connected to the top lamp 965 provided at the island end, and controls the lighting of the LED provided at the top lamp 965.
The relay device 96 switches the master (MA) and the slave (SL) to transmit the data collected from the platform information display device K (SL) to the transmission/reception device 94 and the data from the platform information display device K (SL). Can perform the function of the role of receiving. For example, the relay device 96(a) transmits the data of the platform information display device K from SL7 to SL12 and the data collected by the relay device 96(b) to the transmission/reception device 94. By transmitting and receiving data via the wireless relay device 94 in this manner, the system for amusement arcade firstly displays the data of all the units collected by the platform information display device K (SL) in the island facility HS. It is possible to transmit to the transmission/reception device 94 by communication (BLT) and collectively transmit the data of all the units from the transmission/reception device 94 to the hall computer 90 by second communication (WIFI).

FIG. 261 shows a communication state between the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) and the platform information display device K (SL). After the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) establishes the connection with the platform information display device K (SL1 to S7), it transmits to the platform information display device K (SL1 to S7) all at once, and the emergency flag (D0016) in FIG. 263. Check if occurs. For example, the target of the emergency flag (D0016) is an abnormal signal due to a magnet of the pachinko machine P when a magnet or a radio wave is detected, or the unlocking of the gaming machine requested by the employee MS when dealing with the gaming machine trouble. The request signal, an abnormal signal due to a trouble of the ball lending machine PT, an abnormal signal of the counter JC and the like can be mentioned. After the simultaneous transmission, as shown in FIG. 261, the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) transmits data in order with the platform information display device K (SL1 to S7).

FIG. 262 shows a data structure to be transmitted between the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) and the platform information display device K (SL). The access code 915 specifies the identification number of a piconet that is a group of slaves (SL1 to SL7) configured in the island facility HS, the packet header 916 specifies the identification number of the slave (SL1 to SL7), and the payload 917 is Data (D0001 to D00017) of the type shown in the form in FIG. 263 is written.
The data transmitted from the platform information display device K (SL) to the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) is an identification number such as a platform number by which D0001 can be recognized by the gaming machine and auxiliary equipment such as the platform information display device K and the ball lending machine PT. Is. D0002 indicates the time when data is transmitted from the platform information display device K (SL) to the transmission/reception device 94 (MA).

D0003 represents the number of out balls discharged from the game machine, and "1" indicates 100 when converted by the actual number of balls. The platform information display device K (SL) sets data to be transmitted based on this predetermined number of out balls. For example, a signal of 1 pulse is received when the number of out balls is 10, and when this 1 pulse is counted 10, other data (D0001 to D0017) is extracted and set as data to be transmitted as in the form 908A of FIG. 263. To be done.
When the number of out balls is used as a reference, the calculation shown by the business data such as the operating status of the gaming machine in the hall computer 90 is performed by many devices that perform data processing based on the number of out balls, which facilitates data conversion. Smooth introduction of other equipment. In addition, since the operating status of gaming machines is often determined by whether or not there are out balls, it is extremely easy to check the operating status of gaming machines by setting this number of out balls as a setting standard for transmitting data. Become.

D0004 represents the number of safe balls, which is the number of game media acquired by the game player M, and "8" indicates 8 when converted by the actual number of balls. D0005 indicates whether or not the gaming machine is in a big hit, "0" indicates that it is not a big hit, and indicates "1" if a big hit is in progress. D0006 indicates whether or not the gaming machine is in the probability variation, "0" indicates that the probability variation is not in progress, and "1" is displayed if the probability variation is in progress. D0007 indicates the number of times the design of the gaming machine has changed, and "8" indicates that the design has changed eight times. D0008 is a number indicating how much the ball lending machine PT has sold, and "1" indicates 500 yen in the amount conversion.

D0009 has shown the time when the game machine started the big hit. D0010 indicates the time when the gaming machine ends the jackpot. D0011 indicates the time when the gaming machine started the probability change. D0012 indicates the time when the gaming machine ends the probability change. D0013 indicates the identification number of each camera 69 (FIG. 104) mounted on the ball lending machine PT. D0014 indicates the time when the camera 69 (FIG. 104) of each unit has acquired an image by face authentication when detecting that a person who needs attention has been found to be mischievous or that each camera 69 has been blindfolded. . D0015 indicates the type of image obtained by face recognition, "3" indicates the superior player M, and the attention-sensitive player M is indicated as "1".

D0016 is the above-mentioned emergency flag, and the type is indicated by numbers such as "0", "1", and "2". "0" indicates that there is no emergency flag, and "1" and "2" indicate that there is an emergency flag. “1” is an important code for game machines such as Goto and troubles, and is a code that needs to be notified to the hall computer 90 as soon as possible. Further, “2A, 2B” is a code for lighting the top lamp 965 provided at the end of the island facility HS and notifying the employee MS that the player M is calling by pressing the call button. . The codes “A, B” of the code “2” are provided to distinguish which side of the island edge of the island facility HS is illuminated (FIG. 260).
D0017 indicates the count data and indicates the number of balls counted by the individual counter 805 mounted on the ball lending machine PT, and “859” indicates the number of balls actually counted of 859. These data (D0001 to D0017) are cleared if the data transmission is successful, and then the platform information display device K (SL) extracts the respective data at the time when the predetermined out-ball number is reached and transmits the data. Set.

<Control of wireless communication for carrying data>
Control of wireless communication will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 to 271. FIG. 264 is a sequence diagram at the time of initial registration between the devices of the game hall system. FIG. 265 is a sequence diagram showing a standby state between the respective devices of the game hall system. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing game data communication main processing of the game hall system. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing emergency communication data processing of the game hall system. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing a first communication data transmission process of the game hall system. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing a second communication data transmission process of the game hall system. FIG. 270 is a sequence diagram showing a data communication process between each device of the game hall system. FIG. 271 is a sequence diagram showing a data communication process in an emergency between each device of the game hall system.

<<Initial setting>>
Initial setting of communication between the transmission/reception device 94 and the platform information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265.
The transmission/reception device 94 (MA) and the platform information display device K(SL) shift to the initial registration mode (S3471) as shown in FIG. 264, and the pair of the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) and the platform information display device K(SL). Prepare the ring. The transmission/reception device 94 (MA) searches for the platform information display device K(SL) capable of the first communication (S3472), and the platform information display device K(SL) makes the platform information display device K(s) capable of the first communication. In response to (SL), the unit number, the BL address that is a unique address for communication, and the authentication code are transmitted as information (S3473). The transmitter/receiver 94 (MA) selects from the list of the platform information display devices K(SL) capable of the first communication (S3475), and inputs the authentication code of the platform information display device K(SL) to the transceiver device 94(MA). (S3476), the link connection is completed (S3477). In order to strengthen the communication security immediately after the link connection, the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) and the platform information display device K (SL) exchange random key different from the second communication (WIFI) (S3478), A random number key is stored in each storage area so that it is stored even when the power is turned off (S3479). The random number key may be a code or a calculation formula. In this way, security from eavesdropping or the like can be enhanced.
Further, when adding the platform information display device K (SL), it is possible to perform the addition by a simple work for completing the link connection with the transmission/reception device 94 (MA), and thus it is not necessary to lay wiring.
Further, since the security function is different between the first communication (BLT) and the second communication (WIFI), double security is applied, which makes the system more difficult to eavesdrop.

The transmission/reception device 94 (MA) and the platform information display device K (SL) generate a dynamic random number and store the dynamic random number so that it is stored even when the power is turned off (S3480). Further, the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) and the platform information display device K (SL) exchange dynamic random numbers with each other (S3481), so that the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) and The platform information display device K (SL) confirms the generated random numbers with each other, so that the link connection can be performed safely and automatically. The random number for connection is automatically generated based on the random number key when the power is turned on, and by exchanging the dynamic random numbers with each other, the security regarding the reconnection and the connection after the power is turned on is increased.
As described above, since the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) and the platform information display device K (SL) have completed the pairing by the initial setting, after that, the power supplies are turned on to each other and automatically connect if the first communication is possible. To be done.

Next, FIG. 265 shows how the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) and the platform information display device K (SL) are paired successfully and then the standby mode is entered.
When the power of the transceiver device 94 (MA) and the platform information display device K (SL) is turned on (S3482), the platform information display device K (SL) becomes the transceiver device 94 (MA) that has been successfully paired before. On the other hand, pairing is requested (S3483). When requesting pairing, the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) transmits the platform information, the BT address and the dynamic random number as information, and the platform information display device K (SL) collates the information such as the dynamic random number. If the connection is possible, it responds (S3483). At the time of the response, as the information, the vehicle information, the BT address and the dynamic random number are transmitted to establish the connection (S3485).
Immediately after establishing the connection, the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) and the platform information display device K (SL) generate and store the dynamic random number (S3486), exchange the dynamic random number (S3487), and connect to the next connection. Prepare After that, the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) and the platform information display device K (SL) shift to the standby mode in which the power consumption is low until the data transmission/reception is started (S3488).

<<Control of data by wireless communication>>
Control of communication between the transmission/reception device 94 and the platform information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 266 to 271.
First, in the game data communication main processing (S3490) shown in FIG. 266, after first performing the emergency communication data processing (S3550), the processing shifts to the first communication data processing (S3560) and the second communication data processing (S3580). , Processing for transporting the data of the game machine or the like to the hall computer 90.

First, the emergency communication data processing (S3550) will be described with reference to FIGS. 267 and 271. The transmission/reception device 94 (MA) performs simultaneous transmission before the first communication to confirm the emergency flag, and the platform information display device K (SL) and the relay device 96 (a, b, c, d) transmit the emergency flag. It is confirmed whether or not there is any (S3552, S3557). The urgent flag has types of "1" and "2", and "1" is a flag which is most urgent and is related to a goto act. Further, "2" is a flag for the player M to call the employee MS. If there is an emergency flag (YES in S3552, YES in S3557), the contents of the emergency flag are sent to the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) and the relay device 96 (a, b, c, d) (S3553, S3558). The relay device 96 (a, b, c, d) transmits the call flag “2” to turn on the top lamp 965 as described above. Further, the flag of “1” is transmitted from the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) to the hall computer 90 by the second communication (WIFI). The hall computer 90 displays a pop-up or the like on the screen of the monitor according to the content of the emergency flag, and the employee performs a response process. The emergency flag may be further subdivided for each abnormality type. For example, "1-1" is a magnet goto, "1-2" is a radio wave goto, "1-3" is a door open signal, "1-4" is a door unlock request signal, and "1-5" is a counter. The open/close signal and “1-6” may be subdivided into a counter open/close request signal and the like, and the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) may transmit the emergency flag to the hall computer 90.

Then, when the emergency flag is transmitted, the platform information display device K (SL) and the relay device 96 (a, b, c, d) shift to the standby mode in order to wait for a response from the hall computer 90. (S3554). Then, response data is sent from the hall computer 90 to the platform information display device K (SL) and the relay device 96 (a, b, c, d), and the platform information display device K (SL) performs a response process.
In the case of the emergency flag "1", the system waits until the emergency flag is cleared to respond to the signal from the hall computer 90, and immediately shifts to a state in which data can be received (NO in S3556, S3553, S3554, S3555).

If the emergency flag “1” is released (YES in S3556), it is confirmed whether or not the emergency flag “2” is generated (S3558), and the call button of the platform information display device K (SL) is pressed. When 901 is in the pressed state (YES in S3557), the platform information display device K (SL) transmits the call flag to the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) or the relay device 96 (a, b, c, d) (S3558). ). If both the emergency flags “1” and “2” are released (NO in S3557), the platform information display device K (SL) sets the release flag, and the transmitter/receiver device 94 (MA) or the relay device 96 ( (a, b, c, d) (S3559). Further, the release flag is transmitted from the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) to the hall computer 90 by the second communication (WIFI) (S3559).

Next, the first communication data transmission process (S3560) and the second communication data transmission process (S3580) will be described with reference to FIGS. 269 to 270.
First, in the first communication data transmission process (S3560), the platform information display device K (SL) plays game information about the gaming machine (out signal, safe signal, jackpot signal and start signal, sales signal, camera ID, imaging time data, etc.). ) Is collected (S3561). The table information display device K (SL) sets the data to be transmitted based on the number of out balls, as described above. When the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100) (YES in S3562), the platform information display device K (SL) transmits data including the number of out balls (for example, safe signal, jackpot signal, and A start signal, a sales signal, a camera ID, imaging time data, etc. (FIG. 263)) are set (S3563). The set data is transmitted from the platform information display device K (SL) to the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) or the relay device 96 (a, b, c, d) (S3565). The data to be transmitted is transmitted until the data transmission of the first communication (BLT) succeeds (NO in S3566), and if the platform information display device K (SL) succeeds in the data transmission (YES in S3566). , Clears the set data (S3567) and prepares for the next transmission.

Further, when the number of out balls does not reach the predetermined number (NO in S3562), the platform information display device K (SL) counts the number of times the data transmission process is not performed (S3569), and the counted number is When the predetermined number of times is reached (YES in S3570), the data transmission forcibly collected (S3562) is a process of transmitting data. By these processings (NO in S3562, S3569, YES in S3570), if the number of safe balls, the number of starts, etc. occur even though there is no out signal, the hall computer 90 is abnormal, so it is a goto action, a game. It is possible to detect an abnormality in the machine or an abnormality in communication. Then, the platform information display device K (SL) clears the count number (S3567), and the first communication data transmission process (S3560) ends. Note that the count number (S3569) is counted when a predetermined time is reached in which transmission is not performed for a certain period of time, based on the number of simultaneous transmissions and transmission time transmitted to confirm the emergency flag from the transmission/reception device 94 (MA). You may reach the number.

Next, the second communication data transmission process (S3580) will be described. Transceiver 94 (MA)
Stores the transmitted data (S3581) and confirms whether or not there is an emergency flag (S3584). If there is an emergency flag (YES in S3584), the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) extracts the emergency flag (S3585), and turns on the top lamp 965 if there is a "2" flag, that is, a call flag. Take control. In the case of the flag of "1", the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) sets the second communication data of the type corresponding to the emergency flag and transmits the data to the hall computer 90 (S3590). Data transmission is performed until it succeeds (NO in S3591), and if the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) succeeds in data transmission (YES in S3591), the set data is cleared (S3592), and the next transmission is performed. Prepare for
If there is no emergency flag (NO in S3584), the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) collects the data sent from the platform information display device K (SL), and performs the second communication (WIFI) so-called WIFI communication. Generates transmission data converted into a format that can be transmitted by (S3586), transmits until the data transmission succeeds as described above (S3590, S3591), and when the data transmission succeeds, the set data is cleared ( S3592), to prepare for the next transmission.

<Modification of control of wireless communication for carrying data>
FIG. 272 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data transmitted and received by wireless communication of the game hall system. Wireless system for transferring data of devices including a game machine installed in the above-mentioned game arcade The configuration is the same as that of the wireless system, and the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. In particular, the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) does not change, but the relay device 96 is eliminated and the platform information display device K (SL) is a system having a function of relaying. The platform information display device K (SL1 to SL14) is described, and the platform information display devices Ka1 and Ka2 switch the master (MA) and the slave (SL) to perform the second communication (BLT), thereby performing platform information. It is possible to transmit the data of the display device K to the hall computer 90.

For example, the platform information display device K (SL7 to SL14) wirelessly conveys the obtained game information such as the pachinko machine P to the platform information display device Ka1 (MA/SL11) by the first communication (BLT). At that time, the platform information display device Ka1 (MA/SL11) becomes the master (MA), the platform information display device K (SL7 to SL14) becomes the slave (SL), and the platform information display device Ka1 (MA/SL11) becomes the platform information. The data of the display device K (SL7 to SL14) is collected. In addition, after the platform information display device Ka1 (MA/SL11) collects the data collected by the platform information display device Ka2 (MA/SL14) as the master (MA), the platform information display device Ka2 (MA/SL14) It becomes a slave (SL) and transmits the collected data to the platform information display device Ka1 (MA/SL11).
Further, after collecting the data collected by the platform information display device Ka1 (MA/SL11) as the master (MA), the platform information display device Ka1 (MA/SL11) transmits the collected data to the transmission/reception device 94 (MA). To do. In this way, by forming piconets and transmitting/receiving data between the piconets, data is transmitted from the platform information display device K(SL) at one end of the island to the transmitting/receiving device 94(MA) at the other end of the island. Since it is possible to carry by wireless communication, it is possible to eliminate the trouble of laying wiring inside the island facility, and at the same time, there is a risk of noise due to the transportation of pachinko balls or an error due to radio wave noise from the pachinko machine P, or electric leakage. Is less.

(Modification of the system in which the signal for turning on the call button and the top lamp is wireless)
A modification of the system in which the signal for turning on the call button and the top lamp is wireless will be described with reference to FIGS. 273 to 278.
<Configuration of call button in wireless system>
The configuration of a wireless system for lighting the call button and the top lamp will be described with reference to FIGS. 273 to 277. FIG. 273(A) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each device that sends and receives call data from the call button unit 962 of the game hall system. FIG. 273(B) is a front view of the call button unit 962.
FIG. 274 is a block diagram showing transmission/reception of call data between the respective devices of the game hall system. FIG. 275 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration between each device of the game hall system. FIG. 276 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each device that transmits and receives call data of the game hall system. FIG. 276 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each device that transmits and receives call data of the game hall system. FIG. 277(A) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the call button unit 962 of the game hall system and the mobile terminal SM are connected. FIG. 277(B) is a schematic diagram showing a state of the mobile terminal SM of the game hall system.

FIG. 273 shows a call button unit 962 attached to the ball lending machine PT. The call button unit 962 is connected to the platform information display device K by wire and is installed within a reach of a person who does not have to stand up. The call button unit 962 includes a call switch 967, a call liquid crystal display 966, and a USB terminal 968. The call switch 967 is an ON/OFF changeover switch, and by pressing the call switch 967, the call liquid crystal display 966 is displayed as "calling". By pressing the call switch 967, the call button unit 962 sets the call flag to ON. Further, as shown in FIG. 276, the USB terminal 968 is a terminal for charging a storage battery held by the personal mobile terminal SM. As shown in FIG. 277, the personal mobile terminal SM can be used as a substitute for the operation button of the call button unit 962 only when the USB terminal 968 is connected and is being charged by the dedicated application software. Therefore, the call button unit 962 can be operated at hand while operating the personal mobile terminal SM owned by the individual. In this way, it is not necessary to reach for the platform information display device K above the player M, and the operation can be performed at hand.

Further, the call button unit 962 can set a call flag by inputting a signal for calling through the USB terminal 968 from dedicated application software stored in the personal mobile terminal SM. As described above, the operation from the personal portable terminal SM can interfere with other call button units 962 because only the call button unit 962 connected to the personal portable terminal SM by the USB terminal 968 can respond. There is also no possibility of dealing with mischief. The platform information display device K and the call button unit 962 may be in a communication form in which they are connected not only by wire but also wirelessly. Further, a signal for permitting transmission of a call flag from the USB terminal 968 to the dedicated application software of the personal mobile terminal SM may be transmitted to the call button unit 962 by wire or wirelessly.

Next, a configuration of wireless communication using the above-described first communication (BLT) will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 and 275. The call button unit 962 is connected to the call button unit 962 as a plurality of slaves (SL) using the transceiver 961 (MA) as a master by Bluetooth (registered trademark) communication. Once the link connection is established between the master (MA) and the slave (SL), a secure wireless communication connection is established by the procedure and security described above, and the master (MA) and the slave (SL) can transmit and receive. It becomes a state.
Further, the call button unit 962 is usually a slave (SL) and transmits a flag when a call flag occurs, but a part of the call button units 963 is used as a relay base to transmit and receive the flag, A flag is transmitted to the transmitter/receiver 965 (MA) at both ends, and the transmitter/receiver 965 (MA) turns on the top lamps 965A and B.
Further, the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7) has a function of switching between the master (MA) and the slave (SL), and sends and receives a call flag of the network (SLB).

The call flag of the call button unit 962 (SL1 to SL7) of the network (SLA) is transmitted to the transmission/reception device 961 (MA1) and relays the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7) and the call button unit 963 (SL14). It is transmitted to the transmitter/receiver 961 (MA2).
The call flag of the call button unit 962 (SL14 to SL20) of the network SLC is transmitted to the transmitting/receiving device 961 (MA2) and relays the call button unit 963 (SL14) and the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7). It is transmitted to the transmitter/receiver 961 (MA1).
The call flag of the call button unit 962 (SL7 to SL14) of the network SLB is transmitted to the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7), and the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7) and the call button unit 963 (SL14) are transmitted. The data is relayed and transmitted to the transmitting/receiving device 961 (MA1) and the transmitting/receiving device 961 (MA2).

<Control of call button unit in wireless system>
Control of the call button unit 962 in the wireless system will be described with reference to FIGS. 275 and 278. FIG. 278 is a sequence diagram showing a call data communication process between the respective devices of the game hall system.
When the player M presses the call switch 967 or the like, the call button units 962 and 963 set a call flag (S3601). Then, the call button units 962 and 963 display on the call liquid crystal display 966 such as "calling" (S3602).

Next, the call button unit 962 (SL1 to SL6, SL15 to SL20) transmits the call flag, and the transmission/reception device 961 (MA1, 2) receives the call flag (S3603). Further, the transmitting/receiving device 961 (MA1) transmits the call flag from the call button unit 962 (SL1 to SL6) of the network (SLA) to the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7), and simultaneously transmits the network (SLB) and the network (SLB). The call flags from the call button units 962 and 963 (SL7 to SL20) of (SLC) are received (S3607).
Further, the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7) receives the call flag from the call button unit 962 (SL8 to SL13) of the network (SLB) (S3604).
The call button unit 963 (MA/SL7) receives a call flag from the call button unit 962 (SL14 to SL20) of the network (SLC) from the call button unit 963 (SL14) and calls the network (SLA). The call flag from the button unit 962 (SL1 to SL6) is transmitted to the call button unit 963 (SL14) (S3606).

Similarly, the call button unit 963 (SL14) receives the call flag from the call button unit 962 (SL14 to SL20) of the network (SLC) from the transmission/reception device 961 (MA2) and calls the network (SLA). The call flag from the button unit 962 (SL1 to SL6) is transmitted to the transmission/reception device 961 (MA2) (S3605).
Upon receiving the call flag from the call button unit 962 (SL1 to SL20), the transmitter/receiver 961 (MA1, 2) turns on the top lamps 965A and 965B (S3608).

Next, when the player M presses the call switch 967 or the like again, the call button units 962 and 963 release the call flag (S3609). Then, the call button units 962 and 963 erase the display being called on the call liquid crystal display 966 (S3610).
Next, the call button units 962 (SL1 to SL6, SL15 to SL20) transmit the flag cancellation, and the transmission/reception devices 961 (MA1, 2) receive the flag cancellation (S3611). In addition, the transmission/reception device 961 (MA1) transmits the flag release from the call button unit 962 (SL1 to SL6) of the network (SLA) to the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7), and the network (SLB) and the network (SLB). The flag release from the call button units 962 and 963 (SL7 to SL20) of (SLC) is received (S3615).

Further, the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7) receives the call flag from the call button unit 962 (SL8 to SL13) of the network SLB (S3604).
Further, the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7) receives the flag release from the call button unit 962 (SL14 to SL20) of the network (SLC) from the call button unit 963 (SL14) and calls the network (SLA). The flag release from the button unit 962 (SL1 to SL6) is transmitted to the call button unit 963 (SL14) (S3614).

Similarly, the call button unit 963 (SL14) receives the flag release from the call button unit 962 (SL14 to SL20) of the network (SLC) from the transmission/reception device 961 (MA2) and calls the network (SLA). The flag release from the button unit 962 (SL1 to SL6) is transmitted to the transmission/reception device 961 (MA2) (S3613).
Upon receiving the flag release from the call button unit 962 (SL1 to SL20), the transceiver 961 (MA1, 2) turns off the top lamps 965A and 965B (S3616).

Since it is possible to carry data by wireless communication from the transmitter/receiver 961 (MA1) at one end of the island to the transmitter/receiver 961 (MA1) at the other end of the island, it is troublesome to lay wiring in the island facility. At the same time, the risk of error due to noise caused by the pachinko balls being conveyed and the radio noise from the pachinko machine P, and the risk of electric leakage are reduced. Moreover, since the security function is enhanced, it is possible to cope with eavesdropping and the like.
The top lamp 965 may be turned on not only within the same island facility HS but also the top lamp 965 of the island facility across the facing passage.

(Payment amount rewrite control)
With reference to FIGS. 68, 70, 279, and 280, the configuration of each device used for the input amount rewriting control will be described.
The amount of money to be rewritten is, for example, when the member card 550 is inadvertently forgotten to be inserted into the ball lending machine PT and the money is inserted first, or when the guest M who is a guest becomes valuable to the guest card 551. If you forget to insert the guest card 551 in which the valuable value is stored despite the remaining amount of money and throw in money first, the valuable value of the guest card 551 is added to the desired IC card (550, 551). This is a control process for rewriting to move the value.

The member card 550 has an IC chip 553 provided therein, which includes information such as an ID that is an identification number unique to the card, face image data 555 captured at the time of member registration, remaining money, accumulated coins, accumulated coins, and coins acquired today. Remembered In the guest card 551, an IC chip 507 provided inside is provided with an ID that is an identification number unique to the card, the money taken by each camera 69, or the imaging date and time counted by the counting unit 805, the balance, and today. Information such as the number of coins acquired is stored.

The devices used for these controls are provided in the card processing unit 807 provided in the ball lending machine PT, each camera 69, the individual face authentication server 820 built in the HDD 855 connected to each camera 69, and the management area 2. The face authentication server 80 and the hall computer 90 are used. The hall computer 90 may be any system that manages valuables such as coins and coins, a ball lending machine PT, and the like, and may be a device or system provided outside the hall computer 90, not inside the hall computer 90. good.

Next, the input amount rewriting control will be described with reference to FIGS. 279 to 284. FIG. 279 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of rewriting the input amount of money in the game hall system. FIG. 280 is a sequence diagram showing a process of rewriting the input amount of money in the game hall system. FIG. 281 is a flow chart showing the main processing for rewriting the input amount of money in the game hall system. FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing the processing for rewriting the amount of money thrown into each camera by the game system. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing an amount rewriting process of the game hall system. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing guest card balance face authentication processing of the game hall system.

First, with reference to FIG. 279, FIG. 280, and FIG. 281, the deposit amount rewriting main processing (S3620) will be described. The card processing unit 807 of the ball lending machine PT waits until a banknote is inserted into the ball lending machine PT (NO in S3621), and if a banknote is inserted into the ball lending machine PT (YES in S3621), the banknote is inserted. An input signal is transmitted to each camera 69 (S3622). At the same time, the card processing unit 807 of the ball lending machine PT transmits the ID of the guest card 551 and the inserted amount to the hall computer 90 (S3623). Then, the hall computer 90 saves the received ID of the guest card 551 and the received amount of money (S3624), and uses it for the data at the time of sale and the like.
In the card processing unit 807, the guest card 511 can be read and written by the card reader/writer 804 from the card storage unit 816, and another member card 550 or the guest card 551 is inserted into the card insertion/ejection port 811 (FIG. 68). The guest card 551 is moved to a position where it cannot be inserted.

A member M who holds the member card 550 or a player M who holds another guest card 551 notices that he/she has made a mistake and operates the liquid crystal operation unit 801 of the ball lending machine PT shown in FIG. Operate the button for requesting rewriting of money. When the player M operates the button (YES in S3625), the card processing unit 807 transmits a face authentication matching request signal to the individual face authentication server 820 of each camera 69.
At the same time, the card processing unit 807 transmits the guest card ID and the rewriting amount requested for rewriting to the hall computer 90 (S3627). If the result of the face authentication determination by the individual face authentication server 820 is OK, that is, the person who paid the money (YES in S3268), the card processing unit 807 receives approval from the hall computer 90 (S3629), The process moves to the rewriting process (S3640). If the face authentication judgment results do not match or the approval is not obtained, the card processing unit 807 displays “error” or “not possible” on the liquid crystal operation unit 801 (FIG. 69) of the ball lending machine PT. Is displayed (S3631).
The approval means may be automatically performed by the hall computer 90, or the approval signal may be transmitted after determining whether or not the card has an abnormality. Further, the approval means may be an operation by an employee. By thus providing the approval means, the security can be further strengthened.

Next, each camera determination process (S3650) will be described with reference to FIGS. 280 and 282. The individual camera determination process (S3650) is a process performed by the individual cameras 69 and the individual face authentication server 820.
Since each camera 69 has always taken an image since the power was turned on and is monitoring the player M, the taken moving image is always recorded in the individual face authentication server 820 (S3651). When the individual face authentication server 80 receives the bill insertion signal from the card processing unit 807 (YES in S3652), the imaged time data is extracted and stored (S3653).
In addition, even when the number of the acquired balls is counted, the time data of the imaged may be extracted and stored. Since the data to be stored is mainly the time data recorded by each camera 69, the data capacity is small and the data storage processing speed is fast, so that the player M is not kept waiting. Also, since the data held is mainly time data, it is not data relating to faces, and is therefore suitable for a game arcade and handling personal information.

After that, when the individual face authentication server 80 receives the face authentication collation request signal (YES in S3654), the individual face authentication server 80 extracts the time when the most recent banknote was inserted from the stored time data (S3655). Then, the individual face authentication server 80 extracts the face of the person recorded at the extracted time (S3656), compares the face of the person currently being imaged with the extracted face (S3657), and determines whether the faces match. A determination is made (S3658). After the determination, the individual face authentication server 80 transmits either the mismatch determination or the match determination as a result to the hall computer 90 (S3659, S3661).

Next, the amount rewriting process (S3640) will be described with reference to FIGS. 68, 279, 280 and 283.
The card processing unit 807 waits until the rewriting approval is transmitted from the hall computer 90 (NO in S3641), and when the approval signal is transmitted (YES in S3641), is stored in the ID of the guest card 551 and the card. The remaining balance is read from the card reader/writer 804 (S3642) and temporarily stored in the RAM 853 and the HDD 855 (S3643).

The card processing unit 807 erases the data such as the remaining money of the target guest card 551 so that it can be used by another player M for storing the money next time (S3644), controls the drive motor 814, and stores the data. The deleted guest card 551 is moved to the card storage unit 816 (S3645).
The card processing unit 807 performs processing for retracting the guest card 551 to the card storage 816, and can insert another member card 550 or another guest card 551 into the card insertion/ejection slot 811 (S3646), For example, a case where the amount rewriting process is performed on the membership card 550 will be described as an example. When the received guest card 551 stores 10000 yen as the balance, the card processing unit 807 that has become capable of accepting the card pays the amount of 10000 yen, which is the amount temporarily stored in the RAM 853 and the HDD 855, to the membership card. It is added to 550 (S3647).
It should be noted that not only the amount of money but also the number of coins counted by the counting unit 805 stored in the guest card 551 is added.
As described above, the guest card 551 is automatically erased and stored in the card storage unit 816, and can be used for storing the next guest card 551. Therefore, the employee MS replenishes the guest card 551. There is no need, and since money is automatically rewritten on the membership card 550 and other guest cards 551, workability is improved.

Next, the card processing unit 807 transmits the ID of the membership card 550, the added amount of money, the processing date and time, and the information of the possessed ball, if any, to the hall computer 90 (S3648). The hall computer 90 saves the ID of the member card 550, the added amount, the processing date and time, and the information of the possessed ball, if any, in order to avoid business management and trouble with the player (S3649).
As described above, it is possible for the player M to rewrite money while staying on the spot, and it is possible to construct a system in which the player M does not have a trouble with the player while improving security. ..

Next, referring to FIG. 284, the guest card balance face authentication processing for ejecting the guest card 551 while leaving money and rewriting the input amount at the ball lending machine PT of another gaming machine (S3670) will be described.
The basic processing uses S3620 to S3661 described above. The guest card balance face authentication process (S3670) is a process for writing data into the IC chip 507 of the ejected guest card 551 at the time of ejection so that face recognition can be performed by another ball lending machine PT.
First, in the case of ejecting the guest card 551 (YES in S3661), in order to prevent the guest card 551 from being stolen, first, the process proceeds to the individual camera determination process (S3650) to prepare for the guest card ejection. Next, when there is a balance (YES in S3672), the card processing unit 807 extracts data regarding the latest recording date and time when the bill is inserted from the individual face authentication server 820 (S3674). The card processing unit 807 records, on the guest card 551, the ID of each imaged camera 69 or the ID for managing the recorded data, the recording date and time, the remaining money, and the data regarding the number of balls acquired, if any.

If there is no remaining money and only balls are held (YES in S3673), the card processing unit 807 extracts, from the individual face authentication server 820, data relating to the recording date and time at the time of counting balls that have been most recently held (S3676). The card processing unit 807 records, on the guest card 551, the ID of each camera 69 that has been imaged or the ID that manages the recorded data, the recording date and time, and the data regarding the number of balls acquired.

Next, the individual face authentication server 820 extracts the recording data of the date and time stored in the guest card 551 from a predetermined time, for example, one minute before (S3678). This process is a process for reducing the storage capacity of the recorded data to be saved as much as possible. The extracted recorded data is stored in the individual face authentication server 820 in association with the ID of the guest card 551 (S3679), or in the face authentication server 80 in consideration of centralized management and communication (S3679). ) May be. In this way, the face authentication server 80 may be collectively managed.
The guest card 551 stores only the recording date and time without including the recording data, so that the processing at the time of ejecting the card becomes faster. After that, a face authentication collation request is transmitted to the individual face authentication server 80 (S3680), and if the determination result that the faces match (YES in S3681), the person who invested money and the holder of the guest card 551 with the remaining money Are the same, the guest card 551 is ejected (S3682). This process can prevent the guest card 551 from being stolen. Also, considering that the player M uses all the money, it is not necessary to perform unnecessary processing by storing the data in the guest card 551 when the guest card 551 is ejected (S3661 to S3682).

As described above, by recording the camera ID and the recording date and time on the guest card 551, the above-described processing (S3620 to S3661) can be used. When the camera ID is described when the recorded data is extracted in the process of S3653, the individual face authentication server 820 extracts the face image data from the data of the recording date and time by the camera ID, and extracts the face image data and the current face image data. It may be a process of collating with the face being imaged. Since the remaining ball rewriting process can be quickly performed even in the destination ball lending machine PT, the player M does not have to wait for the remaining ball rewriting.

Although the member card 550 or the guest card 551 described above is a card on which an IC chip is mounted, the medium may be a coin type medium as well as the card type. Further, the money may be used not only between the guest card and the membership card but also between the guest cards.

(Management system for the means for accommodating game media installed in the game hall)
The configuration of the ball box management system 950 will be described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 295 using the system in which the network in the game arcade shown in FIG. 256 is wireless. FIG. 285 is an explanatory diagram showing the layout and radio field intensity of the devices installed in the game arcade of the game arcade system. FIG. 286 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged part of the layout of the devices installed in the game arcade of the game arcade system. FIG. 287 is a table showing the relationship between the radio field intensity and the distance of the game hall system. FIG. 288 is a perspective view showing a ball box 955 of a game hall system and a ball box mounting table 952 having a function of charging the ball box 955. FIG. 289 is a perspective view showing a ball box 955 of the game hall system. FIG. 290 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a pachinko ball is transferred from the ball box of the game hall system. FIG. 291 is a schematic diagram showing a state of the ball box 955 when transferring a pachinko ball from the ball box 955A of the game hall system. FIG. 292 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ball box 955B of the game hall system. FIG. 293 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ball box 955A of the game hall system. FIG. 294 is a list of data used in the ball box management system 950 of the game hall system. FIG. 295 is a chart showing the contents of detecting the state of the ball box 955 of the game hall system.

The ball box management system 950 is controlled by the hall computer 90, and is not limited to the hall computer 90, and may be managed and controlled by a system including a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and a storage device. The ball box management system 950 mainly includes a hall computer 90, a ball box 955, a transmission/reception device 94 which is a wireless network, and a surveillance camera system 60.

In the layout shown in FIG. 285, when playing a pachinko machine P, the unit price of each pachinko ball Q lent out is 4 yen, which is a 4 yen corner area (HA) and 4 yen as a high unit price corner that can be played. Is also divided into a low unit price (for example, 1 yen) corner area (LA) having a low unit price. In the low unit price corner (LA), the unit price per pachinko ball may be 2, yen, 1, yen, etc.
In this embodiment, a pachinko machine P that uses a pachinko ball Q as a game medium is described as an example, but it may be applied to a slot machine SMA that uses a medal as a game medium. In that case, the unit price of one medal in the area of the high unit price corner is 20 yen, and the unit price of one medal in the low unit price corner is 10 yen or 5 yen.

As shown in FIG. 285, the ball box 955 is capable of wireless communication by the transmission/reception device 94 provided at the island end of the island facility HS1 described above. In this wireless communication, the ball box 955 conveys data to the transmission/reception device 94 by a communication module 974 equipped with a wireless communication standard typified by Bluetooth (registered trademark). For wireless communication, Class 1 with an output of 100 mW and a reach of about 100 m is adopted. As shown in FIG. 287, the radio wave intensity (dBm) received by the transmitter/receiver 94 causes the transmission box side 955 and the reception side box 955. The distance of the transmitting/receiving device 94 is shown. From this table, the distance between the receiving device 94 and the ball box 955 can be specified.
In particular, as will be described later, the master side (MA) can acquire the radio field intensity and ID address of the slave (SL) without performing pairing. Therefore, the position of the ball box 955 can be specified by the ID address of the ball box 955 and the radio field intensity.

In the transmission/reception device 94 in the upper left portion of FIG. 285, five radio wave areas (WA1-1 to WA5-1) that are received in units of 3 m are shown. The transmission/reception device 94 at the upper right shows five radio wave areas (WA1-2 to WA5-2) that are received in units of 3 m. The transmission/reception device 94 at the lower left shows five radio wave areas (WA1-3 to WA5-3) to be received in units of 3 m. The transmission/reception device 94 at the lower right shows five radio wave areas (WA1-4 to WA5-4) that are received in units of 3 m. These 5 areas are provided with area codes which are circularly separated from each transmitting/receiving device 94 within a range of 3 m according to the radio wave intensity, and each transmitting/receiving device 94 provides an area code.
As shown in FIG. 285, the transmission/reception device 94 has four transmission/reception devices 94 provided in four corners of the entire game arcade for nine island facilities, so that the reception areas of radio waves are provided in an overlapping manner. As a result, the position of the ball box 955 can be specified within a range of 3 m.

A surveillance camera 61 connected to the surveillance camera system 60 is arranged at each passage of the island facility HS. Each surveillance camera 61 is provided with an identification number (CH1 to CH20) of the surveillance camera 61 so that each surveillance camera 61 can be identified.

FIG. 286 shows an enlarged view of a part of the layout shown in FIG. 285. The ball box 955B used for the high unit price corner adopts Class3 which is used for short distance communication by the short distance communication module 975, which will be described later, in addition to the position measurement. This makes it possible to detect the approach of the ball box 955 used for another unit price corner. For example, when the player M1 brings a ball box 955B for a loan unit price of 4 yen to a corner where the loan unit price of the pachinko ball Q used for the pachinko machine P is 1 yen, which is a prohibited area, the ball box 955B is 0. The lending unit price in the radio wave area (WB1-1 to WB1-6) in the range of 5 m to 1 m is paired with the coin box 955A for 1 yen so that communication is possible.

Next, the configuration of the ball box 955 and the ball box mounting table 952 will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 293.
The ball box 955 is provided with a ball box 955A for a rental unit price of 1 yen and a ball box 955B for a rental unit price of 4 yen. As shown in FIG. 289, the shape of the ball box 955 is a box shape capable of accommodating a pachinko ball Q and having an upper opening, and has handles extending at both upper ends. As shown in FIG. 288, the ball box 955 can be stored by stacking boxes with the lower housing portions stacked. The ball box 955 includes a control module 954 embedded at one end as shown in FIG. 289.
A warning LED 972 and a speaker 971 are provided around the upper end of the ball box 955. The LED 972 is a full-color LED, and the blinking cycle and color can be changed. Further, the speaker 971 is capable of outputting a warning sound and a voice. The ball box 955 gives the same warning color or sound color to the ball boxes 955 due to the approach of the ball boxes 955 in other corners and the transfer of the game medium, and the synchronization of the colors and sounds. By making them the same and notifying them as a pair, it is possible to notify which ball boxes 955 have approached each other and which game media have been transferred.

The control module 954 is provided with positive and negative charging terminals 956 at its tip. As shown in FIG. 288, the charging terminal 956 receives DC5V, DC12V, or the like from the rail distribution line 953 provided in the central portion of the pillar-shaped charging column 952 of the coin box mounting table 952. The ball box mounting table 952 is provided with a power source, a power source control board, and the like. The transmitting/receiving device 94 may be provided on the charging column 952 or the ball box mounting table 952.

As shown in FIG. 293, the ball box 955A contains a control module 954, and the control module 954 includes a control unit 978 such as an LSI in addition to the rechargeable battery 981 connected to the charging terminal 956 described above. A storage unit 977, a calculation processing unit 976, a position measurement communication module (SL) 974 having a role of a slave, and a short-range communication module (SL) 975 having a role of a slave are provided. The control module 954 stores the electric power received from the rail distribution line 953 in a built-in rechargeable battery 981. Further, the ball box 955A has a sensor section 973 embedded in the bottom thereof, which is connected to the control section 978. The sensor unit 973 includes an angular velocity sensor 983 that detects the inclination of the ball box 955A and an acceleration sensor 982 that detects vibrations due to movement of the ball box 955A and insertion of a pachinko ball Q. Further, the control unit 978 is connected to the above-described LED 972 and the speaker 971.

As shown in FIG. 292, the ball box 955B contains a control module 954, and the control module 954 includes a control unit 978 such as an LSI in addition to the rechargeable battery 981 connected to the charging terminal 956 described above. A storage unit 977, an arithmetic processing unit 976, a position measurement communication module (SL) 974 having a role of a slave, and a short-range communication module (MA) 975 having a role of a master are provided. The control module 954 stores the electric power received from the rail distribution line 953 in a built-in rechargeable battery 981. Further, the ball box 955B has a sensor section 973 embedded in the bottom thereof, which is connected to the control section 978. The sensor unit 973 includes an angular velocity sensor 983 that detects the inclination of the ball box 955A and an acceleration sensor 982 that detects vibrations due to movement of the ball box 955B and insertion of a pachinko ball Q. Further, the control unit 978 is connected to the above-described LED 972 and the speaker 971.

As shown in FIG. 295, the control unit 978 determines whether a ball is inserted or moved based on the numerical value of the acceleration sensor 982 by the arithmetic processing unit 976.
As shown in FIG. 289, the acceleration sensor 982 employs an X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis triaxial sensor, and the XYZ values have periodic peak values due to phenomena such as movement and vibration. Different.
For example, the table of FIG. 295(A) shows the characteristic amount of each phenomenon. In the case of ball insertion detection, X (value) and Y (value) are each a minute value as shown in the graph of FIG. 295(C), and Z (value) appears particularly in a fine cycle, and pachinko balls Q It continues as long as it is thrown into the ball box 955.
Next, in the case of movement by walking, as shown in the graph of FIG. 295(B), X (value) and Y (value) appear small and cyclic along with the number of steps, and the heel when walking as in the cycle. The landing vibration of No. 2 appears significantly as Z (value). In addition, since the cycle is long for the distance walked and the function of the pedometer is possible, it is possible to calculate the step length and the distance moved.
As described above, the ball box 955 can detect the inclination of the ball box 955, the movement of the ball box, and the insertion of the ball box.

<Control of ball box management system>
Next, with reference to FIG. 285, FIG. 286, FIG. 294, and FIG. 296 to FIG. 298, the control of the box management system 950 will be described. FIG. 296 is a sequence diagram showing control of the ball box management system 950 of the game hall system. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing a ball box management control process (S3690) of the game hall system. FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing a ball box monitoring control process (S3710) of the game hall system.

As shown in FIG. 285 and FIG. 286, the case where the player M1 moves the pachinko ball Q, which was won at the 1-yen corner for the lending unit price, to the ball box 955B for the 4-yen unit price for playing, is to be played at the 4-yen corner. .
When the player M1 plays a game on the pachinko machine P302 series of the island facility HS3 whose unit price is 1 yen, and wins a pachinko ball Q, as shown in FIG. 296 and FIG. The acceleration sensor 982 detects vibration (S37711), and turns on the position measurement communication module 974 (SL) and the short distance communication module 975 (SL) of the ball box 955A (S3712). However, if there is no detection or communication connection (pairing) by the sensor unit 973 for a predetermined time (about 20 minutes), both communication modules 974 and 975 are turned off in order to suppress power consumption.

After that, the player M1 moves with the ball box 955B from the 4-yen corner. When the acceleration sensor 982 detects the movement (S3711), the ball box 955B turns on the communication modules 974 and 973 (S3712), and the transmission/reception device 94 receives the transmitted radio wave and thereby becomes a slave of the ball box 955B. The ID address (4S0001) which is the identification number is received (S3691). Then, the transmission/reception device 94 detects the received ID address (4S0001) and radio field intensity (-65 dBm) as shown in FIG. 294(A) (S3692).
As shown in FIG. 294(B), the transmission/reception device 94 uses the ball box management system 950 to provide an area code (WA2-1) calculated from the radio field intensity, an ID address (4S0001), and a master code as an identification number of the transmission/reception device 94. (MA0001) is transmitted (S3693).

As shown in FIG. 294(D), the ball box management system 950 receives the area code (WA2-1, WA5-3), the ID address (4S0001), and the master code (MA0001, MA0003) from the plurality of transmission/reception devices 94. The position of the ball box 955B (ID address (4S0001)) is detected (S3694), and the position of the ball box 955B held by the player M1 is specified. At that time, the moving distance of the ball box 955B can be calculated from the number of steps to calculate the moving distance, and can be used as a correction function for specifying the position, so that the accuracy of specifying the position is improved and can be used for monitoring or the like. Is.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 285 and 286, the player M1 has brought in the box for exclusive use of 4 yen 955B into the area of the 1-yen corner where the carry-in is originally prohibited, so the box management system 950 is prohibited. When the entry into the area is confirmed (S3696), and the entry into the prohibited area of the ball box 955B is confirmed (YES in S3696), the communication connection (pairing) between the ball box 955B and the transmission/reception device 94 is permitted. (S3697). At the same time, the lens box management system 950 determines the position of the camera as optimum position information for monitoring by the monitoring camera 61 or each camera 69 specified by the lens box management system 950 in the monitoring camera system 60 as shown in FIG. 294(C). The identification number (CH3) and the position information of the calculated virtual position (in the 302s) are transmitted (S3707).

Upon communication connection, the ball box 955B causes the LED 972 to emit light in order to prompt a warning (S3715). Note that the warning may be an alarm from the speaker 971 instead of light emission. At the same time, since the ball box 955B of the surveillance camera 61 or each camera 69 emits light, it is easy to check the monitoring target, and it is also possible to automatically check the ball box 955B by image recognition (S3698) and perform tracking. Yes (S3699). Here, in the surveillance camera system 60, the video imaged by the surveillance camera 61 or each camera 61 is recorded at any time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 294(D), 1S050 represents the ID address of the ball box 995A held by the player M1, and since the area codes (WA2-1, WA5-3) are the same, 1S050 is the ball box 955A. It is known that the ball box 955B is close to the range of 3 m, and the ball box management system 950 can confirm the approach of the ball boxes 955A and 955B (S3701). Not only that, but with the approach of the ball box 955A and the ball box 955B (YES in S3716), the short-range communication module 975 (MA) enters the short-range communication that enters the radio wave reception area of 0.5 m to 1 m. A communication connection (pairing) with the module 975 (SL) is started (S3717).

Then, the ball box 955A, which is adjacent to the communication box (pairing), is also caused to emit light (S3718). This makes it easier to confirm by the monitoring camera 61 and can notify the employee MS. Further, it is possible to confirm from which ball box 955A to which ball box 955B the pachinko ball Q has been moved even later. Further, since the ball box 955B can obtain information by communication from the ball box 955A, information on the tilt and vibration of the ball box 955A can be obtained and can be used for monitoring the ball box 955. .. Further, the synchronization and the selection of the color and the timbre when the alarm is issued from the ball boxes 955 can be the same for the ball boxes (955A, 955B).

Next, when the player M1 tilts the ball box 955A and moves the pachinko ball Q to the ball box 955B, the ball box 955A detects the tilt by the angular velocity sensor 983 (YES in S3719). The ball box 955A transmits the signal for detecting the tilt to the transmitting/receiving apparatus 94 via the ball box 955B which is the master (S3721). Then, when the ball box management system 950 receives the detection of the tilt of the ball box 955A (S3702), the monitoring camera system 60 stores and saves information such as the image capturing time of the monitoring camera 61 and the identification number of the monitoring camera 61. .. Then, the employee MS is prepared to be ready for later verification.

Further, when the ball box 955B detects the vibration when the pachinko ball Q is thrown in by the acceleration sensor 982 (YES in S3722), the ball box 955B transmits a command for issuing an alarm to the ball box 955A and the ball box 955A and the ball box 955B. Issues a warning sound as an alarm from the speaker 971 (S3723). In this way, by detecting the state in which the pachinko ball Q has been transferred to another ball box 955 and issuing a warning, it is possible to reliably detect the state in which the pachinko ball Q has been transferred without fear of malfunction. Therefore, the troubles between the player M1 and the employee MS are reduced. Further, the transferred 4-yen corner ball box 955B also notifies the alarm of the LED 972 and the speaker 971 to the outside, so that the employee MS refrains from counting the pachinko ball Q with the counter JC and the shop side suffers damage. There is no such thing.

By the light emission and the alarm of the ball boxes 955A and 955B, the player M1 can refrain from making mistakes and prevent the illegal game by the player M1. Further, even if the player M1 uses it as it is, the employee MS can immediately confirm by the light emission of the ball box 955. In addition, since the monitoring camera 61 captures the whole story from the place where the ball box 955B is brought into the prohibited area to the point where the pachinko ball Q is transferred to the ball box 955B, the player M1 cannot say anything. Becomes Therefore, the employee MS rarely has a trouble with the player M1.

Then, the ball box 955 emitting the light and the alarm sound is not stopped unless it is released from the ball box management system 950 (YES in S3724, YES in S3704). The ball box management system 950 transmits a release signal to the transmission/reception device 94 (S3705), and the ball boxes 955A and 955B that have received the release signal from the transmission/reception device 94 or the ball box 955B stop the light emission and the alarm sound ( S3725).

(Information display device and game information management system installed in the game hall)
With reference to FIGS. 1, 2, 68, and 299 to 313, the platform information display device K and the game hall information management system 1050 installed in the game hall will be described. It should be noted that the display in the following modes will be described by taking the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the liquid crystal display unit 610 displayed on the platform information display device Kd as an example. It can be applied to the display screen 891. Further, the embodiment described below is applicable not only to liquid crystal display but also to 7-segment display or dot display by LED.

<Collecting game information to be displayed on the platform information display device>
Regarding the configuration for collecting the game information displayed on the platform information display device K (Ka, Kb, Kd), the configuration for collecting the game information will be described with reference to FIGS. 1, 2, 67, 299 and 300. .
FIG. 299 is a block diagram showing a configuration relating to a game hall information management system that collects game information displayed on the platform information display device Kd. FIG. 300 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display mode correspondence table 1037 showing an example of the correspondence relationship between the display modes displayed on the platform information display device Kd and the types of game machines.

The information displayed on the table information display device K (Kd) includes game information directly obtained from the game machine, game information provided by the game machine manufacturer, and advertisement information for advertisement obtained from nearby cooperative stores. It is roughly classified into three types of information. Of these, game information obtained from a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine P is output in a signal form such as a pulse signal from an information terminal board I described later as shown in FIGS. 1, 2 and 299. The output signal is converted into data suitable for the platform information display device K(Kd) by the platform computer 93 and transmitted to the platform information display device K(Kd).
Various signals obtained as game information are accumulated in the hall computer 90 via the platform computer 93 and the island computer 91. The hall computer 90 collects and processes various signals in order to obtain sales information about games. At the same time, the pedestal information display device K (Kd) processes the information to be displayed to the player M from the signal obtained from the gaming machine and displays it on the liquid crystal display screen 891.
The signal obtained from the gaming machine may be directly transmitted from the information terminal board I of the gaming machine to the platform information display device K (Kd) without passing through the platform computer 93, or the platform information display device K (Kd). ) May transmit a signal obtained from the game machine to the hall computer 90 via the island computer 91.

As shown in FIG. 299, the amusement hall information management system 1050 stores not only information on the gaming machines in the amusement hall, but also information on the gaming machines and cooperating stores from the outside in the external information management server 1051 via the Internet or the like. To do. As the information on the game machine from the outside, particularly the game information of the pachinko machine P and the slot machine SMA is collected from the game machine manufacturer in the external information management server 1051. For example, in the game information, as shown in FIG. 300, the wiring information and the pachinko machine output from the information terminal board I of the pachinko machine P and the slot machine SMA for connecting to the machine information display device K (Kd) or the machine computer 93. There is specification information for the machine P and the slot machine SMA. In addition, the game hall information management system 1050 collects display material information to be displayed on the platform information display device K (Kd) from the game machine manufacturer. In addition to the information about the game, the game hall information management system 1050 collects the advertisement content information for advertisement from the cooperating store in the external information management server 1051.

The wiring information shown in FIG. 300 indicates the arrangement of the information terminal board I and the color of the wiring connected to the information terminal board I. The wiring information represents the type of signal output from the information terminal board I connected by the wiring color. For example, "red" in the model "CR○○Z" indicates "start wiring". The signal of "start wiring" is a start signal output when the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is defined, when expressed by a signal output from the information terminal board I of the pachinko machine P. This wiring information may differ depending on the game machine manufacturer or the model of the game machine, and it is necessary to obtain this wiring information for each model when replacing a new machine or moving within the game arcade. By displaying the wiring information on the liquid crystal display screen 891, the platform information display device Kd can quickly connect the pachinko machine P and the platform information display device Kd while watching the wiring information when replacing the platform. Therefore, it is possible to prevent mistakes in wiring or polarity. Only when the power is turned off to connect the platform information display device Kd, it is preferable to display the information on the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the platform information display device Kd on the opposite side or the neighboring platform information display devices Kd on both sides. .. The platform information display device Kd may display the position of the terminal board, the type of the signal line, the wiring color, the type of the signal line, the polarity of the wiring, and the like on the liquid crystal display screen 891.

Further, the specification information of the gaming machine includes a pachinko machine P and a slot machine SMA as typical examples, but the pachinko machine P and the slot machine SMA have various specifications. For example, the pachinko machine P shown in FIG. 67 is a so-called “probable change” type in which the probability changes after a big hit at a predetermined rate. In this pachinko machine P, after the big hit, the change of the special symbol 2 when the special symbol 2 starting port 304 is won is performed in a short time, and the probability of the small hit is also so-called "small hit continuous winning" state. Become.
In this state of "small win continuous winning", the small hit attacker 303 is frequently opened and the number of winnings increases, so that the number of coins to be won increases. In the state of the “small winning continuous winning”, the number of coins per hit is small, but the number of coins may increase because the hits are frequent. There are various types of pachinko machines P such as a type in which the small hits continue until the big hits and a type in which the probability of the small hits changes.

Further, the special symbol 306 shown in FIG. 67 displays the variation of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 on the special symbol LED display 305 by lighting the LED. The special symbol 306 includes the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, which correspond depending on the position of the starting opening for winning the prize. The special symbol 1 is changed by the winning of the pachinko ball Q to the special symbol 1 starting port 309, and the special symbol 2 is changed by the winning of the pachinko ball Q to the special symbol 2 starting port 304.

The spec information of one model is, for example, “number of prize balls”=“4&1&6&8&14”, “round number”=“6OR16R”, “count number”=“9C”, “normal jackpot probability”=“1/319”, “ Probability fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as "probability variation") jackpot probability" = "1/114", "probability variation inrush rate" = "navel (special symbol 1 starting port 309): 54%, Den Chu (special symbol 2 starting port starting port) 304) 83% (ST168 rotation)", "time saving" = "100 times OR168 times" and "average payout" = "6R: about 702", "16R:", etc.
This specification information is published by each gaming machine manufacturer on the Internet, so a gaming information display management computer

The 1055 collects this information in the external information management server 1051 automatically or manually.

Further, in the specification information of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 300, the model “CRXXZ” indicates the “probable variation” type of “small winning continuous winning”, and the model “CRXXΔΔ” indicates “probable variation”. "ST100 times" of the type, the model "CR○○XX" indicates "ST25 times" and "Time saving 55 times" of the "probability variation" type, and the model "CR△△○○" is "V The “winning prize” type shows “1-5 reductions in working hours” and “25-5 reductions in working hours”.

The display material information is a graphic material stored in the JPEG format or the BMP format such as characters and designs related to the gaming machine used when displaying on the platform information display device Kd. In addition, since the display material information is published by each gaming machine manufacturer on the Internet in a BMP format or a JPEG format, a game information display management computer 1055 can automatically or manually display these pieces of information. Are collected in the external information management server 1051.
Further, the advertisement content information is information for advertisement for displaying the products and services sold by the cooperating stores on the stand information display device Kd or the POP in the store for a fee or free of charge.

As shown in FIG. 299, the game hall information management system 1050 that collects and manages the above-described information mainly includes a hall computer 90, a table information display device Kd, and a game information display management computer 1055. The hall computer 90 includes a server equipped with a CPU, a ROM, a RAM and a hard disk, a computer equipped with a CPU, a ROM, a RAM and a hard disk and a monitor in the management area 2 (FIG. 1).

In addition, the platform information display device K (Kd) is provided with a liquid crystal display screen 891 for providing information to the player M in the housing on the surface. Further, the game information display management computer 1055 has an external information management server 1051 equipped with a CPU, a ROM, a RAM and a hard disk, a computer 1052 equipped with a CPU, a ROM, a RAM and a hard disk and a monitor 1054 in a management area 2 (FIG. 1). I have it. The game information display management computer 1055 manages the specification information, wiring information, and advertisement content information collected automatically or manually in the management area 2 (FIG. 1).

<Selection process of contents to be displayed on the platform information display device>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 300 to 302, a process of selecting the content to be displayed on the platform information display device K (Kd) will be described. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the display mode switching process (S3750). FIG. 302 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display content list 1035 showing the display modes and the display content on the platform information display device K (Kd).
The gaming information display management computer 1055 selects the contents to be displayed on the platform information display device K (Kd) from the specification information which is the characteristic of the gaming machine by the display mode switching process (S3750) shown in FIG. 301, and displays it as shown in FIG. 302. It is determined from the content list 1035. The display mode is switched mainly when the game machine is replaced or when the game machine is moved in the store.

The display mode switching process (S3750) will be described with reference to FIG. First, the game information display management computer 1055 determines whether it is a pachinko machine P or a slot machine SMA (S3750). If it is the slot machine SMA (NO in S3751), the game information display management computer 1055 determines whether or not it is the ART format (S3753). If it is the ART format (YES in S3753), the game information display management computer 1055 determines the mode displayed on the platform information display device K (Kd) to be the "SB mode" (S3754). If it is not the ART format (NO in S3753), the game information display management computer 1055 determines the mode displayed on the platform information display device K (Kd) to be the "SA mode" (S3755).

Next, the game information display management computer 1055 determines whether or not it is a so-called ST type in which the pachinko machine P is a so-called ST type in which the probability change or the time saving ends by a specified number of times (YES in S3751).
If the game information display management computer 1055 is a so-called ST type described later (YES in S3752), the effect design 308 (FIG. 67, 314) appearing on the liquid crystal effect display screen 307 (FIG. 67, 314) during the effect of the pachinko machine P. 67, Fig. 314) the production continues without stopping the fluctuation, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol 306 (Fig. 67) of the symbol of the special symbol LED indicator 305 (Fig. 67) is a pachinko machine P of the type to stop. Yes (S3757). If the pachinko machine P of the type in which the special symbol stops during the effect (YES in S3757), the game information display management computer 1055 determines the mode displayed on the platform information display device K (Kd) to be the "PSA mode". (S3761).
If it is not the pachinko machine P of the type in which the special symbol stops during the effect (NO in S3757), the game information display management computer 1055 determines the mode displayed on the platform information display device K (Kd) to be the "PSB mode". (S3762).

If the game information display management computer 1055 is not the so-called ST type, the gaming information display management computer 1055 determines that it is a so-called probability variation type in which probability fluctuation continues until the next big hit without a specified number of times (NO in S3752), and a small hit occurs during the probability variation. It is determined whether the type is a certain type (S3756). If the game information display management computer 1055 is a type that has a small hit during the probability change (YES in S3756), the game information display management computer 1055 determines the mode displayed on the platform information display device K (Kd) to be the "PKR mode" (S3759).
The game information display management computer 1055 determines the mode displayed on the platform information display device K (Kd) to be the "PKA mode" if it is not the type that has a small hit during the probability change (S3756) (S3758).

Next, with reference to the display content list 1035 of FIG. 302, each mode and the content displayed on the platform information display device K (Kd) will be described. In the display content list 1035, the display content to be displayed on the platform information display device K (Kd) is shown in the horizontal column, and the display content is divided vertically into the pachinko machine P and the slot machine SMA. It is indicated by "○".

The "PKA mode" and "PSB mode" display "big hit count", "start count", "acquired count", "probable variation count" and "big hit history" on the platform information display device K (Kd).
The "PKR mode" is the "big hit count", "start count", "small win count", "winning count", "ball output speed", "probable variation count" and "big hit history" on the platform information display device K (Kd). Is displayed.
In the "PSA mode", the "big hit count", "start count", "acquired count", "probable variation count", "start count non-display" and "big hit history" are displayed on the platform information display device K (Kd).

In the "SA mode", the "big hit count", "start count", "acquired count", "BIG count", "REG count" and "big hit history" are displayed on the platform information display device K (Kd).
In the "SB mode", the "big hit count", "start count", "acquired count", "BIG count", "REG count", "ART count" and "big hit history" are displayed on the platform information display device K (Kd). indicate.
The display mode correspondence table 1037 and the display content list 1035 displayed in FIG. 300 are managed by the game information display management computer 1055. The table information display device K (Kd) stores the same settings as the display content list 1035, and each mode can be switched from the operation of the game information display management computer 1055 and the table information display device K (Kd). Is. The game hall information management system 1050 can change the contents displayed on the platform information display device K (Kd) by switching between these modes.

<<Display process to display information of pachinko machines with consecutive small hits on the platform information display device>>
With reference to FIGS. 303 to 308, a process and display contents for displaying information about the pachinko machine Pa on the platform information display device K (Kd) will be described. FIG. 303 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a game machine information signal output from the information terminal board I of the game machine. FIG. 304 is a time chart showing processing of signals of gaming machine information in the platform information display device K (Kd). FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing a payout speed display control process (S3730) for controlling the display of information about the payout speed on the platform information display device K (Kd). FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing a payout speed display process (S3740) for controlling the display of information about the payout speed on the platform information display device K (Kd). FIG. 307 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mode of displaying on the platform information display device K (Kd). FIG. 308 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mode of displaying on the platform information display device K (Kd).

The pachinko machine Pa shown in FIG. 303 has a spec in which the probability variation continues until the next big hit at a rate of 65% and the above-mentioned “small hit continuous winning” is mounted on a main board (not shown). "Small jackpot continuous winning" is a so-called probability change state in which the probability of a big jackpot is improved when a big jackpot is determined, and a high probability state in which the probability of a small jackpot is also improved at a predetermined rate when a jackpot is determined. It is a "small prize continuous winning a prize". In the “small winnings continuous winning”, the probability of the small winnings remains high until the next big winning, so the small winnings continue and the number of pachinko balls Q increases until the big winning is won.

This pachinko machine Pa always maintains a high probability of a small hit during the probability change, in addition to the case of the “small hit continuous winning”, and continues to the next big hit, and the probability of a small hit. Not only when the jackpot is improved in a plurality of stages, but also when the jackpot is determined, if the jackpot is won, the spec of keeping the winning probability of the jackpot at a high probability until the next jackpot may be used.
The display mode displayed by the platform information display device K (Kd) determined from the specifications of the pachinko machine Pa is “PKR mode” when the display mode is determined by the processing of FIGS. 300 to 302, and as described above. The "big hit count", "start count", "small win count", "winning count", "ball output speed", "probable variation count", and "big hit history" are displayed on the platform information display device K (Kd).

The main signals output from the information terminal board I provided on the back frame 305 of the pachinko machine Pa and input to the platform information display device K (Kd) are the prize 1 signal 1011, the prize middle signal 1012, and prize ball payout. There are a signal 1013, a start signal 1014, a special prize 2 signal 1015, and a special symbol 2 starting opening winning signal 1016.
The special prize 1 signal 1011 is a signal for outputting the big hit and the small hit of the pachinko machine Pa. The award signal 1012 is a signal that is continuously output during the big hit, the small hit, and the probability change. The prize ball payout signal 1013 is a signal for outputting one pulse in units of ten acquired payout numbers. The start signal 1014 is a signal that outputs 1 pulse when the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are stopped. The special prize 2 signal 1015 is a signal output when the small hit attacker 303 receives a prize.

The special symbol 2 starting port winning signal 1016 is a signal output when the special symbol 2 starting port 304 (FIG. 67) is won. The out signal 1017 indicates a state in which balls emitted by the pachinko machine Pa are counted and are operating. The out signal 1017 is obtained from the inside of the island facility HS, but if the award ball is to be paid out without the out ball signal 1017, it is possible that a trouble such as goto may occur, and it is necessary to take immediate action. is there. In addition, the platform information display device K (Kd) may display the following information on the liquid crystal display screen 891 as one of the services only while the player M is operating, depending on the presence or absence of the out-ball signal.

304 to 306 show a payout speed display control process (S3730) of making a judgment based on various signals input by the platform information display device K (Kd) and displaying the "payout speed" on the liquid crystal display screen 891. Shows. As shown in FIG. 305, first, the platform information display device K (Kd) determines whether or not the special prize signal 1012 is input to the platform information display device K (Kd) (S3731). As shown in FIG. 304, the pachinko machine Pa continuously outputs the award-winning signal 1012 to the platform information display device K (Kd) when the jackpot, the probability change, or the shortening time is being awarded. The platform information display device K (Kd) determines that the prize is being awarded when the input of the during-prize signal 1012 is ON (tr4).

Next, if it is during the special prize (YES in S3731), the platform information display device K (Kd) determines whether or not the jackpot is over from the output of the prize 1 signal 1012 input to the platform information display device K (Kd). It is determined (S3732). As shown in FIG. 304, the pachinko machine Pa continuously outputs the special prize 1 signal 1011 to the platform information display device K (Kd) when it is a big hit or a small hit. In the case of a big hit, the pachinko machine Pa continuously outputs the special prize 1 signal 1011 and then turns off the signal after the big hit ends. Then, the platform information display device K (Kd) determines that the jackpot has ended when this OFF (tr1) is triggered. Further, the platform information display device K (Kd) causes the payout speed display control processing (S3730) to wait unless the prize is being awarded (NO in S3731).

Next, if the jackpot is over (YES in S3732), the platform information display device K (Kd) is a special symbol from the output of the special symbol 2 starting mouth winning signal 1016 input to the platform information display device K (Kd). 2 It is determined whether or not a pachinko ball has been won in the starting port 304 (FIG. 67) (S3733). As shown in FIG. 304, the pachinko machine Pa outputs one pulse to the platform information display device K (Kd) every time the special symbol 2 starting opening 304 (FIG. 67) is won. The special symbol 2 starting port 304 (FIG. 67) of the pachinko machine Pa improves the probability of opening the electric chu if the probability change is in progress, and opens frequently. Then, the platform information display device K (Kd) determines that the special symbol 2 starting mouth prize is being awarded when the special symbol 2 starting mouth prize signal 1016 is ON (tr2) (S3733). Further, the platform information display device K (Kd) causes the payout speed display control processing (S3730) to stand by if it is a big hit (NO in S3732). The platform information display device K (Kd), the fact that the special symbol 2 starting mouth winning award is input based on the special symbol 2 starting mouth winning signal 1016 is also an opportunity (tr2) to start a period in which the small hits are continuous. By doing so, it is possible to act as an opportunity to accurately determine that the small hit has started while also taking measures against goto.

Next, if the special symbol 2 starting port 304 is winning (YES in S3733), the platform information display device K (Kd) outputs the prize 2 signal 1015 input to the platform information display device K (Kd). Then, it is determined whether or not the small hitting attacker 303 (FIG. 67) has received a pachinko ball (S3734). As shown in FIG. 304, the pachinko machine Pa outputs one pulse to the platform information display device K (Kd) every time the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) is won. As a result of winning the special symbol 2 starting opening 304 (Fig. 67), the pachinko machine Pa releases the small hit attacker 303 (Fig. 67) to win the specified number of winnings if the small hit is won. When the specified time is reached, the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) is controlled to be closed. Then, the platform information display device K (Kd) determines that the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) is winning the prize when the special prize 2 signal 1015 is turned ON (tr3) (YES in S3734).

Next, if the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) is winning (YES in S3734), the platform information display device K (Kd) starts counting elapsed time 1019 by the built-in clock function (S3735). . Next, the platform information display device K (Kd) shifts to a payout speed display process (S3740) described later. Next, the platform information display device K (Kd) counts the pulses from the prize 1 signal 1011 or the prize 2 signal 1015, and stores the counted value in the storage area as the number of small hits (S3736).
Then, the platform information display device K (Kd) continues the processing (S3734 to S3736) until the winning of the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) and the continuation of the small hit end (YE of S3737). In the platform information display device K (Kd), the small prize attacker 303 (FIG. 67) is triggered by the special prize 2 signal 1015 being OFF (tr5) (NO in S3734) and the special prize 1 signal being OFF (tr6) (YES in S3737). It is judged that the winning of is finished. Incidentally, it may be determined that the continuation of the small hit is ended only when the special prize 2 signal 1015 is turned off (tr5). However, by adding the condition that the special prize 1 signal is OFF (tr6) to the condition, the platform information display device K (Kd) can more accurately determine the end of the small hit.

Next, the platform information display device K (Kd) starts the timer (T1) on the program from the clock function built in the CPU when the winning of the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) is completed (NO in S3734). Yes (S3738). If the predetermined time of the preset timer (T1) has elapsed (YES in S3739), the platform information display device K (Kd) stops the timer (T1), and the platform information display device K (Kd) stops the timer (T1). T1) is cleared (S3748), the elapsed time 1019 is calculated, the elapsed time 1019 is stored in the storage area (S3749), and the payout speed display control process (S3730) is ended.

The predetermined time of this timer (T1) measures the timing at which the small hit ends when measuring the elapsed time, and is set to about 1 to 2 minutes in consideration of the fact that the continuous small hit happens to be interrupted halfway. It is desirable that the pachinko machine Pa is appropriately changed. These are effective not only as a measure against noise, but also when small hits do not continue accidentally and can prevent erroneous processing.

Next, the payout speed display processing (S3740) will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 to 308. The platform information display device K (Kd) activates the timer (T2) on the program from the clock function built in the CPU (S3741). The platform information display device K (Kd) collects the number of prize balls in the storage area (S3742) until the preset time of the preset timer (T2) elapses (NO in S3734). For the number of prize balls, the platform information display device K (Kd) counts the number of one pulse output from the prize ball payout signal 1013. Then, the platform information display device K (Kd), the timer (T2), if the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in S3734), calculates the speed of the number of coins based on the predetermined time and the total number of prize balls (S3745). ).

For example, as shown in FIG. 307, the platform information display device K (Kd) determines the interval at which “10800 balls per hour” is displayed in the payout speed display area 1028 by the timer (T2). For example, if the timer (T) is 10 seconds, the platform information display device K (Kd) displays the payout speed in the payout speed display area 1028 at intervals of 10 seconds. Further, the platform information display device K (Kd) calculates the speed based on the time of the timer (T2) (S3746). For example, if there are 30 winning balls in 10 seconds, when converted to an hourly speed, 60 minutes×(60/10) seconds×30=10800/hour, so the platform information display device K( Kd) displays "10800 balls per hour" in the payout speed display area 1028 (S3746). Then, the platform information display device K (Kd) clears the timer (T2), stores the payout speed of 10800/hour in the storage area (S3747), and ends the payout speed display process (S3740).

An example of displaying on the liquid crystal display screen 891 when the platform information display device K (Kd) is in the “PKR mode” will be described with reference to FIGS. 307 and 308.
As shown in FIG. 307, the platform information display device K (Kd) displays payout speed information on the liquid crystal display screen 891. The platform information display device K (Kd) is provided with a small hit duration display area 1026 on the liquid crystal display screen 891. The platform information display device K (Kd) has an elapsed time 1019 (which is the time (“5 minutes”) that the jackpot from the jackpot information display device K (Kd) calculated as described above continues to the next jackpot (“5 minutes”). (S3749) is shown in the small hit duration display area 1026. The platform information display device K (Kd) displays the time when the small hit continues, so that the player can know how much time the small hit continues and at the same time as the next time. How long the small hit continues can be an indicator to the player or other players.

Further, the platform information display device K (Kd) is provided with an acquisition number display area 1027 on the liquid crystal display screen 891. The acquired number display area 1027 displays the number of balls (“900 balls”) acquired during the small hit from the big hit to the next big hit (S3742).
In the platform information display device K (Kd), a payout speed display area 1028 is provided on the liquid crystal display screen 891. The payout speed display area 1028 represents the speed of the number of payouts (“10800 balls per hour”) when it is acquired during the small hit from the big hit to the next big hit (S3746). The payout speed display area 1028 is updated at intervals of 10 seconds as described above to display the speed of the payout number (S3746).

In this way, the speed display of the number of payouts conveys the speed of the payout to the player M, and at the same time, the player M grasps how much payout is expected in consideration of time. It can be used as an indicator. It is updated at intervals of 10 seconds, but if the interval is further shortened, the player M can feel the speed of the ball throwing out in real time, and at the same time the player M takes the time into consideration. It can be used as an index to grasp how many balls are expected.

In addition, the employee MS can estimate how much time has elapsed after which the ball box to be exchanged is needed, based on the speed of the number of balls. Therefore, it is possible to measure the speed of the number of coins from the hall computer 90 and give an instruction from the intercom or the mobile terminal device 40 to place a capacity in the island facility HS where the high-speed pachinko machines P are lined up. Further, the hall computer 90 may collect information such as the number of small hits and the speed of the number of coins, from the platform information display device K (Kd) to a server connected to the hall computer 90.

As for the speed display of the payout number, as shown in FIG. 307, there is a meter display 1021 imitating a speedometer in addition to the payout speed display area 1028. The meter display 1021 includes a scale portion 1023 that displays the number of balls (“10000”, “20,000”), and a needle portion 1022 that indicates the scale portion 1023 according to the number of the payout speed. The meter display 1021 defines the limit value as 20000 balls/hour (h), and indicates at what position 10080 balls/hour (h) is changing.

As another example of displaying the payout speed, the proportion display 1024 shows whether the payout speed is high or low depending on the proportion of the hatched area by the proportion of the occupied area 1025 extending on the straight line. Is displayed so that you can see. The rate display 1024 defines the limit value as 20000 balls/hour (h) and indicates at what rate 10080 balls/hour (h) is changing. Thus, by providing the meter display 1021 or the ratio display 1024, the player M can intuitively distinguish whether the payout speed is high or low. Further, even when the employee MS is busy, the player can intuitively understand the payout speed and at a glance how often the game player M needs the ball box later.

In addition, the platform information display device K (Kd) may display the average speed of the number of thrown balls. Further, the hall computer 90 can also display an average speed of the number of coins or a ranking of the speed of the maximum number of coins on an information display device (not shown) installed on the edge or wall of the island facility HS. .. Further, the number of small wins per unit time may be used instead of the number of wins per unit time, and such a display of the number of times conveys a sense of speed of a payout to the player M, and at the same time the player M Can be used as an index to grasp how many balls are expected in consideration of time.

The platform information display device K (Kd) stores the number of times obtained from the special prize 1 signal 1011 or the special prize 2 signal 1015 in the storage area (S3748), and determines the number of times the small hit from the big hit to the next big hit (“100 Is displayed in the small hit count display area 1029. Such a display of the number of times conveys the speed of small hits to the player M, and at the same time, it can be used as an index for the player M to grasp how many balls are expected in consideration of time. .. Further, by displaying the number of times in a special state due to continuous small hits to the player, it is possible to promote the expectation of the small hit when the small hits are in a continuous state.

As shown in FIG. 308, the platform information display device K (Kd) shows the prize history information on the liquid crystal display screen 891. The platform information display device K (Kd) displays a start count history 1031 up to a jackpot that imitates a bar graph in the center of the liquid crystal display screen 891. The start number history 1031 shows the oldest history on the right side of the screen and the latest history on the left side. For example, in the platform information display device K (Kd), the number of starts up to the jackpot is shown as “164” above the start count history 1031 at the right end. In addition, the platform information display device K (Kd) shows the above-mentioned meter display 1021 on the right side of the start count history 1031, which shows a state in which a big hit and a small hit continue. Further, the total number of start times “353 times” is shown above the start count history 1031.

In addition, the platform information display device K (Kd) shows the hit spots in the start count history 1031 by hatching. In particular, the start count history 1031 with the total number of start times being "353" indicates that the hatching has hit three times. The other start count history 1031 indicates that the jackpot ends in a single shot without any definite change because there is no portion where the hatching is interrupted. The hatched portions shown on the liquid crystal display screen 891 may actually be expressed in different colors.

Further, the platform information display device K (Kd) includes a jackpot count display area 1053, a start count display area 1034, and a probability variation count display area 1037 at the upper right of the liquid crystal display screen 891.
Since these three displays are information that the player M wants to know as information, they are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen 891 by making the display characters and the like large and easy to understand.

<<Display process of displaying information of pachinko machine whose jackpot determination is finalized on the platform information display device during production>>
With reference to FIGS. 309 to 314, a process and display contents for displaying information about the pachinko machine Pb on the platform information display device K (Kd) will be described. FIG. 309 is a schematic diagram showing an example of signals of game machine information output from the information terminal board I of the game machine. FIG. 310 is a time chart showing the processing of signals of gaming machine information in the platform information display device K(kd). FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing a start number non-display process for controlling the display of the platform information display device K(kd). FIG. 312 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mode of displaying on the platform information display device K(kd). FIG. 313 is a start count display area display list 1036 showing an example of contents displayed on the platform information display device K(kd). FIG. 314 is a schematic diagram showing an aspect of the special symbol 306 displayed on the special symbol LED display 305 and the effect of the pachinko machine Pb.

The pachinko machine Pb shown in FIG. 309 has a main board that has a high continuation rate called "V winning", which is a special state at a rate of 60% after a big hit.
When this pachinko machine Pb hits right and wins in the special symbol 2 starting port 304 (FIG. 67), the winning probability is higher than in the normal time, so the probability of continuing is high. However, the number of times the special symbol 2 is drawn in a high-probability state is set, and the specified number of times the special symbol 2 is drawn is often set to 5 times, 10 times, or the like.

In addition, such a pachinko machine Pb displays the effect design 308 along with the effect on the liquid crystal effect display screen 307 as shown in FIG. 314. The effects of this pachinko machine Pb in the case of a big hit and in the case of a big hit are shown below. The pachinko machine Pb shows the specifications when the specified number of times of the special symbol 2 is set to 5 times.

If the pachinko machine Pb is out of alignment, the liquid crystal effect display screen 307a first shows that the effect symbol 308a is changing, and the special symbol LED display 305a indicates that the special symbol 2 (306a) is the second time off. it's shown. Next, on the liquid crystal effect display screen 307b, it is shown that the effect symbol 308b is changing, and the special symbol LED display 305b indicates that the special symbol 2 (306b) is the third time off. Further, on the liquid crystal effect display screen 307c, it is shown that the effect symbol 308c is changing, and the special symbol LED display 305c indicates that the special symbol 2 (306a) is the fourth time off. Then, on the liquid crystal effect display screen 307d, the effect symbol 308d indicates "384", and the special symbol LED display 305d displays the special symbol 2 (306a), which is the predetermined number of times out of alignment. In this way, in the pachinko machine Pb, the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 is actually stopped, but on the effect of the liquid crystal effect display screen 307d, whether the fish is shifted at the end of the specified number of times, It is expressed by whether or not a fish is caught, and the specified number of times is shown by one effect display. With such a presentation expression, the player M can enjoy the presentation with a sense of expectation until the end.

When the pachinko machine Pb is a big hit, it is shown on the liquid crystal effect display screen 307a that the effect symbol 308a is changing, and the special symbol LED display 305e indicates that the special symbol 2 (306a) is out of alignment for the second time. it's shown. Next, on the liquid crystal effect display screen 307b, it is shown that the effect symbol 308b is changing, and the special symbol LED display 305f indicates that the special symbol 2 (306c) is the third big hit. Further, on the liquid crystal effect display screen 307c, it is shown that the effect symbol 308c is changing, and the special symbol LED display 305g keeps the special symbol 2 (306c) displaying the big hit at the third time. ing. Then, on the liquid crystal effect display screen 307e, the effect symbol 308d indicates "333", and the special symbol LED display 305h indicates that the special symbol 2 (306c) is a big hit. In this way, in the pachinko machine Pb, the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 is actually stopped, but on the effect of the liquid crystal effect display screen 307d, the effect is performed until it is estimated that the prescribed number of times can be consumed. A big hit is expressed by whether or not a fish is caught, and the time for which a predetermined number of times is assumed is shown by one effect display. With such a presentation expression, the player M can enjoy the presentation with a sense of expectation until the end.

The display mode displayed by the platform information display device K (Kd) determined from the specifications of the pachinko machine Pb is “PSA mode” when the display mode is determined by the processing of FIGS. 300 to 302, and as described above. The "big hit count", "start count", "acquired count", "probable variation count", "start count non-display" and "big hit history" are displayed on the platform information display device K (Kd).

The main signals output from the information terminal board I provided on the back frame 305 of the pachinko machine Pb and input to the platform information display device K (Kd) are the prize 1 signal 1011, the prize prize signal 1012, and the prize ball payout signal. 1013, a start signal 1014, and a special prize 2 signal 1015.
The special prize 1 signal 1011 is a signal that is continuously output during the big hit of the pachinko machine Pa. The award signal 1012 is a signal that is continuously output during the big hit, the small hit, and the probability change. The prize ball payout signal 1013 is a signal for outputting one pulse in units of ten acquired payouts. The start signal 1014 is a signal that outputs 1 pulse when the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are stopped. The special prize 2 signal 1015 is a signal output when a prize is awarded to the small hitting attacker 303 or an attacker or the like having a different big hit when used without a small hit.

310 to 314 show a start number non-display process (S3770) for making a determination based on various signals input by the platform information display device K (Kd) and hiding the "start number" on the liquid crystal display screen 891. Shows. As shown in FIGS. 310 and 311, first, the platform information display device K (Kd) determines whether the during-prize signal 1012 is input to the platform information display device K (Kd) (S3771). As shown in FIG. 310, the pachinko machine Pa continuously outputs the during-prize signal 1012 to the platform information display device K (Kd) when the jackpot, the probability change, or the special prize during time reduction is in progress. The platform information display device K (Kd) judges that the prize is being awarded when the input of the during-prize signal 1012 is turned on (tr7).

Next, if it is during the special prize (YES in S3771), the platform information display device K (Kd) determines whether or not the jackpot is over from the output of the special prize 1 signal 1012 input to the platform information display device K (Kd). It is determined (S3772). As shown in FIG. 310, the pachinko machine Pa continuously outputs the special prize 1 signal 1011 to the platform information display device K (Kd) when the big hit or the small hit is in progress. In the case of a big hit, the pachinko machine Pa continuously outputs the special prize 1 signal 1011 and then turns off the signal after the big hit ends. Then, the platform information display device K (Kd) determines that the jackpot has ended when this OFF (tr8, tr9) is triggered.

Next, if the jackpot is over (YES in S3772), the platform information display device K (Kd) resets 1043 the number of starts displayed in the number-of-starts display area 1034 (tr9, S3774). In this way, by resetting the number of starts at the end of the big hit, by displaying the number of starts as much as possible during the big hit, the maximum time for confirming how many rotations the player M has made a big hit is maximized. It is possible to give a period.
The platform information display device K (Kd) does not display the number of starts on the liquid crystal display screen 891 even if the start signal 1014 is input (S3775).
In the conventional platform information display device, the start signal 1014 is received together with the stop of the special symbol of the pachinko machine Pb, and the start number is updated and displayed. In a pachinko machine Pb with a specification that expresses that with the liquid crystal effect display screen 307b or the effect design 308b, if the number of starts is not updated, it is understood that a big hit has occurred in the middle of the effect, and the pachinko machine Pb with a sharp edge. The production of is also aroused.
The platform information display device K (Kd) hides the number of starts in this way so that the timing of the big hit of the pachinko machine Pb is not understood by the number of starts, and the play is not spoiled. The number of starts is displayed according to the performance of the machine.

Next, the platform information display device K (Kd) performs a random lottery by the built-in CPU and determines the contents to be displayed in the start number display region 1034 from the start number display region display list 1036 as shown in FIG. 313. (S3776). As shown in FIG. 312, the platform information display device K (Kd) selects from the start count display area display list 1036 in the start count display area 1034 of the liquid crystal display screen 891 during the period in which the start count is not displayed (1041). The displayed "time saving" is displayed. In this way, the platform information display device K (Kd) can know the current state of the pachinko machine Pb by displaying the game state on the liquid crystal display screen 891 without displaying the number of starts. In the case of a probability change other than “time saving”, “probability change” may be displayed.
In addition to the above, the contents of the start count display area display list 1036 include “Chance”, “Tomorrow is 9 o'clock opening”, “We have XX cakes for free gifts”, and “Weather and sunny”. These displayed contents can be quoted from the above-mentioned advertising content information, and by providing them on the liquid crystal display screen 891 where the player M usually pays attention, the platform information display device K (Kd) can be advertised. It is possible to impress the player with the content.

Next, the platform information display device K (Kd) receives the start signal 1014 in order to notify the player M finally even if the start count is not displayed, and then the start count is stored in a built-in storage area. Counting.
Next, if the platform information display device K (Kd) is in a special prize such as a time saving or a sudden change (YES in S3779), the above process (S3772 to S3779) is repeated until a big hit (NO in S3772). .

Further, the platform information display device K (Kd) judges that the special prize 1 signal 1011 is turned on (tr10), and that it is a big hit. Further, when the during-prize signal 1012 is turned off (tr11), it is determined that the time saving or the probability change is finished and the during-prize is finished.
Then, the platform information display device K (Kd) displays the number of times of start if it is during the special prize (time saving or probability change) (NO in S3771, NO in S3779) or if it is a big hit (YES in S3772) (S3773). . In this way, by displaying the number of starts after the big hit or after the end of the special prize, the game player M can grasp the result of his/her game in a satisfactory state after enjoying the effect of the game machine. .

In addition, when the pachinko machine Pb is a type in which the production is finished after the probability change and it becomes a so-called time saving in which the opening probability of the special symbol 2 starting port 304 is improved, the platform information display device K (Kd) starts. After the number of times is hidden, the number of times of start may be displayed in the number-of-starts display area 1034 after the end of the probability change, so that the player M can confirm the number of remaining times saved during the hours saved. The timing of the end of the probability change may be determined from the award signal that does not include time saving.
In addition, the platform information display device K (Kd) displays the start count after hiding the start count (the number of confirmations of special symbols), after the start count has reached a certain number of sudden changes or shortened time, or during a big hit. The specification may be such that the number of starts is displayed in the area 1034.

(Set value management system for set values of gaming machines installed in the game arcade)
With reference to FIG. 2, FIG. 299, and FIG. 315 to FIG. 330, a set value management system for managing the set values of the gaming machines installed in the game arcade will be described.

First, a set value management system for managing set values will be described with reference to FIGS. 2, 299 and 330. The hall computer 90 manages the set value management system related to the set values. As shown in FIG. 299, the hall computer 90 is composed of a personal computer, a monitor 97, and a server 95. Further, the hall computer 90 processes and stores the game information obtained from the pachinko machine P and the slot machine SMA in the server 95 connected to the hall computer 90. Further, the monitor 97 operates or displays on the screen information about the gaming machine such as set values and information about profits.

Further, as shown in FIG. 330, the setting management system is located in front of the key hole of the slot machine SMA, and each unit camera unit 1070 is provided so as to close the key hole of the slot machine SMA. Each camera unit 1070 is connected to the medal lending machine CT, and its position is fixed by a key. In this way, by blocking the key holes of the slot machine SMA by using each camera unit 1070 with a key, the slot machine SMA is prevented from prying when the key hole is opened and the board or the like is replaced, and the specifications are specified. It is possible to suppress the evidence such as images and moving images to the person who said. In this way, each unit camera unit 1070 is used as a tool for obtaining got countermeasures and obtaining business information in the same manner as each unit camera 69 connected to the ball lending machine PT of the pachinko machine P described above.

Each unit camera unit 1070 is provided with each unit camera 69F for authenticating the face of the player M and identifying a person toward the player M side. Further, each unit camera unit 1070 is provided with each unit camera 69U capable of photographing the effect liquid crystal 1105 and the reel symbol 1040 on the upper side.
The stop of the reels (1041, 1042, 1043) by the pressing may differ depending on the ability of the individual, and the player M may be able to obtain a large number of balls by technically intervening. Since the setting management system has different abilities for each player M, each camera 69F connected to the medal lending machine CT in order to grasp the degree of the technical intervention for each person is identified by gender and age group by face recognition technology. Have obtained information on people such as.
The ball lending machine CT is a medal tray in which the game player M operates to save medals and lend medals from the operation screen 1080 provided on the ball lending machine operation panel 1080, and pays out medals from the bent tip nozzle 1083 of the medal payout nozzle 1082. Pay out to 1106.

Next, a slot machine SMA will be described with reference to FIGS. 315 to 318 and 330 as a typical example of a gaming machine provided with setting values used in this embodiment. FIG. 315 is a schematic diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reels of the slot machine SMA. FIG. 316 is a schematic diagram showing a comparison of the number of payouts in the symbols in which the reels of the slot machine SMA are stopped. FIG. 317 is a comparison table showing the number of slots machine SMA that can be acquired at the time of bonus. FIG. 318 is a comparison table regarding probabilities and machine allocations in the setting values of the slot machine SMA. FIG. 330 is a perspective view showing the slot machine SMA and the medal lending machine CT.

As shown in FIGS. 2, 315, 316, and 330, the slot machine SMA is provided with a reel symbol 1040 provided with three reels (1041, 1042, 1043) in the upper center of the housing. The slot machine SMA is additionally provided with an effect liquid crystal 1105, an effect lamp 1109, a side effect lamp 1108, a stop button 1102 (1102L, 1102M, 1102R), a start lever 1101, a medal payout outlet 1107, and a payout medal tray 1106.
As shown in FIGS. 315 and 330, the reel symbol 1040 includes reels (1041, 1042, 1043) on which symbols are arranged, and the slot machine SMA stops the symbol by pressing the stop button 1102. A predetermined number of medals are paid out to the storage counter or to the payout medal tray 1106 from the medal payout opening 1107 according to the winning combination of the symbols.

For example, the arrangement of symbols in which the reels (1041, 1042, 1043) shown in FIG. 316(A) are stopped indicates that the number of payouts from the slot machine SMA is 15. The arrangement of symbols in which the reels (1041, 1042, 1043) shown in FIG. 316(B) are stopped shows the case where the number of payouts from the slot machine SMA is 12. In this way, the slot machine SMA controls the stop of the symbol by pressing the symbol by the technical intervention of the player M, stopping the reels (1041, 1042, 1043) at the position of the gap, and stopping the reel symbol. Depending on the winning combination of the symbols arranged at 1040, the number of payouts is different.

As shown in FIG. 317, the slot machine SMA described in the present embodiment is provided with two types of jackpots, that is, a type (BIG) and a regular (REG) when bonus is won. In particular, if the jackpot is regular (REG), the total payout number at the time of jackpot can be 112 if it is a complete strategy that succeeded in pushing all the hits, but if all hits fail, 82 It ends with a sheet. When the big hit is BIG, the difference from the complete strategy difference is about three.

As shown in the set value list 1046 of FIG. 318, the slot machine SMA has a high probability of regular (REG) and a low probability of big (BIG) when the set value is T. Therefore, the combined probability of bonuses is higher than the set value 6. Further, in the case of the set value T of the slot machine SMA, there is a difference between the case of complete capture by pushing and the machine division (so-called throwing rate) due to failure of pushing. Further, the probability of the regular (REG) jackpot is 1/100, which is high even when compared with the setting value 6, and a large number of regular (REG) jackpots appear. Since it comes out, it is rare to obtain data that is the theoretical value of the set value.
Further, in the slot machine SMA, when the set value is T, the machine division is close to the set value 6 of the slot machine SMA, and the machine division is larger than the set value 5 and is 109.7%. Therefore, the player M can obtain more balls than in the case of the set value 5 if he or she completes the attack every time he wins.

<Control process of the set value management system when setting the set value>
Next, a control process in the set value management system for setting the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. 319 to 329. FIG. 319 is a table showing information about the jackpot of the slot machine SMA for each person. FIG. 320 is a table showing the ratio of the number of game players for each day of the week and the age group and the correction value for each age group. FIG. 321 is a table showing the technical intervention rank and the success rate. FIG. 322 is a comparison table showing theoretical values and measured values for each table. FIG. 323 is a comparison table showing set values and correction values. FIG. 324 is a comparison table relating to the machine allocation in the setting value of the slot machine SMA for each unit in a part. FIG. 325 is a schematic diagram of an operation screen displayed on the monitor 97, which shows input of setting values for each table. FIG. 326 is a schematic diagram of the operation screen 1060 showing the hole layout and setting values displayed on the monitor 97. FIG. 327 is an enlarged schematic view of a part of the operation screen 1060 displayed on the monitor 97. 328 and 329 are flowcharts showing the set value control process (S3780) for controlling the display of the set value and the hole layout of the set value in the hall computer 90.

<<Collecting information about the image of players and the success rate of technical intervention>>
The hall computer 90 collects information as an important element when determining the setting value. As the information, the technical intervention success rate for each person and the age group information for each day of the week are required. The ball lending machine CT uses the face authentication engine of the individual face authentication device 800 described above to determine the change of person based on the information from each of the camera 69 (69F), gender and age group. In addition to these face authentications, it is possible to make a determination by biometric authentication such as a vocal cord, fingerprint, vein or iris.
Then, the information from the ball lending machine CT is sent to the hall computer 90. The hall computer 90 links the information obtained from the slot machine SMA and the information specifying the person obtained from the ball lending machine CT, generates the technical intervention rank list 1048 shown in FIG. It is stored and displayed on the monitor 97.

As shown in the technical intervention rank list 1048 of FIG. 319, the hall computer 90, for “person A” and “person B”, “type of jackpot”, “winning number” at the time of one jackpot, up to jackpot. "Success", "Big hit probability" during the game, "Number difference between the number of big hits and the perfect strategy" and "Success" when the perfect strategy is 100% The "rate" is calculated each time. The hall computer 90 refers to the technical intervention rank allocation table 1071 shown in FIG. 321 stored in the server 95, and determines the technical intervention rank for each person from the average value of the technical intervention rates. In addition, the hall computer 90 simultaneously calculates the number of persons in the technical intervention rank. Then, the hall computer 90 can rank each person as shown in FIG. 319, store the collected data in the server 95, and make a list on the monitor 97 and output it as a form.

Further, FIG. 320(A) shows an age group graph 1049 in which the age group playing the target slot machine SMA is specified by the face authentication engine, and the number of the player M in each age group is graphed for each day of the week. Then, the hall computer 90 shows a technical intervention success rate table 1045 by age, which is obtained by calculating the success rate of technical intervention by age, from the data shown in FIG. 319 described above, in FIG. 320(B). Further, the hall computer 90 calculates the ratio of the age group from the age group graph 1049 for each day of the week shown in FIG. 320(A), and calculates the correction value for each day of the week from the age-specific technical intervention success rate table 1045 shown in FIG. 320(B). The machine-divided correction value table 1058 by age group and day of the week shown in FIG.

Next, the hall computer 90 sets the set value while using the expected machine ratio when setting the set value as a guide, but there is always a difference between the set value and the actual measured value. In addition to age and age, a correction value for correcting the deviation from the actual measurement value that is the basic is calculated.
FIG. 322(A) shows “setting value”, theoretical value “theoretical machine cut” and “machine cut (complete capture)” for each machine, “measured machine split” of actual measurement data, and incomplete capture and complete capture The "correction multiplication rate" at that time is shown. The hall computer 90 calculates the correction multiplication factor by a value obtained by multiplying the actually measured “measured machine ratio” by the “theoretical value machine ratio” and multiplying by 100. The hall computer 90 calculates the average value of the correction multiplication rate for each set value from the collected data.

In FIG. 323(A), the average value of the correction multiplication rate for each set value calculated by the hall computer 90 shown in FIG. 322 is divided into a complete capture time and an incomplete capture time, and a comparison is made between the correction multiplication rate average value tables 1073. Is shown. The average value of the corrected multiplication rate is calculated from the data of each unit by dividing the setting value into two, that is, a complete capture and an incomplete capture.
If it is left as it is, it will be two correction values and it will be difficult to use it as an index, so it is necessary to use one correction value. Therefore, the hall computer 90 divides the success rate in accordance with the collected technical intervention success rate shown in FIG. 321 into four stages. Further, the hall computer 90 divides the average value of the correction multiplication rate from the time of the non-complete capture to the time of the complete capture shown in FIG. 323(A) into four stages according to the technical intervention rank. Then, the hall computer 90 multiplies the correction multiplication factor average value divided into four stages as shown in the correction value calculation table 1074 of FIG. 323(B) by the rank-specific number of people shown in FIG. 321, and for each set value. The average value is calculated as the correction value in the rightmost column. As described above, the hall computer 90 applies the correction value calculated in consideration of the ratio of the number of persons in the technical intervention rank that has been actually measured to the ratio of the machine division during the non-complete capture time and the complete capture time, thereby achieving high accuracy in the set value. It is possible to predict the machine ratio.

<<Control process of set value management system>>
Next, the setting value control processing (S3780) of the hall computer 90 when applying the above-described correction value and setting the setting value will be described with reference to FIGS. 324 to 329.
As shown in FIG. 325, an employee MS in the amusement arcade sets a set value for a plurality of slot machines SMA in the entire amusement arcade, applies a correction value from the set value, and averages the aggregated machine ratios to 100. The case where the target is determined by setting% and is set will be described. In the hall computer 90, in the setting column 1075 of the operation screen 1060, “previous set value” is set in the previous set value column 1061 as the previous set value for each machine, and “calculated set value” is set as the set value calculated by the hall computer 90. Is displayed. The hall computer 90 also displays a target setting field 1076 on the operation screen 1060. The employee MS operates the operation screen 1060 of the monitor 97 of the hall computer 90 to input the target value as “100%” in the target setting field 1076. If the “calculation setting field” shown in FIG. 325 is fixedly set, the hall computer 90 reflects the previous setting value and calculates the setting value. As described above, by providing the previously set value column 1061, it becomes a reference value for the current setting and the setting may be read by the player M, so that the employee MS sets the setting by referring to the previously set value. It is easy to set this time, being aware that it will be overlooked.

First, when the hall computer 90 operates the set value control processing (S3780) shown in FIGS. 328 and 329, the hall computer 90 displays the “pachi-slot corner layout” shown in FIG. 326 (S3781). The “pachi-slot corner layout” displays the layout of all the slot machines SMA and the previous set value in the previous set value column 1061 (S3782), and next to it, the newly set set value is newly set. It is displayed in the column 1063. FIG. 327 is an enlarged view of an AB portion surrounded by a broken line in the “pachi-slot corner layout”. The hall computer 90 can display a part of the layout in an enlarged manner on the operation screen 1060 and set the setting value. However, in the hatched portion shown in the figure, the setting value of the 405 series remains the same as the previous setting value. A fixed state is shown in a fixed display 1062.

Next, the employee MS inputs the date and time to be set in the date and time input field 1067 of the operation screen 1060 of the hall computer 90 shown in FIG. 325 (S3783). In the date/time input field 1067, the day of the week is automatically input by the calendar function.
Next, the employee MS selects automatic or manual from the mode selection field 1065 of the operation screen 1060 of the hall computer 90 shown in FIG. 325 (S3783). When the employee MS selects the manual operation (YES in S3783), the hall computer 90 causes the correction value setting field 1066 of the operation screen 1060 of the hall computer 90 to select whether to apply the correction value to the employee MS. (S3796). When the employee MS selects not to apply the correction value (NO in S3796), the hall computer 90 displays the machine value of the theoretical value on the operation screen 1060 (S3797), and the employee MS sets the set values for all units. Is input on the operation screen 1060 (S3798). With respect to the set value input by the employee MS, the hall computer 90 totalizes the machine ratios which are theoretical values of all the units and obtains an average value (S3805).

The hall computer 90 displays the setting value of each unit on the layout of the hall as shown in FIG. 326 (S3806/S3808). Further, the hall computer 90 displays the average machine division of all the machines in the calculated value display field 1068 and the calculated value list 1047 as shown in FIGS. 324 and 325 (S3808). In this way, since the hall computer 90 displays the set values along the hall layout, the employee MS can assume the expected payout amount and the stacking condition of the box while looking at the layout. It is possible to easily imagine the impression given to the player M from the assumption of the state where the ball boxes are stacked.

When the employee MS manually sets and applies the correction value (YES in S3796), the hall computer 90 extracts the correction value shown in FIG. 323(B) described above for each set value ( (S3799), a correction value is set (S3801). The hall computer 90 calculates the machine division by multiplying the theoretical machine division for each set value for each model by the above-mentioned correction value (S3802). The employee MS inputs the setting values of all the units from the operation screen 1060 (S3803), and the hall computer 90 calculates the machine ratio corrected by the correction values of all the units based on the input setting values (S3804). ..
With respect to the set value input by the employee MS, the hall computer 90 aggregates the machine ratios to which the correction values of all the units are applied, and obtains an average value (S3805). The hall computer 90 displays the set value of each unit on the layout of the hall as shown in FIG. 326 (S3806/S3808). Further, the hall computer 90 displays the average machine ratio of all the machines in the calculated value display field 1068 and the calculated value list 1047 as shown in FIGS. 324 and 325 (S3808).

Further, when the employee MS selects the automatic input (NO in S3784), the employee MS selects the age from the age-based/day-of-week correction value selection field 1064 of the operation screen 1060 of the hall computer 90 shown in FIG. 325. -Select whether to apply the correction value for each day of the week (S3785).
Next, when the employee MS selects to apply the age-specific/day-of-the-week correction values (YES in S3785), the hall computer 90 extracts the age-specific technical intervention success rate 1045 accumulated in the server 95 ( S3786). Further, the hall computer 90 extracts a model to which the correction value for each age and day of the week is applied (S3787). Next, the hall computer 90 sets a correction value that matches the day of the week from the age-based/day-of-the-week mechanical discount correction value table 1058 shown in FIG. 320(C) (S3788). It should be noted that both the machine discount correction value for each day of the week and the machine discount correction value for each age are required to be applied, but only one correction value is applied to obtain the average value of the machine discount. Good. Especially for age group, since the competence of technical intervention tends to decline with age, it is possible to perform calculation closer to the actual measured value by applying a correction value for each age group. As for the days of the week, since weekdays and holidays have a large difference in age distribution, the hall computer 90 can specify the correction value based on the distribution of the number of people by day of the week, and thus the calculation can be closer to the actual measurement value. ..

Next, the hall computer 90 multiplies the theoretical machine discount by the correction value and the age-specific/day-of-week machine discount correction value as shown in the calculated value list 1047 of FIG. 324 to calculate the machine discount for each set value (S3789). .. For example, in the “315-series” shown in the upper part of FIG. 324, when the calculated setting value is “T”, the theoretical value machine ratio (at the time of complete capture) is set to “109.7%” and the correction value “0” in FIG. 323. .9686", and since the day of the week is Saturday, the calculation is performed by multiplying by the correction value "0.97" in FIG. 320(C), and "103.07%" shown in the upper part of FIG. 324 is calculated. In this way, this system applies statistically measured values such as skill by age and ratio by age for each day to the theoretical value, so that the predicted value approaches the measured value and the index at the time of setting is set. It is possible to

Next, the hall computer 90 calculates a set value by a random number (S3793), and obtains an average value of the machine division of all the units by the set value determined by the random number value of all the units (S3794). Then, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 325, the hall computer 90 sets the allowable range of the calculated value of the machine division until the target value falls within the allowable range of “+−−0.5” in the allowable range setting field 1069, in S3793. Through S3794 are repeated (NO in S3795).
Due to such processing, if the setting on the store side is artificially performed, the setting may be read by the player M due to a customary habit. Therefore, the hall computer 90 should not be set as customary. By setting the random number, it is possible to prevent the player M from overlooking the setting. Further, the hall computer 90 sets the allowable range of the calculated value in the allowable range setting field 1069 when calculating the average value of the machine division, thereby increasing the calculation speed and preventing the processing of infinite loop. it can.

Then, when the calculated average value of the machine division reaches the target value (YES in S3795), the hall computer 90 displays the set value of each unit on the layout of the hall as shown in FIG. 326 (S3806 and S3808). ). In addition, the hall computer 90 displays the average machine ratio of all units in the calculated value display field 1068 and the calculated value list 1047 as shown in FIGS. 324 and 325 (S3808).

Next, when the employee MS does not select to apply the age-based and day-based correction values (NO in S3785), the hall computer 90 sets the theoretical value machine ratio (at the time of complete capture) for each set value. (S3791), and the theoretical value machine ratio (at the time of complete capture) is multiplied by the correction value of FIG. 323 to calculate for each set value (S3792). Then, the hall computer 90 calculates the set value by a random number (S3793), and obtains the average value of the machine ratio of all the units by the set value determined by the random number for all the units (S3794).
Further, the hall computer 90 repeats the processing of S3793 to S3794 until the target value falls within the set error range, for example, the “+−0.5” allowable range set in FIG. 325 (NO in S3795). .
Due to such processing, if the setting on the store side is artificially performed, the setting may be read by the player M due to a customary habit. Therefore, the hall computer 90 should not be set as customary. By setting a random number, it is possible to prevent the setting from being overlooked. Further, the hall computer 90 sets the allowable range of the calculated value when calculating the average value of the machine division, thereby increasing the calculation speed and preventing an infinite loop process.

Then, when the calculated average value of the machine division reaches the target value (YES in S3795), the hall computer 90 displays the set value of each unit on the layout of the hall as shown in FIG. 326 (S3806 and S3808). ). Further, the hall computer 90 displays the average machine division of all the machines in the calculated value display field 1068 and the calculated value list 1047 as shown in FIGS. 324 and 325 (S3808). Since the set values are displayed on the hall computer 90 in accordance with the hall layout, the employee MS can estimate the expected payout amount and the loading condition of the throwing box while watching the layout, and load the throwing box. It is possible to easily imagine the impression given to the game player M from the assumption of the state.

As described above, in this system, the employee MS can automatically set the value close to the actually measured value of the machine percent by determining only the target value of the machine percent. There is no need for skill to set the setting value, and the setting can be easily performed. In addition, since the present system does not read the habit of the customary setting due to the setting by the random number, the employee MS can perform the setting work with peace of mind. Further, although there were many variations in the correction values due to the technical intervention of the player M, the average of the correction values was calculated from the distribution of the number of people according to the rank of the actual technical intervention, so that the machine division based on the prediction that was closer to the actual measurement value was obtained. Calculation is now possible.

(A system that supports technical intervention for players who play game machines installed in a game arcade)
With reference to FIGS. 330 to 349, a system that supports technical intervention for a player who plays a game machine installed in a game arcade will be described.

<Technical intervention support unit>
The technical intervention support unit 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 330 to 335. FIG. 330 is a perspective view showing the slot machine SMA and the medal lending machine CT. FIG. 331 is a perspective view showing each camera unit 1070 mounted on the medal lending machine CT. FIG. 332 is a perspective view showing a state in which each camera unit 1070 mounted on the medal lending machine CT is opened and closed. FIG. 333 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the technical intervention support unit 1100. FIG. 334 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the medal lending machine CT. FIG. 335 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the image processing unit 1092.
The technical intervention support unit 1100 is a unit that assists a player who presses a desired symbol when stopping the reels (1041, 1042, 1043) of the slot machine SMA with the stop button 1102. The technical intervention support unit 1100 mainly includes each camera unit 1070, a technical intervention support processing unit 1090 which is application software provided in the medal lending machine CT, an image processing unit 1092, and a liquid crystal operation unit 1080.

First, a medal lending machine CT provided with a processing unit for controlling the technical intervention support unit 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. 334. The medal lending machine CT reads the programs stored in the ROM 1123, the RAM 1124, and the HDD 1125 connected to the main CPU 1122, and controls each device. A medium such as an SD card may be used instead of the HDD 1125. The image processing unit 1092 further includes a GPU or VPU (not shown) to increase the speed of image processing such as image data comparison processing or video processing.
Each device mainly includes a liquid crystal operation unit 1080, a card processing unit 807, a bill processing unit 809, each unit camera unit 1070 described later, a speaker SOU, a tip nozzle 1083, and a counting unit 1129.

The medal lending machine CT is provided with a bill processing unit 809 for performing a process for the player M to throw in bills such as 10,000 yen, 5000 yen and 1000 yen, and to lend out a medal CM as a game medium from the inserted bills. ing. From the medal lending machine CT, it is possible to lend game media until the balance is exhausted.
The medal lending machine CT is provided with a tip nozzle 1083 extending to the medal receiving tray 1106 of the slot machine SMA. The tip nozzle 1083 can drive the medal lending drive unit 1126 to dispense the stored medals to the medal tray 1106 of the slot machine SMA every predetermined number.

The medal lending machine CT includes a card processing unit 807. The card processing unit 807 includes a drive motor 811 for operating insertion and ejection of the membership card 550 and the guest card 551 inserted from the card insertion/ejection slot 811, and the number of balls held by the card reader/writer 804. We are rewriting the contents such as the balance and the value of the balance. Further, a guest card card storage unit is provided so that the employee MS does not have to replenish the remaining money or the possessed balls (earned balls) after moving the guest cards 5.
The ball lending machine PT is equipped with a speaker 831 so that an error state and handling can be announced, and a warning sound, an operation sound and a guidance sound are generated by the drive circuit 1132.

The medal lending machine CT is provided with a counting unit 1129 which can count the medals acquired by the game player M from the slot machine SMA with a counting counter 1127 at the lowermost portion or the middle portion (not shown). Further, the counter shutter 832 prevents erroneous counting of medal CMs to be counted.
The medal lending machine CT is provided with a liquid crystal operation unit 1080 which can operate the medal lending machine CT in the central portion. The liquid crystal operation unit 1080 is provided with a screen that can be touch-operated.

The individual cameras 69F (FIG. 331) are set so that the individual cameras (69F, U) are most focused when the player M is seated, and the individual is identified by capturing the front face or the side face. is doing. In addition, each of the cameras 69F and U (FIG. 331) is configured to be able to shoot the movement of the player M and the effect liquid crystal 1105 and the reel symbol 1040 of the slot machine SMA by using the pan/tilt/zoom functions. Has been done. The pan/tilt/zoom functions are driven by the drive unit 1076, and each camera 69F is controlled by the controller 1131 of the medal lending machine CT from the operation terminal 11 connected to the face authentication server 80 and the hall computer 90.
Further, it is possible to operate the mobile terminal device 40 of the employee MS while watching the image of each camera 69F (FIG. 331) via the communication server 10, so that the employee MS can operate the player M even from a distant place. Can be monitored. Especially, it is effective for monitoring a person who needs attention.

The medal lending machine CT is connected via an IF (interface) 808 to a platform information display device K having a liquid crystal display screen 891 for displaying useful information such as the number of jackpots and the number of starts of the slot machine SMA to the player M. There is.
Further, the medal lending machine CT sends to the hall computer 90 the data of the individual face authentication server 820 described above, the sales data of the medal lending machine CT, and the data obtained by counting the medals CM acquired by the counting unit 1129 to the hall computer 90. It is connected via an IF (interface) 808.

Next, each camera unit 1070 will be described with reference to FIGS. 330 to 333. Each unit camera unit 1070 connected to the medal lending machine CT is installed in a state in which each unit camera 69U, 69F is mounted and the key 1104 for opening and closing the slot machine SMA is closed. Each unit camera unit 1070 is mainly equipped with each unit camera 69F, each unit camera 69U, a support display unit 1072, a sealing key 1081, a speaker SOU, and a microphone MIN.
As shown in FIG. 331, each unit camera 69F images the front of the player M, and the state of the game of the player M. Each unit camera 69U images the reel symbol 1040 and the effect liquid crystal 1105 of the slot machine SMA.

The support display section 1072 is provided above each camera unit 1070, and corresponds to the arrangement of the reel symbols 1040 of the slot machine SMA. Each of the support display units 1072 (1072L, C, R) corresponds to a reel symbol 1040 (1041, 1042, 1043) and a stop button 1102 (L, M, R), and each stop button 1102 (L, M, R). This is a display for informing the game player M of the timing of pressing the R) and stopping the reel symbol 1040 set by the control to be described later by lighting and displaying the built-in LED or the like.

As shown in FIGS. 331 and 332, the rotation of the sealing key 1081 is fixed by the key MKY so that the slot machine SMA cannot be opened and closed easily. As a result, the slot machine SMA is prevented from being opened or closed to replace a board or the like. Further, as shown in FIG. 333, since the rotation detection sensor 1084 is provided in each camera unit 1070, when the sealing key 1081 is operated illegally, the illegal operation processing unit provided in the medal lending machine CT is provided. 1091 informs the hall computer system 90. Further, in the case where the sealing key 1081 is forcibly rotated, it is regarded as an illegal operation, and the state of the illegal operation is captured or recorded by the cameras 69F and U of each unit, so that the illegal operation such as a goto act can be dealt with. It is possible.
Then, the employee computer MS is immediately notified by the hall computer system 90, and the employee MS can monitor or rush to the slot machine SMA.
The speaker SOU is provided on the bottom surface of each camera unit 1070 so as to enable voice guidance of the operation when operating the technical intervention support unit 1100. The microphone MIN is capable of recording a voice uttered by the player M, and recording a musical composition and effect sound for effect from the slot machine SMA.

Next, the configuration of the technical intervention support unit 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. The technical intervention support unit 1100 is divided into each camera unit 1070 and the medal lending machine CT described above. Each device (microphone MIN, speaker SOU, each camera 69F, U, support display unit 1072) of each camera unit 1070 is controlled by the technical intervention support processing unit 1090 built in the ROM 1123 or HDD 1125 of the medal lending machine CT. ing.
Further, the technical intervention support processing unit 1090 is connected to the image processing unit 1092 and the liquid crystal operation unit 1080. The image processing unit 1092, as shown in FIG. 335, a face determination processing unit 1095, a design determination processing unit 1093 that determines the position and rotation cycle of the reel design 1040, and a production screen determination processing unit that determines the image of the production screen. A data storage unit 1094 for storing image data such as 1097 and pre-registered reel symbols 1040 and effects symbols is provided.
Further, as shown in FIG. 336(B), the liquid crystal operation unit 1080 is used for setting the symbols of the reel symbols 1040 that are aligned when the operator presses the eyes.

Next, the control processing of the technical intervention support unit 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 333 to 344. FIG. 336 is an explanatory diagram showing a screen display of the liquid crystal operation unit 1080 after recognizing the image of the slot machine SMA. FIG. 337 is a schematic diagram showing a display of an operation screen of the liquid crystal operation unit 1080. FIG. 338 is a flowchart showing the technical intervention support process (S3810). FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the symbol determination processing (S3820). FIG. 340 is an explanatory diagram showing how reel symbols 1040 of the slot machine SMA are judged. FIG. 341 is an explanatory diagram showing another state of determination of the reel symbol 1040 of the slot machine SMA. FIG. 342 is an explanatory diagram showing another aspect of determination of the reel symbol 1040 of the slot machine SMA. FIG. 343 is a time chart showing how the reel symbol 1040 of the slot machine SMA is initially set. FIG. 344 is a time chart showing a state of the technical intervention support processing S3810 of the reel symbol 1040 of the slot machine SMA.

First, a method of image processing for determining symbols will be described. In the present embodiment, a method for determining three symbols will be described, but any method may be adopted, and among the three methods, one may be automatically or manually selected in accordance with the symbols, Also, two methods may be used simultaneously by combining a plurality of methods.
A method of performing the first image processing will be described with reference to FIG. 340. The reel symbol 1040 is divided into three reels (1041, 1042, 1043). In the determination of the symbols, ten boundary lines (1112a to 1112j) are used so as to correspond to three reels and divide the reel symbol 1040 into three equal parts in one lateral direction. mx9) is formed. The symbols appearing in this one frame are determined by image processing. For example, from the image of the frame rate 60 fps, among the symbols extracted, as shown in FIG. 315, among the registered “7” symbols, It is determined whether or not there is a pattern having the same shape as the shape.

As shown in FIG. 340(A), the symbol determination processing unit 1093 captures a figure that the extracted symbol is supposed to be the same as the symbol registered from each frame area (mx1 to mx9), and is a captured diagram. As shown in FIG. 340(B), the grayscale-converted data is automatically set with a threshold and binarized into black and white to be data (1112k to 1112m). Then, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 performs edge processing on the binarized data (1112k to 1112m) to convert the symbol shape into data. The data-ized data appears as 1112n, 1112o, and 1112p, and it is determined whether or not it is positioned by comparing with the data of the reel symbol 1040 registered in advance.

In the slot machine SMA, the number of revolutions per minute is set to be less than 80 revolutions, so that the number of revolutions per minute is 0. Most slot machines SMA have a cycle of about 0.78 seconds, but the symbol determination processing unit 1093 displays the cycle in which this symbol appears, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 343, on the reel display front (SCM). Each unit camera 69U captures, performs cycle measurement and confirmation for each cycle in which data 1112n, 1112o, 1112p (FIG. 340) of mx4, mx5, mx6 (FIG. 340) appear, and a cycle of one rotation of the reel pattern 1040. The calculated averages and the like are totaled, and the data of the totaled cycles are stored in the data storage unit 1094. The data of this cycle is used for the technical intervention support process (S3810) described later.

A method of performing the second image processing will be described with reference to FIG. 341. The reel symbol 1040 is divided into three reels (1041, 1042, 1043). In the determination of the symbols, ten boundary lines (1113a to 1113j) correspond to three reels, and one reel is divided into three in the horizontal direction. A total of nine frame areas (mx1 to mx9) Is formed. The pattern appearing in this one frame is determined by image processing. For example, from the image of the frame rate of 60 fps, in the extracted patterns, as shown in FIG. 315, among the patterns, "7" strong light is emitted. Data of the transmitted shape is registered, and it is determined whether or not there is data having the same shape as the data 1113k, 1113l, and 1113m (FIG. 341).
As shown in FIGS. 341(A) and 341(B), in the reel symbol 1040 of the slot machine SMA, a reel lamp 1046C is provided in the rotating reel as a lamp for illuminating the reel from the inside. The reel symbol 1040 illuminated by the reel lamp 1046C is formed so that the light of this lamp is transmitted through only a specific symbol. Therefore, during the rotation of the reel, there is a portion where a specific pattern is illuminated brightly, and it is possible to press the bright portion. In this way, with the identification method based on the difference in brightness depending on the illuminance, it becomes easy to identify the position of the set symbol, especially in a dark hole.

In this way, each of the cameras 69U recognizes the difference in illuminance, which is the light and darkness illuminated by the light of the reel lamp 1046C, and the figure extracted from the captured figure is grayscaled as shown in FIG. 341(B). A threshold value is automatically determined for grayscaled data, and black and white binarization is performed to generate data (1113k to 1113m). Then, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 performs edge processing on the binarized data (1113k to 1113m) to convert the shape of the symbol into data. The converted data appears as 1113k, 1113l, and 1113m, and is compared with the data of the reel symbol 1040 registered in advance to determine whether or not it is positioned. After that, as described above, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 343, the cycle is initially measured and confirmed for each cycle, and the average and the like of the cycle of one rotation of the reel design 1040 are tabulated and tabulated. The cycle data is stored in the data storage unit 1094. The data of this cycle is used for the technical intervention support process (S3810) described later.

A method of performing the third image processing will be described with reference to FIG. 342. The reel symbol 1040 is divided into three reels (1041, 1042, 1043). In the determination of the symbol, ten boundary lines (1111a to 1111j) correspond to three reels, and one reel is divided into three equal parts in the horizontal direction. A total of nine frame areas (mx1 to mx9) Is formed. The symbols appearing in this one frame are determined by image processing. For example, from the image of the frame rate 60 fps, among the symbols extracted, as shown in FIG. 315, among the registered “7” symbols, It is determined whether or not there is a pattern having the same shape as the data 1111q, 1111r, 1111x, 1111y1111z, 1111ab (FIG. 342) of the portion of the shape that extends beyond the line.
As shown in FIGS. 342(A) and (B), the reel pattern 1040 of the slot machine SMA has a specific symbol having a larger width than a normal symbol, and vertical lines (1111a, 1111b, 1111c, 1111d, 1111e, 1111f). ) Is drawn, the symbol is formed so that it can be easily identified even while the reel symbol 1040 is rotating. Therefore, the reel pattern 1040 is easy to press with the protruding portion as a mark.

In this way, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 recognizes, with each camera 69U, the portion of the reel symbol 1040 that has come out of the vertical line (1111a, 1111b, 1111c, 1111d, 1111e, 1111f), and from the captured image. As shown in FIG. 342(B), the extracted diagram is grayscaled, and the grayscaled data is automatically binarized into black and white by setting a threshold value automatically and converted into data (1111k to 1111m). Then, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 performs edge processing on the binarized data (1111k to 1111m) to convert the shape of the symbol into data. The converted data appears as 1111q, 1111r, 1111x, 1111y, 1111z, 1111ab, and is compared with the data of the reel symbol 1040 registered in advance to determine whether or not it is positioned. Then, as described above, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 343, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 initially measures and confirms the cycle for each cycle, and the average of the cycle of one rotation of the reel symbol 1040 is calculated. Is stored in the data storage unit 1094. The data of this cycle is used for the technical intervention support process (S3810) described later.

After the above initial processing, the technical intervention support processing (S3810) is performed based on the operation of the player M. The technical intervention support process (S3810) shown in FIG. 338 will be described below.
When the slot machine SMA hits the jackpot, a flag is emitted to the player M, and as shown in FIG. 336(A), a display for aligning the symbols is displayed on the effect liquid crystal 1105 of the slot machine SMA. The technical intervention support unit 1100 identifies the winning symbol from the effect display of FIG. 336(A) recognized by each camera 69U, and as shown in FIG. 336(B), the recommended symbol of the symbol to be aligned is the liquid crystal operation unit 1080. Is displayed. If the recommended symbol is acceptable, the player M presses "OK" and proceeds to the technical intervention support process (S3820). If the player M wants to select a different symbol, he/she presses "select symbol" to move to the symbol selection screen as shown in FIG. 337(A), and the symbol corresponding to the reel symbol 1040 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 337(B), the reel symbols (1041, 1042, 1043) are selected from the touch panel of the liquid crystal operation unit 1080 (S3811).

Next, the player M sets the display color of the support display unit 1072 (L, C, R) from the liquid crystal operation unit 1080 (FIG. 336(B)) (S3812), and the support display unit 1072 (L, C, The illuminance of the display color of (R) is set (S3813). Further, the above-described symbol determination method is set in the data storage unit 1094 in the initial stage of the slot machine SMA, and the symbol determination processing unit 1093 extracts from the data storage unit 1094 during this processing (S3814) and the reel symbol 1040. Use the appropriate judgment method. When the player M starts supporting the technical intervention as described above, the player M performs a symbol determination process (S3820).

Explaining the first method as an example, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 captures an image of a frame rate of 60 fps from each camera 69U as shown in FIG. 340(A) (S3821), and the captured diagram. As shown in FIG. 340(B), the figure extracted from is converted into grayscale so that the colors other than “7” are black (S3822), and the threshold of the grayscaled data is automatically determined (S3823). Binarization of black and white is performed to form data (1112k to 1112m) (S3824). Then, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 performs edge processing on the binarized data (1112k to 1112m) (S3825) and data of the shape of the symbol (S3826). The data-ized data appear as 1112n, 1112o, and 1112p, and it is determined whether or not they match with the data of the reel symbol 1040 registered in advance (S3827).

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 344, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 extracts the numerical value of the average period that has been aggregated in advance, and each camera 69U compares each of the numerical values with the value and each reel symbol 1040 (1041, 1042, 1043). The cycle of the position of the reel display front surface (SCM) of () is measured (S3828). Then, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 lights the blinking of the support display unit 1072 (L, C, R) at a timing before the symbol set by the reel symbol 1040 passes to the position of the reel display front (SCM). .. As for this timing, since it is possible to control the stop to the winning arrangement if the reel symbol 1040 is hit even if it is pressed from the front of the four symbols (so-called pull-in range), the timing before the four symbols ( The support display unit 1072 starts to emit light (SPO) (S3832). Therefore, the notification of the timing (SPO) increases the range of timings at which the player presses the stop buttons 1102L, M, and R, which makes it easier for the player to press the eyes.
Then, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 performs lighting control until it is confirmed that the set symbol is stopped (YES in S3832). The symbol determination processing unit 1093 is provided with a determination period (HPO) for determining whether or not the set symbol is stopped, after the reel symbol 1040 of the slot machine SM is stopped, in the next rotatable stop period (WT). ing. In this way, since there is a period in which the reel symbol 1040 of the slot machine SMA remains reliably in the stop period (WT), it is possible to perform image processing such as determination with high accuracy.
The time chart shown in FIG. 344 shows one reel symbol 1040 as an example, but the same applies to the other two reel symbols 1040.

Through the above processing, the symbol determination processing unit 1093 measures the cycle of each reel symbol 1040, recognizes the set reel symbol 1040 to be stopped by each camera 69U, and the support display unit 1072 (L, C, R). The light emission is controlled in synchronization with.
The technical intervention support unit 1100 may be not only the light emission control but also the control for notifying by the sound from the speaker SOU.
If the set symbol is difficult to recognize by image processing, the technical intervention support unit 1100 identifies the number of frames based on the characteristic symbol, identifies the position of the symbol to be stopped, and determines the position to stop. It may be a control for notifying.

Next, a modified example of each camera unit 1070 (a, b) will be described with reference to FIGS. 345 to 348. The parts having the same configurations as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.
345 and 346 show an example in which each camera unit 1070a is attached to the smoke separating board 1120 by a support piece 1121 bent in an L shape. The block configuration is the same as in FIGS. 333 and 334.
Each unit camera unit 1070a is installed on the end surface of the smoke separating board 1120, and the image capturing position changes with the position of the drawer of the smoke separating board 1120, and the easy-to-see position of the support display unit 1072 (L, C, R) and each unit camera 69U. , F imaging positions can be changed.
In addition, as described above, the positions of the cameras 69U and F of the individual cameras can be changed to pan/tilt/zoom or the like by control.

347 and 348 show an example in which each camera unit 1070b is provided near the tip of the tip nozzle 1083 from which the medal CM is lent. Each unit camera 69U is provided on the slot machine SMA side, and each unit camera 69F is provided on the player M side. The support display unit 1072 (L, C, R) is provided on the side of the tip nozzle 1083. As a result, the lending status of the medal MC can be recorded, and it is possible to know who used the lent medal MC.
Although the support display unit 1072 is provided in each of the camera units 1070, the support display unit 1072 may serve as a notification means to notify by the liquid crystal display of the above-described table information display device K. Further, a support display unit 1072 that emits light may be provided on the platform information display device K.

(Technical features)
An example of the technical features of the present embodiment is shown in parentheses below, but they are given as an example without limitation, and the effects conceivable from these features are also described.

<First feature point>
A game operation means (for example, a start lever 1101) that starts a game when a player (for example, the game player M) operates and a plurality of symbols are provided, and changes according to the operation of the game operation means. Symbol changing means for starting (for example, mainly reel symbol 1040), and symbol stopping means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol changing means according to the operation of the player (for example, mainly stop buttons 1102L, M, R) And a gaming machine (for example, mainly a slot machine SMA), an imaging means for imaging the fluctuation of the symbol changing means (for example, each camera 69U mainly), and the symbol stopping means of the symbols. A stop notification means for determining a stop symbol to be stopped by operation (for example, the reel pattern 1040 mainly selected in S3811), analyzing from the image of the image capturing means, and notifying the timing at which the player presses the symbol stop means (For example, mainly the symbol determination processing unit 1093, the support display unit 1072 (L, C, R), the symbol determination processing (S3820)), it is characterized by including.

With the above characteristics, the present invention makes it possible for the player to push the eyes depending on the notification of the stop notification means by the device that supports the timing of stopping the symbol desired by the player, and the pattern desired by the player can be simplified. It is possible to stop.

<Second feature point>
The stop notification means, to determine the stop symbol specifying means (for example, mainly the symbol determination processing unit 1093, S3821 to S3826 processing) that specifies the stop symbol from the imaging means, and the cycle in which the symbol varying means makes a round. 1 cycle measuring means for measuring (for example, mainly the process of the symbol determination processing unit 1093, S3828, S3829), and based on the 1 cycle measuring means, the timing at which the player presses the symbol stopping means is displayed by light. Lighting display means (for example, mainly, the support display unit 1072 (L, C, R), the symbol determination processing unit 1093, the processing of S3828, and S3829) are provided.

With the above characteristics, the present invention can improve the accuracy of synchronization by measuring one cycle. Further, it is possible to improve the accuracy of notification by blinking light.

<Third feature point>
As for the timing to be notified by the stop notification means, the range of the timing within the pull-in range within which the stop pattern is displayed can be stopped within the range where the stop symbol is displayed by the stop control of the game machine by the stop control of the gaming machine. It is characterized by including a pull-in range informing means (for example, mainly the support display unit 1072 (L, C, R), the symbol determination processing unit 1093, the timing (SPO)).
With the above characteristics, the player can notify not only within the range in which the symbol varying means is displayed, but also in advance the timing at which the symbol can be pressed at a timing before the display range, so the symbol varying means of the gaming machine It is possible to press the symbol stopping means at a timing with a width by the stop control of, so that it is easy to press the eyes.

<Fourth feature>
The stop symbol specifying unit is an illuminance specifying unit (for example, mainly a symbol determination processing unit 1093) that specifies the position of the symbol by the brightness of the illumination (for example, mainly the reel lamp 1046C) that illuminates the symbol in the gaming machine. , S3814 processing, second image processing method).
With the above features, the present invention can easily identify the position of the symbol depending on the illuminance of the gaming machine, and thus can be utilized as an effective determination method by the image pickup means especially in a dark hall.

<Fifth feature point>
The stop symbol specifying means is provided with a vertically drawn boundary (for example, mainly vertical lines (1111a, 1111b, 1111c, 1111d, 1111e, 1111f)) in the image of the imaging means, and goes out from the boundary. It is characterized in that it is provided with an outside area specifying means (for example, mainly a pattern determination processing unit 1093, a processing of S3814, a method of performing a third image processing) for specifying the position of the stop symbol on the basis of a portion.
According to the above features, the present invention can specify the position of the symbol even in a gaming machine that is not provided with illumination illuminated by the symbol. Further, the position of the symbol can be specified regardless of the shape of the symbol.

<Sixth feature>
The stop symbol specifying means compares the image of the appearance of the symbol registered in advance with the image of the appearance of the symbol recognized by the image pickup means to specify the position of the stop symbol (for example, a main character The symbol determination processing unit 1093, the processing of S3814, the method of performing the first image processing) are provided. With the above characteristics, the present invention identifies the stopped symbol by comparing the appearances, It is possible to specify the position of the stop symbol without a doubt.

<Seventh feature>
The stop symbol specifying unit includes a binarization processing unit (for example, mainly a symbol determination processing unit 1093, S3824) that specifies the stop symbol by binarizing the image captured by the image capturing unit. Is characterized by.
With the above features, the present invention makes the design and the specified region clear by binarizing, and the error in the image processing is reduced. In addition, it is possible to quickly specify the appearance in particular.

<Eighth feature>
The stop symbol specifying means, during the waiting time when the game machine stops all of the symbol varying means, the game operating means is operated, and the next variation of the symbol varying means is started (for example, mainly The wait time (WT)) is provided with a determination means (for example, mainly the processing of S3832, a determination period (HPO)) for determining whether or not the set stop symbol has stopped.
With the above characteristics, the present invention can secure a period for determining whether or not the stopped symbol is correct, and therefore highly accurate determination can be performed.

<Ninth feature>
A seal provided with the image pickup means, provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, at a position that obstructs the opening/closing operation of the gaming machine, and capable of sealing the opening/closing of the gaming machine with a key (for example, a key MKY mainly). It is characterized in that a stop means (for example, mainly a sealing key 1081) is provided.
According to the above features, the present invention can prevent a goto action and secure an appropriate position of the image pickup means by a key that prevents the opening and closing of the gaming machine.

As shown in the above-described embodiment, the present invention can be applied to the gaming machine of the present embodiment such as a game center or a casino, or a facility that conducts business similar to the gaming machine.

1... Game hall, 2... Management area, 3... Game area, 5... Wireless router (wireless communication means),
10... Communication server, 60... Surveillance camera system, 61... Surveillance camera (imaging means),
69... Each camera (imaging means), 70... Edge processing device (edge processing means),
71...end ball server, 80...face authentication server,
90... Hall computer (game information analysis means),
440... Shutter part (conveying means), 600... Captured image,
550... Membership card (storage medium), 551... Guest card (storage medium),
555, 556, 557, 559, 605, 606... Face image data (feature data),
800... Individual face authentication device (player identification means),
805, 805a, 805b, 805c... Counting unit (counting means),
820... Individual face authentication server, 860... Night monitoring system,
965... Top lamp (call display means),
1050... Game hall information management system (game information management means)
K, Ka, Kb, Kc, Kd... Platform information display device (information display device/game information display device) as game machine related attachment means, P... Pachinko machine, SMA... Slot machine,
PT... Ball lending machine (game medium lending means) as an amusement machine-related attachment means,
CT: a medal lending machine (game medium lending means) as an amusement machine-related attachment means,
JC...Counter (counting means) as a game machine-related attachment means, BA...Battery (power storage means),
SM: personal portable terminal, TA: game media storage tank TA (storage means),
S/Sa... Ball detection sensor (storage amount detection means), BR... Transport gutter (transportation means).

Claims (9)

A game operating means for starting a game when a player operates,
Lottery means for drawing a winning combination from a plurality of combinations according to the operation of the game operating means,
With a plurality of symbols, a symbol varying means for starting variation in accordance with the operation of the game operating means,
A symbol stopping means for stopping the variation of the symbol varying means in accordance with the operation of the player,
A gaming machine equipped with
An image pickup means for picking up an image of the variation of the symbol variation means,
A stop notification means for determining a stop symbol to be stopped by the operation of the symbol stop means among the symbols, analyzing from the image of the image pickup means, and notifying the timing when the player presses the symbol stop means,
A system for amusement arcades, which is equipped with. The stop notification means, a stop symbol specifying means for specifying the stop symbol from the image pickup means,
One cycle measuring means for measuring in order to determine the cycle in which the symbol varying means makes one round,
Lighting display means for displaying by light the timing at which the player depresses the symbol stopping means based on the one cycle measuring means,
The system for a game arcade according to claim 1, further comprising: The timing to be notified by the stop notification means is that the symbol stop means is pressed and the stop control of the game machine causes the stop symbol to be within a range in which a stop symbol is displayed. The game hall system according to any one of claims 1 and 2, further comprising retracting range informing means for informing a range of pressing timing. 4. The stop symbol specifying means comprises an illuminance specifying means for specifying the position of the symbol according to the brightness of the illumination for illuminating the symbol in the gaming machine. The system for amusement hall according to the item. The stop symbol specifying means is provided with a boundary drawn up and down in the image of the image pickup means, and an area outside specifying means for specifying the position of the stop symbol on the basis of a portion outside the boundary. The game hall system according to any one of claims 1 to 3. The stop symbol specifying unit includes an appearance specifying unit that compares the image of the appearance of the symbol registered in advance and the image of the appearance of the symbol recognized by the image pickup unit to specify the position of the stop symbol. The game hall system according to any one of claims 1 to 3. 7. The stop symbol specifying unit comprises a binarization processing unit that specifies the stop symbol by binarizing the image captured by the image capturing unit. The system for amusement arcade according to 1 above. The stop symbol specifying means, the game machine all the symbol changing means is stopped, the game operating means is operated, during the standby time when the next fluctuation of the symbol changing means is started, the set stop The system for a game arcade according to any one of claims 1 to 7, further comprising a determination unit that determines whether or not the symbol has stopped. It is characterized in that it comprises the image pickup means, is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, is provided at a position that obstructs the opening/closing operation of the gaming machine, and has a sealing means capable of sealing the opening/closing of the gaming machine with a key. The system for a game arcade according to any one of claims 1 to 8.

Images